Mercedes - S-Class - Owners Manual - 2022 - 2022

S-Class Vehicle document wallet Here you can find comprehen‐ sive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form. É2235843807"ËÍ 2235843807 Order no. P223 0273 13 Part no. 223 584 38 07 Edition A-2022 Mercedes-Benz Digital – in the vehicle Familiarize yourself with the con‐ tents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multi‐ media system (menu item "Vehi‐ cle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips. S-Class Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz Front passenger airbag warning & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the codriver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle". Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi‐ cles and about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Documentation team AG: Not to be reprinted, trans‐ lated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Mercedes‑Benz AG. ©Mercedes‑Benz Vehicle manufacturer Mercedes‑Benz AG Mercedesstraße 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany Airbag warning sticker for USA and Canada As at 07.10.2020 Thank you for buying Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Opera‐ tor's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre‐ gard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol‐ lowing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment R Technical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif‐ fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus‐ trations. The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Operator's Manual R Printed Operator's Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent Supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company 2235843807 2235843807 2 Contents Symbols ........................................................ 5 At a glance .................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ......... 8 Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera) ........................................................ 12 Overhead control panel ................................ 16 Door operating unit and seat adjustment ..... 18 Control settings in the rear passenger compartment ................................................ 20 Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 22 Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 24 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 24 General notes ............................................. Protection of the environment ...................... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...................... Operator's Manual ........................................ Touch-sensitive controls ............................... Service and vehicle operation ....................... Operating safety ........................................... 25 25 25 26 27 27 28 Declaration of conformity for vehicle installed radio components .......................... Diagnostics connection ................................ Qualified specialist workshop ....................... Correct use of the vehicle ............................ Notes for persons with electronic medi‐ cal aids ......................................................... Problems with your vehicle ........................... Reporting safety defects ............................... Limited Warranty .......................................... QR code for rescue card ............................... Data storage ................................................. Copyright ...................................................... Occupant safety ......................................... Restraint system ........................................... Seat belts ..................................................... Airbags ......................................................... PRE-SAFE® system ....................................... Automatic measures after an accident ......... Safely transporting children in the vehi‐ cle ................................................................ Notes on pets in the vehicle ......................... 30 32 33 33 34 34 34 35 35 36 40 42 42 44 49 60 61 62 75 Opening and closing .................................. 76 SmartKey ...................................................... 76 Doors ............................................................ 81 Trunk ............................................................ 85 Side windows ............................................... 92 Sliding sunroof ............................................. 96 Roller sun blinds ......................................... 101 Anti-theft protection ................................... 103 Seats and stowing ................................... Notes on the correct driver's seat posi‐ tion ............................................................. Seats .......................................................... Steering wheel ............................................ Easy entry and exit feature ......................... Memory function ........................................ Memory function in the rear passenger compartment .............................................. Stowage areas ............................................ Cup holder .................................................. Sockets ....................................................... Refrigerator box .......................................... Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna ... 106 106 106 126 128 129 131 134 145 146 148 151 Installing and removing the floor mats ........ 154 Light and visibility ................................... Exterior lighting .......................................... Interior lighting ........................................... Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ Mirrors ........................................................ Area permeable to radio waves on the windshield ................................................... Infrared-reflective windshield function ........ 155 155 165 168 171 174 175 Climate control ......................................... 176 Overview of climate control systems .......... 176 Operating the climate control system ......... 178 Driving and parking ................................. Driving ........................................................ DYNAMIC SELECT button ........................... Automatic transmission .............................. Function of the 4MATIC .............................. Refueling .................................................... Parking ........................................................ 189 189 201 203 207 208 210 Driving and driving safety systems .............. 218 Vehicle towing instructions ......................... 279 Driver display ........................................... Notes on the driver display ......................... Notes on the 3D driver display ................... Operating the driver display ....................... Menus on the driver display ........................ Head-up Display ......................................... Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ Boost technology) .................... Overview of status displays on the driver display ........................................................ 280 280 280 280 281 282 MBUX multimedia system ....................... Overview and operation .............................. System settings .......................................... Navigation and traffic ................................. Telephone ................................................... Mercedes me and apps ............................... Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ...... Radio & media ............................................ Sound settings ........................................... 287 287 302 307 316 319 326 329 336 285 Contents 3 Maintenance and care ............................. ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ Engine compartment .................................. Cleaning and care ....................................... 337 337 338 343 Breakdown assistance ............................ Emergency .................................................. Flat tire ....................................................... Battery (vehicle) ......................................... Tow starting or towing away ....................... Electrical fuses ........................................... 350 350 351 357 363 369 Wheels and tires ...................................... Notes on noise or unusual handling char‐ acteristics ................................................... Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires ............................................................ Notes on snow chains ................................. Activating or deactivating snow chain mode .......................................................... Tire pressure ............................................... Loading the vehicle .................................... Tire labeling ................................................ Definition of terms for tires and loading ..... 373 286 373 373 374 374 375 380 384 389 4 Contents Changing a wheel ....................................... 392 Emergency spare wheel .............................. 401 Technical data .......................................... Notes on technical data .............................. Vehicle electronics ..................................... Regulatory radio identification of small components ............................................... Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview ............................ Operating fluids .......................................... Vehicle data ................................................ 402 402 402 404 492 494 501 Display messages and warning/indi‐ cator lamps .............................................. 503 Display messages ....................................... 503 Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 561 Index ......................................................... 579 Symbols In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol‐ lowing symbols: & DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices Warning notices draw your attention to haz‐ ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi‐ ronmental notes Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi‐ ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes. * NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged. # Observe notes on material damage. % These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. # Instruction (/ page) Further information on a topic Messages in the central display Display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause 5 6 At a glance – Cockpit Left-hand-drive vehicles At a glance – Cockpit 1 Light switch → 155 2 Steering wheel gearshift paddles → 206 3 Combination switch → 156 4 Driver display → 280 5 DIRECT SELECT lever → 203 6 ü Start/stop button → 190 → 199 7 Central display → 287 8 Glove box → 137 9 Storage compartment → 137 è ECO start/stop function A Switch panel for: ÷ DYNAMIC SELECT button → 202 c Active Parking Assist → 273 \ Quick vehicle access ú Fingerprint sensor → 287 Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/off → 287 a Switches sound on/off → 287 ø Adjusts the volume → 287 B £ Hazard warning light system → 157 C Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys‐ tem → 289 D Adjusts the steering wheel → 126 → 127 Driver display → 280 H Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC → 228 F Diagnostics connection → 32 G M Opens the hood → 338 H ! Electric parking brake → 214 ý Switches the steering wheel heater on/off E Control panel: 7 8 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard) Driver display (standard) At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard) → 566 E ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 570 F Electric parking brake (red) → 570 → 570 1 #! Turn signal lights → 156 C ÿ Coolant temperature 2 ä Suspension (red) → 573 D Coolant temperature display → 573 ä Suspension (yellow) 3 # Electrical malfunction → 566 4 Ù Power steering (red) → 564 F USA only Ù Power steering (yellow) → 564 ! Canada only Ù Rear axle steering (red) → 564 Ù Rear axle steering (yellow) → 564 $ USA only 5 6 Restraint system → 562 J Canada only 6 ü Seat belt → 562 é Recuperative Brake System, USA only → 570 7 L Distance warning → 573 J Brakes (yellow), Canada only → 570 574 → 566 J K High beam → 156 L Low beam → 155 T Parking lights → 155 8 ! ABS → 9 h Tire pressure monitoring system → 577 A ; Check Engine → 566 B å ESP® OFF → 574 ÷ ESP® → 574 G Brakes (red) H 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator I Fuel level 9 10 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard) K R Rear fog light → 156 L H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system → 577 12 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera) Driver display with driver camera At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera) 1 #! Turn signal lights → 156 J Canada only 2 ü Seat belt → 562 é Recuperative Brake System, USA only → 570 3 L Distance warning → 573 J Brakes (yellow), Canada only → 570 4 6 Restraint system → 562 → 566 5 h Tire pressure monitoring system → 577 6 å ESP® OFF → 574 ÷ ESP® → 574 F R Rear fog light → 156 7 ! ABS → 574 G K High beam → 156 8 ÿ Coolant temperature → 566 L Low beam → 155 T Parking lights → 155 A ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 570 H H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system → 577 B Electric parking brake (red) → 570 I # Electrical malfunction → 566 J ; Check Engine → 566 → 564 9 Coolant temperature display F USA only $ USA only E Fuel level K Ù Power steering (red) ! Canada only C Brakes (red) D 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator → 570 Ù Power steering (yellow) → 564 Ù Rear axle steering (red) → 564 Ù Rear axle steering (yellow) → 564 13 14 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera) L ä Suspension (red) → 573 ä Suspension (yellow) → 573 16 At a glance – Overhead control panel At a glance – Overhead control panel 1 Sun visors 8 Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off → 165 2 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off → 165 9 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel → 96 3 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off → 165 → 96 4 ; me button → 321 3 Opens/closes the front roller sunblind for the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 5 D Opens/closes the rear roller sunblind for the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel → 96 PASSENGER AIR BAG → 55 6 | Switches automatic interior lighting con‐ trol on/off → 165 REAR SEAT AIRBAG → 59 B Inside rearview mirror → 173 7 G SOS button → C Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off → 165 321 A Indicator lamps: 17 18 At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment 1 ß Ü Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 81 A p Opens/closes the trunk lid → 85 2 Adjusts the seats electrically → 106 B D Rear window roller sunblind → 101 3 w Switches the seat heating on/off → 124 75 4 s Switches the seat ventilation on/off 126 C S Child safety lock for the rear side win‐ dows → → 5 w Adjusts the front passenger seat from the driver's seat → 109 D Opens the door → 81 E W Opens/closes the rear left side window → 92 6 V Operates the memory function → 130 F W Opens/closes the left side window → 92 7 Í Operates the outside mirrors → 171 G Adjusts the head restraints → 118 8 W Opens/closes the right side window → 92 H Seat adjustment using the multimedia system → 122 9 W Opens/closes the rear right side win‐ dow → 92 19 20 At a glance – Control settings in the rear passenger compartment Vehicles with a reclining rear seat At a glance – Control settings in the rear passenger compartment 1 Climate control rear operating unit → 177 2 Electronics compartment in the center con‐ sole → 147 3 j Sets the fully reclined position → 113 4 V Selects the front passenger seat → 110 5 s Switches the rear seat ventilation on/off → 126 6 w Switches the rear seat heating on/off → 124 7 Adjusts reclining rear seats electrically → 112 115 V socket 8 a Resets the standard seat adjustment settings → 113 9 V Memory function in the rear passenger compartment → 132 → 148 A Storage box in the seat backrest Refrigerator box B Storage compartment in the rear armrest C MBUX rear tablet bracket D Cup holder 21 22 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 1 B-pillar with: → 157 information label on fuel type → 208 376 7 £ Hazard warning light system → 35 2 Safety vests → 350 3 ; me button → 321 Information label on tire pressure → → 321 QR code for accessing the rescue card → 35 → QR code for accessing the rescue card G SOS button 8 Fuel filler flap with: 494 9 Tow-starting or towing away → 364 → 361 A First-aid kit (soft sided) → 351 5 Tow-starting or towing away → 364 B TIREFIT kit → 353 6 Flat tire → C Warning triangle → 351 4 Checking and refilling operating fluids Starting assistance 351 23 24 Digital Operator's Manual Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Info 5 Operator's Manual 5 Open Digital Operator's Manual The Digital Operator's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. # Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Operator's Manual: R Quick start: find the first steps towards set‐ ting up your vehicle. R Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle. R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions. R Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the driver display. R Language: select the language for the Digital Operator's Manual. You can search for keywords using the search field Search, in order to find quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle. 1 2 3 4 Menu Search Back Contents section Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed. Additional methods of calling up the Digital Operator's Manual: Driver display: call up brief information as dis‐ play messages in the instrument cluster MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice control system Global search: call up search results for con‐ tents of the Digital Operator's Manual in the home screen For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man‐ ual is deactivated while driving. General notes Protection of the environment + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi‐ ronment. Please observe the following rec‐ ommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is cor‐ rect. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them). # Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐ ute to environmental protection. # Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. # Switch off the engine in stationary traf‐ fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function. # Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Observe the ECO display for an eco‐ nomical driving style. 25 Environmental issues and recommendations It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regu‐ lations serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to not using recycled recon‐ ditioned components Mercedes‑Benz AG offers recycled recondi‐ tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned compo‐ nents and parts from Mercedes‑Benz AG. 26 General notes * NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐ ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the fol‐ lowing areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console R Lateral roof frame # # # Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. Have accessory parts retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele‐ vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal‐ function. Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be used. More than 300,000 different genuine MercedesBenz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz mod‐ els. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers pro‐ vide for quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 492) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man‐ ual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus‐ trations. The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi‐ cle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. General notes Touch-sensitive controls In addition to conventional switches and but‐ tons, your vehicle is equipped with touch-sensi‐ tive controls. These are located in the following areas of your vehicle: R Roof and door control panel R Climate control R Steering wheel R MBUX multimedia system The controls have touch-sensitive user interface surfaces. The surfaces are controlled by press‐ ing or swiping to adjust settings or to trigger functions, for example. In the area of the touchscreen, you also receive haptic feedback in the form of a pulse or a vibra‐ tion, or the surface structure changes on the touch-sensitive user interface surface, for exam‐ ple. You receive haptic feedback in the following sit‐ uations, for example: R When pressing a button on the user interface surface R When scrolling in a list or table R When reaching a new area on the user inter‐ face surface, e.g. a pop-up window When handling touch-sensitive user interface surfaces, observe the following points to avoid problems operating: R Do not affix stickers or similar objects on the surfaces R Keep the surfaces protected from moisture and wet conditions R Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt Some touch-sensitive control elements have a symbol and integrated indicator lamps. When operating, make sure to press on the symbol of the control element. 27 Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R Service points or replacement parts may not be available immediately. R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi‐ cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R The fuel may have an extremely low octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an author‐ ized Mercedes‑Benz service center, or write to one of the following address: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 28 General notes In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Maintenance Your customer advisor confirms the service in the service report. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro‐ gram offers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can find further information in the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu‐ ment wallet. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐ tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces‐ sary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera‐ ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi‐ cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐ tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Possible danger due to substances hazard‐ ous to health In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California: Operating safety & WARNING Risk of accident due to mal‐ functions or system failures To avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the prescribed service and maintenance work as well any required General notes repairs carried out at a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts Modification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com‐ ponent parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec‐ tronic component parts or their soft‐ ware. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data". & WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or offroad, regularly check the vehicle under‐ side. # Remove trapped plants or other flam‐ mable material, in particular. # If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 29 * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv‐ ing too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension compo‐ nents In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road R The vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot‐ hole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Compo‐ nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon‐ ger absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam‐ mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and 30 General notes the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. or # If driving safety is impaired while con‐ tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist work‐ shop. If you modify component parts of these highvoltage components or touch damaged com‐ ponent parts, you may be electrocuted. High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible. # Never perform modifications to compo‐ nent parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch component parts of highvoltage components after an accident. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐ tem (EQ Boost technology) Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high voltage components. These compo‐ nents are marked with a high voltage label: & DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐ tem contain individual high-voltage compo‐ nents. These high-voltage components are under high voltage. All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Declaration of conformity for vehicle instal‐ led radio components USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle com‐ ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible General notes for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "This vehicle contains license-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Inno‐ vation, Science and Economic Development Can‐ ada’s RSS(s). Operation is subject to the follow‐ ing two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." Charging unit for wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI) This equipment complies with FCC and IC radia‐ tion exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 0 cm (in contact) between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating with any other antenna or transmitter. USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi‐ ces (Model: D-WMI2015A): This Device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules." The name and address of the party responsible is: Continental Automotive Systems US Inc. 2400 Executive Hills Drive Auburn Hills, MI 48326-2980 United States of America Toll gate antenna (UAGTMB) This device complies with FCC rules part 90 and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada RSS-137. Operation is subject to the fol‐ lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This de vice must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This 31 transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in con‐ junction with any other antenna or transmitter. FCC (États-Unis) et ISED (Canada): Cet appareil est conforme aux règlements de la FCC, section 90, et au CNR-137 d’Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique Canada. Le fonc‐ tionnement est assujetti aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer d’interférences nuisibles et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celle qui pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionne‐ ment. MISE EN GARDE: L’émetteur a subi des tests et est conforme aux règlements de la FCC et d’ISDE. Les changements ou modifications non approuvés explicitement par la partie responsable de la conformité pourraient rendre caduque l’autorisation de l’utilisateur de se ser‐ vir du dispositif. Cet appareil est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux radiations de la FCC et d’ISDE établies pour un environnement non con‐ trôlé. Les utilisateurs finaux doivent respecter les instructions d’utilisation spécifiques pour satisfaire aux exigences de conformité aux expo‐ sitions de RF. L’émetteur doit se trouver à 20 cm 32 General notes au minimum de l’utilisateur et ne doit pas être situé au même endroit que tout autre émetteur ou antenne ni fonctionner avec un autre émet‐ teur ou antenne. Name and address of the manufacturer Gentex Corporation 600 North Centennial St. Zeeland, MI 49464 USA Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical inter‐ face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, within the scope of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data by a specialist work‐ shop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected by a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐ necting devices to the diagnostics con‐ nection If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and connect products approved by your authorized MercedesBenz Center. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. * NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. # If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance. Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter (/ page 194). General notes Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnos‐ tics connection can lead to emissions monitor‐ ing information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection. Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components Please refer to the warranty terms and condi‐ tions for this matter. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali‐ fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to cor‐ rectly carry out the work required on your vehi‐ cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modifications as well as installations and conversions R Work on electronic components R 33 Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ boost technology): work on high voltage components of the 48 V onboard electrical system Mercedes‑Benz recommends an authorized Mercedes‑Benz Center. Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R The safety notes in this manual and respec‐ tive Supplements R Technical data for the vehicle R Traffic rules and regulations R Laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles 34 General notes Notes for persons with electronic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating sta‐ tus of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment. For this reason, the following can occur in isola‐ ted cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health effects Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac‐ turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possi‐ bility of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes- Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out by a qualified specialist workshop: R Vehicle components carrying live voltage R Transmission antenna R Multimedia system and sound system If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi‐ ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti‐ fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satis‐ faction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec‐ essary, contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed‐ eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the General notes National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to the https:// www.safercar.gov/; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590,: USA. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: https:// www.safercar.gov Canada only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans‐ port Canada in addition to notifying MercedesBenz Canada Inc. If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division tollfree in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; you may also go to the following websites for more information: R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls R French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels 35 Limited Warranty * NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instruc‐ tions. Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola‐ tion of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operat‐ ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi‐ cle damage. QR code for rescue card QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con‐ tains the most important information about your 36 General notes vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. Data storage Data processing in the vehicle Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehi‐ cle. Control units process data which, for exam‐ ple, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment func‐ tions. The following provides you with general informa‐ tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what pur‐ pose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in ques‐ tion in their respective Operator's Manual. This information is also available online and, depend‐ ing on the vehicle equipment, digitally. Personal data Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the coun‐ try, this vehicle identification number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the license plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by con‐ trol units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns. Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide gov‐ ernmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufac‐ turer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offense. Governmental entities are themselves, in individ‐ ual cases and within the applicable legal frame‐ work, authorized to read out data from the vehi‐ cle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example. Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehi‐ cle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example: R Vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral accelera‐ tion, number of wheel revolutions or the fas‐ tened seat belts display R Ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the General notes vehicle itself. Control units often contain data memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent docu‐ mentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunctions. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow‐ ing data are stored: R Operating status of system components, such as fill levels, tire pressure or battery status R Malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes R System reactions in special driving situa‐ tions, such as airbag deployment or the inter‐ vention of stability control systems R Information on events leading to vehicle damage In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only tem‐ porarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example. If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics con‐ nection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, mal‐ functions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufac‐ turer is subject to product liability. For this rea‐ son the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These 37 data can also be used to examine the custom‐ er's warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work. Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individ‐ ual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R Seat and steering wheel positions R Suspension and climate control settings R Individual settings, such as interior lighting Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R Multimedia data, such as music, films or pho‐ tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system 38 R R R General notes Address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an inte‐ grated navigation system Entered navigation destinations Data about the use of Internet services These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in par‐ ticular, when you use online services in accord‐ ance with the settings that you have selected. Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart‐ phone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transfer‐ red to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/ night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Opera‐ tor's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in par‐ ticular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is deter‐ mined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone. Online services Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connec‐ tion, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wire‐ less network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online func‐ tions can be used via the wireless network con‐ nection. This includes online services and appli‐ cations/apps provided to you by the manufac‐ turer or by other providers. Manufacturer's services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of serv‐ ices, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a con‐ tractual agreement or when consent has been given. General notes You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva‐ ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system. Third party services If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsi‐ bility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufac‐ turer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of per‐ sonal data. Data protection rights Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufac‐ turer and its data protection officers. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle. MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multi‐ media system or Mercedes me connect, addi‐ tional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the loca‐ tion of the vehicle may be compiled by the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me con‐ nect. For additional information, please refer to the "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions. 39 Event data recorders USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit‐ uations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ standing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were operating R Whether or not the driver and front passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and R How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a better understand‐ ing of the circumstances in which accidents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by 40 General notes your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐ ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat‐ ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci‐ dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with‐ out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les‐ see. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter‐ ing, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys‐ tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. Copyright Free and open source software Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Registered trademarks R R R R R R Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐ tooth SIG, Inc. DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. Dolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trade‐ marks of Daimler AG. HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gen‐ tex Corporation. iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. General notes R R R R R R Burmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. Microsoft® and Windows Media® are regis‐ tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq‐ uity Digital Corporation. Gracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. ZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis‐ tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. 41 42 Occupant safety Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system The restraint system includes the following com‐ ponents: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems The restraint system can help prevent the vehi‐ cle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro‐ tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tension‐ ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro‐ tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident. In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu‐ pant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐ sible. R Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. However, no system available today can com‐ pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying. Reduced restraint system protection & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system Vehicle occupants may no longer be protec‐ ted as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom‐ modate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372). Restraint system functionality When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys‐ Occupant safety tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional. Malfunctioning restraint system A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys‐ tem if: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐ tions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. Function of the restraint system in an acci‐ dent How the restraint system works depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is preemptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the colli‐ sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred cannot play a deci‐ sive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they pro‐ vide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐ out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if 43 only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle decel‐ eration. Depending on the detected deployment situa‐ tion, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: fron‐ tal impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Window curtain airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact R Rear airbag: frontal impact R Belt airbag: frontal impact R Cushionbag: frontal impact 44 R Occupant safety PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 55). & WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, partic‐ ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig‐ gered or an airbag deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig‐ gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hear‐ ing. R In general, the powder released is not haz‐ ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental pro‐ tection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will find information on perchlo‐ rate, for example. Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐ not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐ pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Always observe the instructions about the cor‐ rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 106). Occupant safety In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro‐ vide the intended level of protection, each vehi‐ cle occupant must observe the following infor‐ mation: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must fit tightly and snugly across the body. R The seat belt must be routed across the cen‐ ter of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐ der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin‐ ted, abrasive or fragile objects. R R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never allow babies and chil‐ dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 134). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat. The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt retractor (/ page 66). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 63). 45 Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat‐ belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin‐ ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system. 46 # Occupant safety Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys‐ tem. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt anchorage Objects next to the front seat that block the seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt anchorage on the front seat impair the func‐ tion of the Emergency Tensioning Devices. # Before starting the journey, make sure that there are no objects around the seat belt buckle or between the front seat and door. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi‐ fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R R The seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Modifications have been made to the Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended. # Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor. # Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean. # Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. & WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten‐ sioning Devices Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera‐ tional and are unable to perform their inten‐ ded protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi‐ ately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. Occupant safety # Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted. # Information on the beltbag in the rear seat belt The BELTBAG identification indicates that a rear seat belt is equipped with a beltbag. When activated, the beltbag increases the pro‐ tected area of the vehicle occupant's ribcage. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to use of a non-approved child restraint sys‐ tem In an accident, the beltbag may damage a non-approved child restraint system or a child restraint system which has not been approved for use in conjunction with the belt‐ bag. # Therefore, always use LATCH or ISOFIX to fasten a child seat equipped with an integrated restraint system. # For vehicles equipped with the optional rear seat-belt airbags ("beltbag"), only # use a Mercedes-Benz approved booster seat with integrated backrest. Never use an airbag equipped seat belt to fasten a front- or rear-facing child seat or a non-approved booster seat. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on approved child restraint systems. Extending/retracting the seat belt extender in the rear passenger compartment The seat belt extender for the rear seat helps you fasten your seat belt. # Close the door. The seat belt extender extends. % If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the seat belt extender extends when you reach for the seat belt tongue. 47 The seat belt extender retracts again in the fol‐ lowing cases: R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle R The seat belt tongue is not engaged in the seat belt buckle within a certain time R The respective door is opened R A certain speed is exceeded after pulling away & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an extended seat belt extender while the vehicle is in motion If the seat belt does not sit correctly on the body, it cannot perform its intended protec‐ tive function. # Always ensure that the seat belt extender is retracted while the vehicle is in motion. If the seat belt extender does not retract auto‐ matically, it can be retracted manually. To do so, press the seat belt extender back as far as it will 48 Occupant safety % A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the notes on fastening the seat belt (/ page 44). go before starting the vehicle. Pressing the seat belt extender back into place requires force. % You can deactivate the seat belt extender. Activate the child safety lock for the rear passenger compartment side windows (/ page 75). When installing a child restraint system to the rear seat, observe the vehicle-specific information (/ page 66). * NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled Fastening and adjusting seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐ not be pulled out any further. Vehicles with illuminated design seat belt buckles: the illuminated seat belt buckle makes fastening your seat belt easier in certain situa‐ tions, for example, when ambient light condi‐ tions are poor. % The illumination on the seat belt buckle does not indicate that the seat belt buckle is func‐ tioning correctly. # # # Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor‐ responding seat. Press and hold the seat belt outlet release and slide seat belt outlet 3 into the desired position. Let go of the seat belt outlet release and ensure that seat belt outlet 3 locks into position. When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unneces‐ sarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the Emergency Tensioning Device. # Only buckle the seat belts as intended. % Observe the notes on correctly fastening the seat belt (/ page 44) and stowage options (/ page 134). Information on installing a child restraint sys‐ tem and on children traveling in the vehicle can be found in the "Children in the vehicle" section (/ page 66). Occupant safety Seat belt adjustment function PRE-SAFE®: Vehicles with After a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjustment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys‐ tem (/ page 49). Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant Protection # Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment. Releasing seat belts # Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue. Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger The ü seat belt warning lamp in the driver's display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passenger's doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened. R The driver or front passenger unfastens their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Airbags Overview of airbags Driver's/front passenger seat: 1 Knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger airbag 4 Window curtain airbag 5 Side airbag 49 50 Occupant safety R R R R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head and ribcage Window curtain airbag: head Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants Rear airbag: head Information on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat Rear seats: 4 Window curtain airbag 6 Side airbag 7 Rear airbag The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. An additional arrow sym‐ bol M indicates the installation location for cer‐ tain airbags. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the codriver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When installing a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ cific information (/ page 72). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 72). Information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 55). * NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied. Occupant safety # # Store objects in a suitable place. Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Depending on the detected accident situation, the window curtain airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied. Information on the rear airbag Always observe the information on the rear air‐ bag, especially in the following situations: R A person is sitting on the outer rear seat. R You install a child restraint system on the outer rear seat. R You stow objects behind the front seats. Before beginning the journey, observe the infor‐ mation on the rear airbag (/ page 57). Be aware of the status of the respective rear airbag depending on the situation both before and dur‐ ing the journey (/ page 59). Information on the cushionbag in the reclin‐ ing rear seat The cushionbag offers additional occupant pro‐ tection in the event of frontal impacts. When enabled, the cushionbag deploys under the seat cushion. This helps prevent the vehicle occupant from slipping off the seat cushion. If you install a child restraint system on the reclining rear seat, always observe the additional notes (/ page 66). Protective capacity of the airbags Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a cor‐ rectly fastened seat belt. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro‐ tective function. 51 Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information. # Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant. To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa‐ tion on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 106). 52 R R R R R Occupant safety Vehicles with rear airbag: always observe the information on the rear airbag when the rear seat is occupied (/ page 57). The vehicle occupants should sit as far back from the airbags as possible and keep an equal distance to them. Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. The occupants must always keep their feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may other‐ wise be in the deployment area of the airbag. Vehicles with rear airbag: always observe the information on the rear airbag when the rear seat is occupied (/ page 57). If children are traveling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes (/ page 63). Always store and secure objects correctly. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the follow‐ ing in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air‐ bag. Vehicles with rear airbag: also observe the information on the rear airbag (/ page 57). R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an air‐ bag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deploy‐ ment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation R instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. Limited protection provided by airbags & WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐ cations to the cover of an airbag If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and do not affix objects to it. The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 49). Occupant safety & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as inten‐ ded. In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the correspond‐ ing seats by Mercedes-Benz. & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐ tioning sensors in the door The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work per‐ formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. # Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro‐ tection. # Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced. Have deployed airbags replaced immediately. Status of the front passenger front airbag Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys‐ tem. The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly. 53 & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys‐ tem. # Do not store any objects under the codriver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ cific information (/ page 72). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 72). 54 Occupant safety & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system Objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system could affect the func‐ tion of the automatic co-driver airbag shut‐ off. # Do not place any objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system. # Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system is resting on the sitting surface of the co-driver seat. # Make sure that the backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system is, as far as possible, resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver seat. # Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 44). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐ sible. The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the follow‐ ing situations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the sitting sur‐ face. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐ bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly. # Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas‐ sification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag. Occupant safety Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 55). Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica‐ tor lamps Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously. The status of the front passenger airbag is dis‐ played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps after the self-test: R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out after 60 sec‐ onds. R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa‐ bled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. 55 If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta‐ tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. After installing a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con‐ tinuously. 56 Occupant safety & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver air‐ bag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENA‐ BLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERI‐ OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ cific information (/ page 72). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. After installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the following information. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forwardfacing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with the vehicle inte‐ rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐ cator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. # # Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accord‐ ingly. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ cific information (/ page 72). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con‐ tinuously or be off, depending on the person's stature. Occupant safety A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a stature correspond‐ ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person with a build corresponding to that of an adult must not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously or remains off, depending on the classification. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the per‐ son of smaller stature should use a rear seat. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐ bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor‐ rectly fastened seat belt. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. 57 Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger seat (/ page 72) Information on the rear airbag Points to remember when the rear seat is occupied The rear airbag offers the occupants on the outer rear seats additional occupant protection in the event of certain types frontal impacts. When triggered, the rear airbag deploys between the rear seat occupant and the front seat. The rear airbag can help prevent the occupants on the rear seats from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, observe the following information: R Inform persons on the rear seats about the rear airbag in the front seat. R A person sitting on the rear seat must adopt the correct seat position and sit as far back 58 R Occupant safety from the rear airbag as possible. Adjust the front seats when necessary so that vehicle occupants are sitting as far back from the airbag as possible and at an equal distance to them. Observe the notes on airbag protection (/ page 51). To avoid risks resulting from the deployment of the airbag, vehicle occupants on the outer rear seats must observe the following information in particular: R The occupants must always keep their feet on the floor. Otherwise, feet and legs of occupants may be in the deployment area of the rear airbag. If an occupant's feet cannot reach the floor, they must adopt the correct seat position and let their legs hang down the front of the seat. R The feet or legs of the person on the rear seat must not rest against the seat backrest of the front seat, for example. Otherwise, their feet and legs are in the deployment area of the rear airbag. This should be taken R R into consideration especially if you are travel‐ ing with a child on the rear seat. If you are traveling with a child in the left or right rear seat, observe the vehicle-specific information: (/ page 70). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the left and right rear seats. Make sure that the covers for the rear air‐ bags are not damaged. Observe the notes on limitations to the pro‐ tection provided by airbags (/ page 52). & WARNING Risk of injury due to a dam‐ aged rear airbag cover If a rear airbag cover is damaged, the rear airbag can no longer function correctly and can even cause additional injuries when deployed. # Before starting a journey, make sure the covers for the rear airbags are not dam‐ aged. If a rear airbag cover is damaged, disable the rear airbag. Have a dam‐ aged rear airbag cover replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. You can disable or enable the rear airbag via the multimedia system (/ page 60). Objects behind the front seat Objects in the deployment area of the rear air‐ bags may prevent the rear airbags from function‐ ing correctly. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects placed in front of the rear airbag cover Objects in front of the rear airbag cover can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the rear airbag which is integrated into the front seat. The rear airbag can potentially deploy in an uncontrolled manner and can cause addi‐ tional injury to the person on the front seat. # Always stow and secure objects cor‐ rectly. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 134). Occupant safety Disabling/enabling the rear airbag If, after consideration of the notes and instruc‐ tions in this Operator's Manual, you deem the additional occupant protection provided by the rear airbag unnecessary, the rear airbag can be disabled. The rear airbags should be disabled in the follow‐ ing situations in particular: R A rearward-facing child restraint system is secured on the left or right rear seat. R The person in the rear seat, for example a child, cannot sit in the correct seat position. Their feet and legs are potentially in the deployment area of the rear airbag. R Due to the position of the front seats, an occupant's legs, for example, are in the deployment area of the rear airbag. R Objects are stored behind the front seat which are in the deployment area of the rear airbags. You can disable or enable the rear airbag via the multimedia system (/ page 60). Function of the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps l Left rear seat k Right rear seat When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the REAR SEAT AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultane‐ ously. 59 After the self-test, the status of the rear airbag for the left and right rear seat is displayed via the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps: R ON is lit: the rear airbag may deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out after approx‐ imately 60 seconds. R ON and OFF are off: the rear airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the rear airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an acci‐ dent. If the REAR SEAT AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the REAR SEAT AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the rear airbag. The REAR SEAT AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. 60 Occupant safety Enabling/disabling the rear airbag via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant Protection # Enable or disable the desired rear airbag under Rear Airbags. PRE-SAFE® system PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protec‐ tion) PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv‐ ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas‐ ures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas‐ ures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Close the sliding sunroof. R R R R Vehicles with memory function: move the front passenger seat to a more favorable seat position. Vehicles with memory function in the rear compartment: move the outer rear seats to a more favorable seat position. Vehicles with multicontour seat: increase the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multi‐ media system is switched on, generates a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro‐ tective mechanism of a person's hearing. * NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐ tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place. Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your‐ self. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases. Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is can‐ Occupant safety celed automatically when the vehicle pulls away. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. System limits The system will not initiate any action in the fol‐ lowing situations: R When backing up The system will not initiate any braking applica‐ tion in the following situations: R Whilst driving or R When entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist Function of PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side If an imminent side impact is detected, PRESAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the center of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant. Vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: the body can also be slightly raised. If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual(/ page 504) display message appears. Automatic measures after an accident Depending on the type and severity of the acci‐ dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example: R Automatic braking (post-collision brake) R Activating the hazard warning lights R Triggering an automatic emergency call (/ page 327) R Switching off the engine R R R R R 61 To restart the vehicle, switch the ignition off and switch it back on (/ page 190). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, it is possible that the vehicle can no longer be started. Switching off the fuel supply Unlocking the vehicle doors Lowering the side windows Displaying the emergency guide in the cen‐ tral display Switching on the interior lighting Function of the post-collision brake Depending on the accident situation, the postcollision brake can minimize the severity of a fur‐ ther collision or even avoid it. If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can implement automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied. The driver can cancel automatic braking by tak‐ ing the following actions: R Braking more strongly than automatic brak‐ ing 62 R Occupant safety Fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force R R Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle % Also strictly observe the safety notes for the specific situation. In this way you can recog‐ nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil‐ dren are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 63). Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have seri‐ ous consequences. Always be diligent in secur‐ ing a child carefully before every journey. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi‐ cle. The child restraint system must be appropri‐ ate to the age, weight and size of the child. The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal‐ ling a child restraint system. Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than chil‐ dren secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint sys‐ tem is, for example: R A baby car seat R A rearward-facing child seat R A forward-facing child seat R A child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. Observe standards for child restraint sys‐ tems All child restraint systems must meet the follow‐ ing standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the instal‐ lation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Occupant safety Detecting risks, avoiding danger Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings R The vehicle's seat belt system R The Top Tether anchorages Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint sys‐ tem (/ page 67). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be installed properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide. Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo‐ site direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer‐ vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system. 63 Always secure a child restraint system cor‐ rectly & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufactur‐ er's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat. # Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint sys‐ tem. # Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them. # Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers. 64 Occupant safety If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always install child restraint systems correctly, even when not in use. # Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information: Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat (/ page 67). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 71). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 72). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 72). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour‐ ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the cur‐ rent situation (/ page 55). Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Also secure Top Tether if present. - & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle R R Do not modify the child restraint system & WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐ cations to the child restraint system The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system. # Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer. Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐ tems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been dam‐ aged or involved in an accident. # Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again. Occupant safety Avoid direct sunlight & WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up excessively. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. # Cover the child restraint system with a blanket, for example. # If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Observe when stopping or parking & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. & WARNING Danger to life due to expo‐ sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi‐ cle If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic‐ ular, unattended in the vehicle. 65 66 Occupant safety Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system Left/right rear seat Preferred securing system: ® LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 69). Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Be sure to observe: If the rear seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the rear airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 59). R Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 55). R Notes on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 53). Center rear seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 69). Activating or deactivating the special seat belt retractor & WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the special seat belt retractor is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and can‐ not be immediately closed again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accord‐ ance with the traffic conditions. # Activate the special seat belt retractor again and correctly secure the child restraint system. When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured. Occupant safety The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats Installing a child restraint system: # When installing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer's installa‐ tion and operating instructions as well as the information in this Operator's Manual. # Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet. # Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle. Activating the special seat belt retractor: Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. When the special seat belt retractor is activa‐ ted, you will hear a ratcheting sound. # Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly. # Deactivating the special seat belt retractor: # Press the release button of the seat belt buckle. # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to the seat belt outlet. Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is excee‐ ded. Too much load may be placed on the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child and the child restraint sys‐ tem together weigh more than the per‐ missible gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg ), only use a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child # 67 restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R In the manufacturer's installation and operat‐ ing instructions for the child restraint system used R On a label on the child restraint system, if present Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system. O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. 68 Occupant safety O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. ® When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, also observe the follow‐ ing: O When using a baby car seat in weight group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in weight group I on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint sys‐ tem. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight group I: remove the head restraint from the respec‐ tive seat, if possible. In addition, the back‐ rest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys‐ tems in weight group II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. Before every journey, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehi‐ cle. Occupant safety * NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat during installation of the child restraint system # # # # # # # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐ ped. Vehicles with reclining rear seats: Tilt the backrest of the reclining rear seat back slightly before the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is installed. Fold upholstered lining 1 upwards. Pull the tab on upholstered lining 1 upwards and position it on the supporting surface. Upholstered lining 1 will remain folded upwards. Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both mounting brackets 2 in the vehicle. To close, fold upholstered lining 1 upwards. Lift the tab from the support surface and slide it back into the upholstery slot between # the seat backrest and seat cushion. Close the upholstery flap. Vehicles with reclining rear seats: Return the reclining rear seat backrest to an upright position. The reclining rear seat backrest must be in contact with the child restraint system. Securing Top Tether & WARNING Risk of injury or death from adjusting the seat after installing a child restraint system Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear bench seats: The following may occur: R The Top Tether belt may sit either too loose or too tight R The child restraint system may be loose, incorrectly positioned or damaged and then not perform its intended protective function. # 69 Never adjust the seat after the child restraint system has been installed. ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX and the vehicle. 70 Occupant safety with the child restraint system manufactur‐ er's installation instructions. not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 4. Vehicles with rear airbags Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the left and right rear seat # % Canada: Only the two outer Top Tether anchorages are available. # If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards (/ page 119). # Remove cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3. # Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply # # # Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint bars. Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt 4 into Top Tether anchorage 3 without twisting. Tension Top Tether belt 4. In doing so, com‐ ply with the child restraint system manufac‐ turer's installation instructions. If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down‐ wards (/ page 119). Make sure that you do Sticker visible when the rear door is open Occupant safety When installing a child restraint system, the rear airbag can be disabled. If using a forward-facing child restraint sys‐ tem with enabled rear airbag: make sure that the child's feet are not placed in front of the rear airbag cover or on the seat backrest. The child's legs can otherwise be flung upward if the rear airbag is deployed. Enabling/disabling the rear airbag The rear airbag can be enabled or disabled via the multimedia display (/ page 60). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a weight category I forwardfacing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys‐ tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. 71 O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 66). 72 # # Occupant safety Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet. Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver air‐ bag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # # Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENA‐ BLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERI‐ OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Observe the specific instructions for the rear‐ ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 72). Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica‐ tor lamp: R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 55). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena‐ bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 72). O Observe the child restraint system manufac‐ turer's installation and operating instruc‐ tions. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the Occupant safety vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys‐ tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system. # # # # # # The seat belt on the front passenger side is equipped with a child seat safety feature. When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 66). # Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐ ment. Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position. Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible. Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐ wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐ let. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly. 73 Child safety locks Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. 74 # # # Occupant safety Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. & WARNING Danger to life due to expo‐ sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi‐ cle If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic‐ ular, unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside. If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users R Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example # # # Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are traveling in the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows. # # Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate). Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly. Occupant safety Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows # To activate/deactivate: press button 2. The rear side window can be opened or closed as follows: R Indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on the driver's door Indicator lamp 1 is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door When the child safety lock is activated, the con‐ trols in the rear passenger compartment are dis‐ abled for: R The rear side windows R The adjustment of the front passenger seat from the rear passenger compartment R The rear seat belt extender R The roller sunblinds: Of the rear side windows Of the rear window In the roof R 75 Notes on pets in the vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat‐ tended in the vehicle If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten‐ ded or unsecured, they could possibly press buttons or switches. An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example R Switch systems on or off and endanger other road users Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐ tended. # Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car‐ rier. 76 Opening and closing SmartKey Overview of SmartKey functions & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. # # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. * NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic fields # Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Vehicle SmartKey with panic alarm 1 Opens/closes the trunk lid 2 3 4 5 Unlocks (with embossed surface) Locks Indicator lamp Panic alarm % If indicator lamp 4 does not light up after pressing the Ü or s button, the bat‐ tery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible. Replace the SmartKey battery (/ page 78). The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following components: R Doors R Fuel filler flap R Trunk lid If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Antitheft protection is armed again. Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec‐ tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the SmartKey's functionality. Opening and closing Indicator lamp of the vehicle locking system Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing # Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock. Activating/deactivating the panic alarm Requirements: R The ignition is switched off. # # To activate: press button 1 for approx‐ imately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered. To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again. or # Press the start/stop button on the cockpit, with the SmartKey inside the vehicle. Changing the unlocking settings Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap R To switch between settings: press the Ü and s buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice. Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the Ü button twice. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the # Indicator lamp 1 in the trim on the driver's side flashes when the vehicle is locked from outside. In the following cases, indicator lamp 1 remains off: R When the vehicle is locked from inside R Whilst driving 77 78 Opening and closing sole, the function of the SmartKey is auto‐ matically activated (/ page 190). driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked. Deactivating the function of the SmartKey Removing/inserting the emergency key Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: If you deactivate the function of the SmartKey, the KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular SmartKey. Activate the function of the SmartKey so that all its func‐ tions will again be available. You can also deactivate the function of the SmartKey to reduce the energy consumption of the SmartKey if you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time. # To deactivate: press the s button on the SmartKey twice in quick succession. The SmartKey indicator lamp flashes twice briefly and lights up once. # To activate: press any button on the Smart‐ Key. % When the vehicle is started with the Smart‐ Key in the marked space of the center con‐ Removing the emergency key Inserting the emergency key Insert emergency key 2 at marking 3 until it engages. % You can use emergency key 2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring. # # # Press release button 1. Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly. Fully remove emergency key 2. Replacing the SmartKey battery & DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐ stances. Swallowing batteries may cause Opening and closing severe internal burns to occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐ dren. # If the cover and/or cap of the battery compartment does not close securely, do not use the SmartKey any longer and keep out of the reach of children. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat‐ teries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. 79 # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐ shop. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 78). # Press emergency key 2 into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until cover 1 opens. When doing so, do not hold cover 1 closed. 80 # # # # # # # # Opening and closing Insert emergency key 2 into the opening and lift up covering 3 and remove it. Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery 4 falls out of the Smart‐ Key. Insert the new battery with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other impurities. Insert the front tabs of covering 3 into the housing and then press on both sides to close it. Make sure that covering 3 is completely closed. Insert the front tabs of cover 1 into the housing and then press until it is completely closed. Insert the emergency key again (/ page 78). Problems with the SmartKey, troubleshoot‐ ing You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # # # # # Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 76). Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 78). Use the replacement SmartKey. Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 84). Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of the SmartKey is impaired: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or auto‐ matic barriers # Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference. You have lost a SmartKey # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well. Opening and closing Doors Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside 81 This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the SmartKey. R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY‐ LESS-GO. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY‐ LESS-GO Requirements: The SmartKey is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m). R The driver's door and the door on which the door handle is used are closed. R # # # To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle 1. To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door handle. To open a rear door: pull the rear door han‐ dle again. To unlock: press button 1. # To lock: press button 2. The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights up once the vehicle is locked. % The buttons are also on the front passenger and rear doors. # The door handles are extended when: R The vehicle is unlocked R The vehicle SmartKey is detected R A door is opened The door handles retract: R When the vehicle is locked 82 Opening and closing R When pulling away After waiting for a time R * NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid or a door R R # When using an automatic car wash When using a high pressure cleaner Deactivate the function of the SmartKey in these situations. or # Make sure that the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) (power washer) or 20 ft (6 m) (automatic car wash) away from the vehicle. Observe the notes: On washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 343) R On using a high pressure cleaner (/ page 344) R # To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur‐ face of door handle 1. % If the door handle is not extended, touch sensor surface 2 to unlock. # To lock the vehicle: touch recessed sensor surface 3. # Convenience closing: touch recessed sen‐ sor surface 3 for an extended period. % Further information on convenience closing (/ page 94). Opening and closing Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The function of the SmartKey has been deac‐ tivated. R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # # # # # # Activate the function of the SmartKey (/ page 78). Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 76). Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 78). Use the replacement SmartKey. Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 84). Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or auto‐ matic barriers # Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference. Activating or deactivating the automatic locking feature Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Locking Function % The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace. 83 Switch Automatic Door Lock on or off. In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R The vehicle is being towed or pushed. R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna‐ mometer. # Power closing function & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries. # Ensure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area. # Automatic closing of the doors can be canceled by pulling the outer or inner door handle. If you push the door into the lock to the first detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock. 84 Opening and closing % If the vehicle is locked from the outside, or while pulling away, an automatic closing of the doors can be triggered. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 78). # If the door handle is retracted: press the front area of door handle 1. The door handle folds slightly outward. Pull and hold the door handle. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emergency key Unlocking a left-hand vehicle door with the emergency key Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO # Remove the emergency key (/ page 78). # # # # Pull and hold the door handle. Insert the emergency key into the lock cylin‐ der. Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise to position 1. Remove the emergency key and release the door handle. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO # Opening and closing Locking the doors # 85 To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key counter-clockwise as far as it will go. If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside. Trunk Opening the trunk lid & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning # # # # If the door handle is extended: slightly pull and hold the door handle. Insert the emergency key into the lock cylin‐ der. Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise to position 1. Remove the emergency key and release the door handle. # # Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening 1 on the door lock. To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open. 86 Opening and closing * NOTE Damage to the trunk lid by obsta‐ cles above the vehicle Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing The trunk lid swings upwards when it is opened. # Therefore, make sure that there is suffi‐ cient clearance above the trunk lid. # # # With the trunk lid opening height restriction activated, manually pull the stopped trunk lid up. If an obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the trunk lid. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. Pull the trunk lid handle. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 89). Closing the trunk lid & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle # # # Pull trunk lid remote operating switch 1. Press and hold the H button on the SmartKey. If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it up. Release it as soon as it begins to open. If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. Opening and closing # Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐ gage or loads against slipping or tipping over. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Notes on closing the trunk lid: your vehicle is equipped with automatic SmartKey recognition. If a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is detec‐ ted in the vehicle, the trunk lid will not be locked and will pop open again. Note that the trunk lid will not be locked if the following situation occurs: R You have locked the vehicle and close the trunk lid while a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle. and R A second SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehicle. Automatic SmartKey recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # Before locking, ensure that at least one SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle. To close the trunk lid: pull the trunk lid down using the handle recess and push it closed. % If you lightly push the trunk lid closed, the power closing function will automatically pull the trunk lid into the lock. # Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the closing area. # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area. # Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: R Press the H button on the SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. R 87 Pull the trunk lid handle. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper. # Pull the trunk lid handle. Release it as soon as it begins to close. # If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate position, push it down. The trunk lid will continue to close. 88 Opening and closing SmartKey must be in the vicinity of the vehi‐ cle. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS With the trunk lid completely open, make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 89). # # Press trunk lid remote operating switch 1. # Press closing button 1 on the trunk lid. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO # Press locking button 2 on the trunk lid. If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle, the trunk lid will close and the vehicle will be locked. # With the trunk lid completely open, press and hold the H button on the SmartKey. The Trunk lid automatic reversing function The trunk lid is equipped with automatic block‐ age detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the auto‐ matic closing process, it will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentive‐ ness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function The reversing function will not react: R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers R towards the end of the closing procedure Opening and closing In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trap‐ ped. # Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, use one of the following options: R Press the H button on the SmartKey. R Press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. R Pull the trunk lid handle. HANDS-FREE ACCESS function 89 % A warning tone sounds while the trunk lid is opening or closing. & WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid or a door With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or interrupt trunk lid movement by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately. Observe the notes when opening (/ page 85) and closing (/ page 86) the trunk lid. R R # or When using an automatic car wash When using a high pressure cleaner Deactivate the function of the SmartKey in these situations. 90 # Opening and closing Make sure that the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) (power washer) or 20 ft (6 m) (automatic car wash) away from the vehicle. When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes: R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the vehicle while performing the kicking move‐ ment. R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again. 1 Detection range of the sensors If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow. R The kicking movement is made using a pros‐ thetic leg. The trunk lid could be opened or closed uninten‐ tionally, in the following situations: R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehi‐ cle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage. R Clamping straps, tarps or other coverings are pulled over the bumper. R A protective mat with a length reaching over the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R The protective mat is not secured correctly. Deactivate the function of the SmartKey (/ page 78) or do not carry the SmartKey about your person in such situations. Opening and closing Switching separate trunk locking on and off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Switching separate trunk locking on Select Block Trunk Access. # Create a PIN. # Press OK to confirm the PIN. # Enter the PIN again and confirm it. The trunk will remain locked if you unlock the vehicle centrally. % If an accident has been detected, the trunk will unlock even if separate locking is switched on. % You can open the trunk with the emergency key even while trunk lock is active. Separate trunk locking will remain active. # Switching separate trunk locking off Select Block Trunk Access. # 91 Enter the PIN. If the PIN is correct, separate trunk locking will be switched off and the PIN deleted. Resetting the PIN If you have forgotten the PIN, you can switch off separate trunk locking with the emergency key. # Select Block Trunk Access. # Confirm Forget PIN?. # Unlock the trunk within three minutes with the emergency key. Separate trunk locking will be switched off and the PIN deleted. Unlocking and opening the trunk from inside with the emergency release # Requirements: R The 12 V vehicle battery is connected and charged. Unlocking the trunk lid using the emergency key # # # Press emergency release button 1 briefly. Take the emergency key out of the SmartKey (/ page 78). Insert the emergency key into the trunk lock as far as it will go. 92 Opening and closing Activating/deactivating the trunk lid opening height restriction Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing # Activate or deactivate the Opening Height Limiter. This function prevents the trunk lid from hitting a low garage ceiling, for example. Side windows Opening and closing the side windows Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise from position 1 to position 2. # Turn the emergency key back to position 1 and remove it. % If you use the emergency key to unlock and open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm sys‐ tem will be triggered. # & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the but‐ ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, release the but‐ ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows Children could become trapped if they oper‐ ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐ tended. Opening and closing # # # # Activate the child safety lock for the rear passenger compartment side win‐ dows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. 93 To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again. When the vehicle is switched off, you can con‐ tinue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened. % Vehicles with electric roller sunblinds on rear doors on the left and right: The but‐ tons for the rear side windows also open and close the roller sunblinds (/ page 101). Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched on. 1 Closing 2 Opening The buttons on the driver's door take prece‐ dence. # To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. Automatic reversing function of the side win‐ dows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. 94 Opening and closing & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window The reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐ gers. R During resetting. The reversing function cannot prevent some‐ one from becoming trapped in these situa‐ tions. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey) & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. # Press and hold the Ü button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The panoramic sliding roof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on. % If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic slid‐ ing sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. % If the roller sunblinds of the rear doors are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. # To interrupt convenience opening: release the Ü button. # To continue convenience opening: press and hold the Ü button again. Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside) & WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win‐ dow and the sliding sunroof. # When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing Opening and closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. Press and hold the s button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The panoramic sliding roof is closed. # To interrupt convenience closing: release the s button. # To continue convenience closing: press and hold the s button again. % Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 81). # Resolving problems with the side windows & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window. A side window cannot be closed and you can‐ not see the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide. # Adjust the side windows. Adjusting the side windows 95 If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor‐ responding button again until the side win‐ dow has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor‐ responding button again until the side win‐ dow has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjust‐ ment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening fea‐ ture. Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. 96 # # Opening and closing Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 76). Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 78). Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pan‐ orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. # During the opening and closing proc‐ ess, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the sliding sunroof. # If someone is trapped, release the con‐ trol panel immediately. or Touch the control panel during auto‐ matic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped. # & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by chil‐ dren or # Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. # # During the opening or closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement. If someone is trapped, release the con‐ trol panel immediately. Touch the control panel during auto‐ matic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped. * NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice. * NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects Objects that protrude from the sliding sun‐ roof may damage the sealing strips. Opening and closing # # Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. # * NOTE Damage to panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel caused by roof luggage rack # If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is opened when a roof luggage rack is installed, the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel may be damaged by the roof luggage rack. # Do not open the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel if a roof luggage rack is installed. # The sliding sunroof and the front roller sunblind are operated using control panel 1. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. # To open: swipe backwards across control panel 1 and hold. 97 To close: swipe forwards across control panel 1 and hold. To raise or lower: press control panel 1 briefly. To start automatic operation: swipe for‐ wards or backwards across control panel 1. To cancel automatic operation: press con‐ trol panel 1 again. The opening/closing process will be stop‐ ped. 98 Opening and closing Operating the rear passenger compartment roller sunblind from the front Operating the rear roller sunblind from the rear passenger compartment Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof dur‐ ing the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic revers‐ ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function # # To open or close: press button 1. To stop: press button 1 again. If you stop the opening or closing process, the roller sunblind will first be closed again when the process is resumed. # # To open/close manually: push or pull but‐ ton 1 to the point of resistance and hold it until the roller sunblind has reached the desired position. To open/close fully: push or pull button 1 beyond the point of resistance and release it. The reversing function will not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐ gers. R Towards the end of the closing proce‐ dure. R During resetting. # # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone is trapped, release the con‐ trol panel immediately. Opening and closing or # # Touch the control panel during auto‐ matic closing. The closing process will be stopped. Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblinds If an obstacle obstructs a roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing the roller sunblinds, make sure that no body parts are in the range of move‐ ment. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐ gers. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. If someone is trapped, release the con‐ trol panel immediately. or # Touch the control panel during auto‐ matic closing. The closing process will be stopped. Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pan‐ orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. Rain-closing feature when driving Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion. Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically. 99 & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. # Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion. # If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof button for‐ wards or backwards. Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again If you close the sliding sunroof again immedi‐ ately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof will close with increased or maximum force. 100 Opening and closing There is a risk of becoming trapped or even of fatal injuries! # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, release the con‐ trol panel immediately. or # Touch the control panel during auto‐ matic closing. The closing process will be stopped. The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pan‐ orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: # Immediately after automatic reversing, swipe forwards across the control panel (/ page 96) and hold until the sliding sun‐ roof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force. The rear roller sunblind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the rear roller sunblind. Resetting the rear roller sunblind The sliding sunroof or the front roller sun‐ blind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun‐ blind. Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind # Repeatedly swipe forwards across the con‐ trol panel (/ page 96) and hold until the sliding sunroof is completely closed. # Press and hold the control panel for another second. # Press and hold the control panel until the front roller sunblind is completely closed. # Press and hold the control panel for another second. # Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof. # # Pull and hold button 1 repeatedly until the rear roller sunblind is fully closed. Pull button 1 for another second. Opening and closing 101 # Extending or retracting the rear window roller sunblind Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the rear roller sunblind. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind Roller sun blinds Extending or retracting the roller sunblinds on the rear side windows The roller sunblinds for the rear side windows can be operated with the buttons for the side windows. 1 Rear left side window/roller sunblind 2 Rear right side window/roller sunblind # # To close fully: pull the corresponding button when the side window is closed or is in the process of closing. To open fully: press the corresponding but‐ ton. Body parts may become trapped in the roller sunblind's range of movement. # Ensure there are no body parts in the range of movement. # If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button again. The opening or closing process will briefly be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position. Extending or retracting from the driver's seat * NOTE Damage caused by objects Objects can cause the roller sunblind to mal‐ function. # Do not store objects on the rear shelf. 102 Opening and closing # Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Extending or retracting from the rear passenger compartment * NOTE Damage caused by objects Objects can cause the roller sunblind to mal‐ function. # Do not store objects on the rear shelf. # Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely. # # Press button 1. % Depending on the model, button 1 is loca‐ ted on the door control panel on the driver's side. # To extend: pull switch 1. To retract: press switch 1. When the child safety lock for the rear side win‐ dows is activated, switch 1 cannot be oper‐ ated. Opening and closing 103 Anti-theft protection Function of the immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. The immobilizer is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart‐ Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. % In the event the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R When a door is opened R When the trunk lid is opened R When the hood is opened R When the interior motion sensor is triggered (/ page 104) R When the tow-away alarm is triggered (/ page 104) The ATA system is armed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situa‐ tions: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system is armed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R After unlocking the vehicle with the Smart‐ Key R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO 104 Opening and closing R After pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 190) % When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is auto‐ matically sent to the Customer Assistance Center (/ page 327). % In the case of severe battery discharging, the anti-theft alarm system is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start. Deactivating the ATA Press the Ü, s or H button on the SmartKey. or # Press the start/stop button with the Smart‐ Key in the marked space (/ page 190) # Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO With the SmartKey outside the vehicle, touch the inner surface of the door handle. # Function of the tow-away alarm % This function may not be available in all countries. An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while the tow-away alarm is armed. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after approximately 60 seconds: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO The tow-away alarm is only armed when the fol‐ lowing components are closed: R Doors R Trunk lid The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva‐ ted: R After pressing the Ü or H button on the SmartKey R After pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 190) R R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 216). Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Protection # Arm or disarm Tow-away Protection. The tow-away alarm is armed again in the follow‐ ing cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. Function of the interior motion sensor % This function may not be available in all countries. Opening and closing 105 When the interior motion sensor is activated, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if move‐ ment is detected in the vehicle interior. The interior motion sensor is activated automati‐ cally after approximately ten seconds: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R When there are moving objects such as mas‐ cots in the vehicle interior R When a side window is open R When a panoramic sliding sunroof is open The interior motion sensor is only activated when the following components are closed: R Doors R Trunk lid Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor The interior motion sensor is automatically deac‐ tivated: R After pressing the Ü or H button on the SmartKey R After pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 190) R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Protection # Activate or deactivate Interior Motion Sensor. The Interior motion sensor is activated again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. 106 Seats and stowing Notes on the correct driver's seat position R & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion R You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. R R R Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration: R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly R The back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent You can move your legs freely You can see all the displays on the instru‐ ment cluster clearly You have a good overview of the traffic con‐ ditions Your seat belt sits snugly against your body and passes across the center of your shoul‐ der and across your hips in the pelvic area Seats Adjusting the front seat electrically & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Seats and stowing 107 # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. You can adjust the seats when the ignition is switched off. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil‐ dren in the vehicle". & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. & WARNING Risk of injury due to incor‐ rectly adjusted head restraints If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. 108 Seats and stowing & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat‐ belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin‐ ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. & WARNING Risk of injury due to exces‐ sive strain on the grab handle If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or become loose from its anchorage. # Use the grab handles only to stabilize the seating position or to assist in get‐ ting in and out of the seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys‐ tem. # Do not store any objects under the codriver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat. * NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats. The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feed‐ back on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat. Seats and stowing 109 Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 130). % The head restraint height will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-aft position. % Vehicles with EASY ADJUST luxury head restraints: The fore-and-aft position of the head restraint will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the backrest angle. # Adjusting the front passenger seat electri‐ cally from the driver's seat 1 Head restraint fore-and-aft position (vehicles 2 3 4 5 6 7 with an EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint) Head restraint height Seat height Seat cushion inclination Seat cushion length Seat fore-and-aft position Seat backrest inclination You can call up the following functions for the front passenger seat: R Seat adjustment R Seat heating R Seat ventilation R Memory function 110 Seats and stowing # # To select the front passenger seat: press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the driver's side door control panel. Adjusting the front passenger seat electri‐ cally from the rear passenger compartment Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats 1 Selects the front passenger seat 2 Head restraint height 3 Seat backrest inclination 4 Seat height 5 Seat fore-and-aft position Vehicles with an EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint 1 Selects the front passenger seat 2 Head restraint fore-and-aft position 3 Head restraint height 4 Seat backrest inclination 5 Seat height 6 Seat fore-and-aft position Seats and stowing 111 The footrest can be adjusted only when one of the following conditions has been fulfilled: R Depending on the equipment, the front passenger seat is in one of the following positions: Vehicles without leg rest: the front passenger seat has moved into a random position. Vehicles with leg rest: the front passenger seat has been moved fully forward. R The front passenger seat is in the position for chauffeur mode. # Vehicles with seat for chauffeur mode and long wheelbase 1 Selects the front passenger seat 2 Head restraint fore-and-aft position 3 Head restraint height 4 Seat backrest inclination 5 Seat height 6 Front passenger seat footrest 7 Seat fore-and-aft position # # # Adjust the rear seat (/ page 111). Adjust the reclining rear seat (/ page 112). To select the front passenger seat: press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door operating unit in the rear passenger compartment. % You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 75). Adjusting the rear seats electrically & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat‐ belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin‐ ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feed‐ back on the switch while pressing the switch. 112 Seats and stowing Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat. You can electrically adjust only the outer seats in the rear passenger compartment. 3 Seat backrest inclination 4 Combined seat cushion inclination and length # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 132). Adjusting the reclining rear seats electrically The reclining rear seat is available in long-wheel‐ base vehicles equipped with "Executive seats". In vehicles without a reclining rear seat, the but‐ ton for setting the angle and fore-and-aft posi‐ tion of the leg rest has no function. The reclining rear seat is on the front passenger side. 1 Fore-and-aft position of the head restraint (vehicles with active multicontour seat) 1 Fore-and-aft position of the head restraint (vehicles with active multicontour seat) 2 Head restraint height 2 Head restraint height 3 Seat backrest inclination 4 Combined seat cushion inclination and length 5 Fore-and-aft position of the leg rest 6 Angle of the leg rest Seats and stowing 113 Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 132). % The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If this is the case, fold up the leg rest and engage it. % Vehicles with a long wheelbase and the Chauffeur/Rear Seat Memory Package also have a footrest. This is located on the lower part of the front passenger seat backrest (/ page 116). # Setting the fully reclined position R R # To set the fully reclined position: press button 1. R The rear seat will move into the fully reclined position. R The front passenger seat will move into the position for chauffeur mode. The footrest will move out from under the front passenger seat. If available, the leg rest will rise. To restore the standard seat settings: press button 1. % You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 75). # 114 Seats and stowing % The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If this is the case, fold up the leg rest and engage it. Chauffeur mode Information on chauffeur mode & WARNING Risk of injury due to incor‐ rectly adjusted head restraints If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat * NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys‐ tem. # Do not store any objects under the codriver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat. The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats. * NOTE Damage to objects in the luggage net of the front passenger footwell when adjusting the front passenger seat to the chauffeur position Objects in the luggage net in the front passenger footwell can become damaged when the front passenger seat is adjusted to the chauffeur position. # Remove the objects from the luggage net. The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feed‐ back on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat. Observe the following: R Adjust the front passenger seat for chauffeur mode before the journey For chauffeur mode, the following settings are made for the front passenger seat: R The seat is moved forwards R The backrest is tilted forwards R The head restraint is folded forwards Seats and stowing 115 The front passenger seat will automatically move from the chauffeur position back into the normal position in the following situations: R The front passenger seat is adjusted using the buttons in the door operating unit on the front passenger side R The front passenger seat belt is fastened R An occupant is detected on the front passenger seat R The front passenger seat backrest is adjus‐ ted rearwards. R The front passenger seat is moved in the fore-and-aft direction out of the chauffeur area Positioning the front passenger seat for chauffeur mode Requirements: R The front passenger seat is not occupied. R The front passenger seat belt is not inserted in the buckle. 1 Selects the front passenger seat 2 Adjusts the seat fore-and-aft position # To select the front passenger seat: press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. 116 Seats and stowing Setting the chauffeur position # Push button 2 forwards and hold it in this position. The front passenger seat will move forward and stop at the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode. # Release button 2. # Push button 2 forward and hold it again until the front passenger seat is in the posi‐ tion for chauffeur mode. The front passenger seat head restraint will fold forwards. The front passenger seat will move forward. % If the front passenger seat is already at the threshold to the area for chauffeur mode, the position for chauffeur mode will be set immediately. # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 132). % You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 75). Using the footrest on the front passenger seat Requirements: R Depending on the equipment, the front passenger seat is in one of the following positions: Vehicles without leg rest: the front passenger seat has moved into a random position. Vehicles with leg rest: the front passenger seat has been moved fully forward. R The front passenger seat is in the position for chauffeur mode. Using the footrest The footrest is located on the lower part of the front passenger seat backrest. # # # Push button 1 towards the rear. The footrest will move out from under the front passenger seat. Push the extended footrest upwards with your foot until it releases. Allow the footrest to lower. The footrest will position itself on the floor. Seats and stowing 117 Storing the footrest # # Push the footrest upwards with your foot until it engages. Push button 1 forwards. The footrest will retract underneath the front passenger seat. Moving the front passenger seat into the normal position (chauffeur mode) # To select the front passenger seat: press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. Setting the normal position Push button 3 towards the rear and hold it in this position. The front passenger seat will move to the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode. # 118 Seats and stowing The head restraint on the front passenger side will be moved into the upright position. The front passenger seat will then move fur‐ ther towards the rear. or Briefly push button 2 towards the rear. The front passenger seat will move automati‐ cally to the threshold of the area for chauf‐ feur mode. The head restraint on the front passenger side will be moved into the upright position. % You can also set the normal position from the front passenger seat. To do so, press any button on the door operating unit on the front passenger side. # Call up the settings with the memory func‐ tion (/ page 132). % You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 75). # Head restraints Adjusting the front seat luxury head restraints mechanically & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of injury due to incor‐ rectly adjusted head restraints If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. Seats and stowing 119 # # To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards. To move backwards: press release knob 1 and push the head restraint backwards. Attaching and removing the additional cush‐ ion of the front-seat luxury head restraint # # # # # # # Position head restraint 2 as far forwards as possible. To attach the additional cushion: open Vel‐ cro strip 4 on the back of additional cush‐ ion 1. Guide Velcro strip 4 between head restraint 2 and strip 3. Close Velcro strip 4. Change the position of the additional cushion: move additional cushion 1 up or down. To remove additional cushion: open Velcro strip 4 of additional cushion 1. Remove additional cushion 1. Lowering and positioning the rear seat head restraints electrically from the front com‐ partment Multimedia system: 4 © 5 ß 5 y # Tap on ü. The outer head restraints will lower. # Tap on ü again. The outer head restraints will move into the last stored position. Adjusting the outer rear seat head restraints manually # To raise: pull the head restraint upwards and let it engage. Height adjustment # Push release button 1 in the direction of the arrow. 120 Seats and stowing # Push the head restraint down and let it engage. Adjusting the outer luxury head restraints of the rear seats manually Attaching and removing the additional cush‐ ion of the head restraint in the rear passenger compartment (individual seats) # # # # # # Guide Velcro strip 4 between head restraint 2 and strip 3. Close Velcro strip 4. To change the position of the additional cushion: move additional cushion 1 up or down. To remove additional cushion: open Velcro strip 4 of additional cushion 1. Remove additional cushion 1. Attaching heated additional cushion In vehicles with electrically adjustable head restraints, you can heat the additional cushion. # Attach the additional cushion to the head restraint as described. # Move the head restraint to the very top. To adjust the head restraint angle: pull or push the head restraint in the direction of arrow 1. # # Position head restraint 2 as far forwards as possible. To attach the additional cushion: open Vel‐ cro strip 4 on the back of additional cush‐ ion 1. Seats and stowing 121 Folding the center head restraint into posi‐ tion and folding it back manually # # # # # Push press-studs 2 on the additional strip into counterpieces 1 on the head restraint. Move the head restraint to the desired height. To switch neck heating from the addi‐ tional cushion on/off: make sure that press-studs 2 on the additional strip are correctly pushed into counterpieces 1 on the head restraint. Ensure that the "Couple neck heat to seat heating" function is active (/ page 122). Activate or deactivate the seat heating (/ page 124). # Folding down To fold into position: pull the head restraint upwards until it engages. # # Press button 1. Fold down the head restraint completely. The center head restraint has a usage position and a non-usage position. The usage position is the upright position in which the head restraint is locked; the non-usage position is the position in which the head restraint is folded downwards. 122 Seats and stowing When the center seat is used, the head restraint must be in the upright, locked usage position. Configuring the seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat Adjusting the air cushions. # On the corresponding menu, adjust the air cushions for Lumbar, Shoulders or Side Bolsters. Setting the seat heating balance # Select Heating Settings. # Select Seat Heating Balance. # Adjust the heat distribution for the desired seat. % The seat heating balance can be set in the Seat Climate Control menu in the rear passenger compartment. Coupling neck heat to seat heating Select Additional Neck Warmer. # # Switch the function for the desired seat on or off. If the function is active, the neck heat of the additional cushion has been coupled to the seat heating. Setting automatic seat adjustment & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the posi‐ tion saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move‐ ment. If there is a risk of someone becoming trap‐ ped, stop the adjustment process immedi‐ ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the cen‐ tral display. or # b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stop‐ ped. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Automatic Seat Positioning Adjusting driver's seat and steering wheel position to body size The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and steering wheel position on the basis of the driver's body size and sets this directly. # To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in. Seats and stowing 123 Set the size using the scale. Select Start Positioning. The driver's seat and steering wheel position is adjusted to the body size that has been set. % If the driver's seat and steering wheel posi‐ tion calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be manually adapted at any time via the control buttons. The outside mirrors are not set via this func‐ tion. Instead, they have to be set manually via the operating switches. % You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me user account for your user profile. By synchronizing the profiles in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect pro‐ files, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about syn‐ chronizing user profiles . # # Setting automatic adjustment of the lateral support (active multicontour seat) R Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat # Select Dynamic Multicontour Seat. R With this function, the lateral support of the active multicontour seat is automatically adjus‐ ted to the driving and cornering dynamics of the vehicle. # Select the desired setting. Overview of massage programs R R Hot Relaxing Back: Based on hot stone mas‐ sage, the program combines heat and mas‐ sage. It starts by massaging the back. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. Hot Relaxing Shoulders Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. R R R R R Activating Massage Activating massage pro‐ gram with upward-moving massage waves. Classic Massage Calming back massage pro‐ gram. Wave Massage Regenerating massage pro‐ gram via massage waves across the back and in the seat cushion. Mobilizing Massage Mobilizing massage pro‐ gram with upward-moving massage waves. Can promote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain. Workout, Backrest and Workout, Cushion These programs require your cooperation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as you feel it to activate back, abdominal and leg muscles. Deep Waves: Wave-like movements in the cushion can promote blood flow and meta‐ bolic processes in the lower back and legs. Deep Workout: Connect the Workout, Backrest to the Workout, Cushion. The vibrating 124 Seats and stowing massage in the cushion intensifies the effec‐ tiveness of tensing and releasing muscles when you tense against the pressure point. This supports metabolic processes and blood flow in the seat area and legs. Selecting the massage program for the front seats Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select a massage program (/ page 123). # Start the program for the desired seat ;. # To set the massage intensity: switch Intensive on or off. % For the rear seats, the massage programs can be selected on the following devices (if available): R On the rear displays R On the MBUX rear tablet Resetting seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat # Select Reset. # Select ß for the desired seat. Switching the seat heating on/off & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐ edly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limi‐ ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affec‐ ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly. * NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on When the seat heating is switched on, over‐ heating may occur due to objects or docu‐ ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cush‐ ions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or docu‐ ments are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on. Requirements: R The power supply is switched on. Seats and stowing 125 Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off. % The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off. % If you switch the power supply off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous setting of the seat heating for the driver's seat will remain active. % You can set the heat distribution of the heated sections among the seat cushions and seat backrests on the front and rear seats using the multimedia system (/ page 122). % Vehicles with the Warmth Comfort Package: you can adjust the heating of the center con‐ sole and door armrests using the multimedia system (/ page 125). # Setting the panel heating Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Heating Settings 5 Panel Heating When the seat heating is switched on, the armr‐ ests, the center panels of the doors and the cen‐ ter console can be heated. 126 Seats and stowing # ventilation setting for the driver's seat will remain active. Switch the function for the desired seats on or off. Switching the seat ventilation on/off Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel electrically Requirements: R The power supply is switched on. & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off. % If you switch the power supply off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous seat # You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. Seats and stowing 127 Switching the steering wheel heater on/off & WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil‐ dren when adjusting the steering wheel Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched on. Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected. 1 2 3 4 To move up To move back To move down To move forward # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 130). # Push the switch into position 1 or 2. If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on. 128 Seats and stowing When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heater will switch off. Coupling the steering wheel heater to the seat heating Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Heating Settings # Tap on Additional Steering Wheel Heating. The steering wheel heater will be coupled to the seat heating. When the function has been activated, the steer‐ ing wheel heater is automatically activated and deactivated when you switch the switch the seat heating on and off. Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature & WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process for the easy exit feature You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment proc‐ ess is complete before pulling away. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature You and other vehicle occupants could become trapped. # Ensure that no one has a body part in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. # Move the adjustment lever of the steer‐ ing wheel if there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel. The adjustment process is stopped. # If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat, press the seat adjust‐ ment switches. The adjustment process is stopped. You can stop the adjustment process by press‐ ing one of the memory function position switches. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature‑ Children could become trapped if they acti‐ vate the easy entry‑ and exit feature, particu‐ larly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. In order to use the easy entry and exit feature, the automatic seat adjustment function must have been switched on (/ page 122). Seats and stowing 129 If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards and the driv‐ er's seat will move back in the following situa‐ tions: R You switch the ignition off with the driver's door open R You open the driver's door with the ignition switched off % The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range. The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last drive position in the fol‐ lowing cases: R You switch the power supply or the ignition on when the driver's door is closed R You close the driver's door with the ignition switched on The last drive position will be saved when: You switch the ignition off. R R R You call up the seat settings via the memory function. You save the seat settings via the memory function. If you press one of the memory function memory position switches, the adjustment process will be stopped. Setting the easy entry and exit feature Requirements: The automatic seat adjustment has been activated (/ page 122). R Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Comfort 5 Easy Entry And Exit Feature # Select Steering Wheel & Seat, Steering Wheel Only or Off. % If you are using an individual user profile, this information is used for the easy entry and exit feature. This will cause the driver's seat and steering wheel to move into the correct position automatically . Memory function Function of the memory function & WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving If you use the memory function on the driv‐ er's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is station‐ ary. & WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func‐ tion When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particu‐ larly children – could become trapped. # During the adjusting process of the memory function, ensure that no body 130 Seats and stowing # parts are in the area of movement of the seat or the steering wheel. If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjust‐ ment switch immediately. The adjustment process is stopped. & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children Children could become trapped if they acti‐ vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. You can use the memory function when the igni‐ tion is switched off. Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save the following settings for the front seat: R Seat, backrest, head restraint position and contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region R Vehicles with an active multicontour seat: Side bolsters of the seat backrest Shoulder of the seat backrest Contour of the seat backrest Dynamic function level R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec‐ tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest R Driver's side: steering wheel position and position of the outside mirrors on the driver's and front passenger sides R Head-up Display (depending on vehicle equipment) Operating the memory function Storing # # Set the seat, the steering wheel, the Head-up Display and the outside mirror to the desired position. Press the V memory button and then release it. Seats and stowing 131 Press one of the preset position buttons 4, T or U within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored. # To call up: press the preset position button 4, T or U. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the front seat, outside mirror, Head-up Display and steering column continue to move into the stored position automatically. % Driver's seat: to call up a stored position while driving, you must press and hold the preset position button. # Memory function in the rear passenger compartment Function of the memory function in the rear passenger compartment Operating the rear seat Rear seat settings for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function in the rear passenger compartment. You can save the following settings for the rear seat: R Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint R Vehicles with active multicontour seats: The seat side bolsters of the seat backrest as well as the contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec‐ tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest You can save the following settings for the rear seat: R Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint R Vehicles with active multicontour seats: The seat side bolsters of the seat backrest as well as the contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec‐ tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest Operating the front passenger seat and rear seat Front passenger seat adjustments and rear seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function in the rear passenger compartment. You can save the following settings for the front passenger seat: R Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint The following settings are also stored to a mem‐ ory position, if the indicator lamp in the v button lights up: R Position of the footrest of the front passenger seat, if available R Position of the screen, if available Using the preset position buttons, you always store the current setting of each seat. 132 Seats and stowing Operating the rear seat via the memory func‐ tion in the rear passenger compartment Vehicles with reclining rear seat: Press one of the preset position buttons 4 or T within three seconds. The settings are stored. % Vehicles with reclining rear seat: You can‐ not store any settings on the j and a buttons for adjusting the reclined and stand‐ ard positions. # Storing Example: vehicles without a reclining rear seat # # # # Press button 1. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up. Adjust the rear seat using the buttons in the door control panel (/ page 111). Press the V button and then release it. Vehicles without reclining rear seat: Press one of the preset position buttons 4, T or U within three seconds. The settings are stored. Calling up # Press button 1. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up. # Vehicles without reclining rear seat: Press preset position button 4, T or U. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the rear seat is automatically moved into the stored position. # Vehicles with reclining rear seat: Press one of preset position buttons 4 or T. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the rear seat is automatically moved into the stored position. Seats and stowing 133 Operating the front passenger seat and rear seats via the memory function in the rear passenger compartment # # Storing # # Adjust the rear seat using the buttons in the door control panel (/ page 111). Press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door control panel in the rear passenger compartment (/ page 106). Ensure that the indicator lamp in button 1 lights up. Example: vehicles without a reclining rear seat # # # Press button 1. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up. Press the V button and then release it. Vehicles without reclining rear seat: Press one of the preset position buttons 4, T or U within three seconds. The settings for the front passenger seat and the rear seat are stored in the selected pre‐ set position. 134 Seats and stowing Vehicles with reclining rear seat: Press one of the preset position buttons 4 or T within three seconds. The settings for the front passenger seat and the rear seat are stored in the selected pre‐ set position. % Vehicles with reclining rear seat: You can‐ not store any settings on the j and a buttons for adjusting the reclined and stand‐ ard positions. # Calling up # Press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. # Vehicles without reclining rear seat: Press one of preset position buttons 4, T or U. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the front seat and rear seat are moved automatically into the stored position. Vehicles with reclining rear seat: Press one of preset position buttons 4 or T. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the front seat and rear seat are moved automatically into the stored position. % The preset positions in the area for chauffeur mode can only be set when the conditions for chauffeur mode are fulfilled (/ page 114). % You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 75). # Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Observe the notes on protection provided by the airbag (/ page 51). Vehicles with rear airbag: Also observe the notes on the rear airbag (/ page 57). & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. Seats and stowing 135 # Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐ gage or loads against slipping or tipping over. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐ tion, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets. # Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk. Observe the notes on the cup holders. Vehicles with automatic front passenger air‐ bag shutoff: Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 53). * NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest. & WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu‐ pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐ cle is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. # Close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot. * NOTE Damage to the cup holder When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged. 136 Seats and stowing # Only fold the rear armrest back when the cup holder is closed. # # * NOTE Damage to the stowage compart‐ ment under the ashtray due to intense heat The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it. # Make sure that the ashtray is fully engaged. & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga‐ rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example # Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐ pipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Never exceed the permissible gross mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are speci‐ fied on the vehicle identification plate on the vehicle's B-pillar. R The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. R Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. R Secure the load using the parcel net hooks. Distribute the load on the parcel net hooks evenly. Notes on driving with a roof load R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 134). Seats and stowing 137 R R % The rubber mat in the storage compartment in front center console 3 can be removed for cleaning with clear, lukewarm water. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 348). Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs ; and A. These are designed to focus on stability (/ page 201). % For more information on storage compart‐ ments and storage areas, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual. Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior Overview of the front storage compartments Folding the folding table out or in & WARNING Risk of injury from an open folding table 1 Storage spaces in the doors 2 Storage and telephone compartment beneath the armrest with a charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones, mul‐ timedia and USB ports as well as storage space, e.g. for an MP3 player 3 Storage compartment in the front center console with cup holders, USB ports and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones 4 Storage compartment in front of the central display of the multimedia system 5 Glove box Vehicle occupants may bump into the folding table and injure themselves. # Close the folding table before each jour‐ ney. * NOTE Damage to the folding tables when moving the seats back Open folding tables may be damaged when the seats are moved back. # Make sure that the folding tables are folded in when moving the front seats back. 138 Seats and stowing * NOTE Damage to objects when the fold‐ ing tables are expanded or collapsed Objects such as tablets and displays can be damaged when the folding tables are expan‐ ded or collapsed. # Make sure that the folding tables are expanded and collapsed properly. Folding out Pull folding table 2 up and forwards by han‐ dle recess 3 and swing it outwards. # Fold the table panels apart. % The table panels can be rotated forwards or backwards to bring them into a comfortable position for the vehicle occupants in the rear passenger compartment. # To fold in: fold the table panels together and swing in the folding table. # # # # # Fold down the rear armrest. Open the storage compartment in the rear armrest . Tap handset 1. Handset 1 will rise. Remove handset 1. Removing the handset from the rear storage compartment # Opening the storage compartment 1 in the center console of the rear passenger com‐ partment Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear seats Vehicles with individual rear seats Seats and stowing 139 # # # Open the storage box in the rear-compart‐ ment backrest. Press button 1. Remove the handset. Overview of the parcel net hooks Observe the following notes: Secure the load using the parcel net hooks. R Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load. These are intended only as anti-slip pro‐ tection for light loads. R Do not route tie downs across sharp edges or corners. R Pad sharp edges for protection. R Depending on the equipment installed, the trunk contains up to four parcel net hooks. 1 Parcel net hooks Opening the through-loading feature in the rear passenger compartment Requirements: R The loading flap is unlocked (/ page 141). Vehicles with individual rear seats 140 Seats and stowing Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear seats # # Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats: Fold down the rear armrest. Pull handle 1 and fold down cover 2. The storage box in the rear passenger com‐ partment backrest will be opened. Vehicles with individual rear seats Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear seats # Slide release catch 2 in the handle recess of loading flap 1 upwards. Loading flap 1 will be unlocked. Seats and stowing 141 Push loading flap 1 with release catch 2 up as far back as possible until the flap locks in the highest position. The through-loading feature in the rear passenger compartment will be opened. If the through-loading feature is to be used as a storage compartment again: # Fold down loading flap 1 and lock it in the trunk (/ page 141). # Locking the through-loading feature in the trunk Requirements: R The refrigerator box is removed. # Slide the release catch on loading flap 1 in the trunk to the right. The loading flap is locked. Using the bag hooks & WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. Pull bag hook 2 down by tab 1. % Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 134). # 142 Seats and stowing EASY-PACK trunk box # Adjusting the height of the EASY-PACK trunk box to any position & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped and injured when raising the floor Your hands may become trapped on the frame of the EASY-PACK trunk box and objects may be thrown upwards. # Ensure that your hands are not in the range of movement of the floor. # If someone becomes trapped, carefully push the center of the floor downward. # Remove all objects from the floor before raising it. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when pressing the EASY-PACK trunk box in Your hands may become trapped when you are pressing the trunk box into the retracted position. Children, in particular, may injure themselves when doing so. # # Ensure that your hands are not in the range of movement of the EASY-PACK trunk box. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the extended EASYPACK trunk box The EASY-PACK trunk box may be damaged when it is extended. # Do not place any objects on or press down on the EASY-PACK trunk box frame. # Do not close the trunk lid when the EASY-PACK trunk box is extended. * NOTE Damage to the EASY-PACK trunk box by objects Objects that are sharp-edged, pointed, frag‐ ile, rounded or heavy and objects that roll can damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and be thrown out. # Do not transport objects that are sharpedged, pointed, rounded or fragile and objects that roll in the EASY-PACK trunk box. # Always stow and secure such objects outside of the box in the trunk. # Always observe the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box. # Do not use the EASY-PACK trunk box when the rear seats are folded for‐ wards. The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). To prevent the box from being overloaded, the box floor will lower onto the trunk floor when the load reaches approximately 11 lbs (5 kg). Seats and stowing 143 % Observe the notes on cleaning the EASYPACK trunk box (/ page 348). Installing and removing the EASY-PACK trunk box Installing # # # # To remove: pull handle 2 on the box. To increase the load capacity: push the center of floor 1 downwards to the desired position and box size. To reduce the load capacity: press button 3. To store: push the box in completely using handle 2 until it locks in place. 144 Seats and stowing Removing Attaching a roof luggage rack & WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. # # # # Turn rotating catches 6 outward. Insert retainers 3 of box 1 into holes 2. Raise box 1 in the direction of the arrow and press hooks 5 into the anchorages of rear shelf 4. Turn rotating catches 6 inward. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section. # # # Turn rotating catches 6 outward. Lower box 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull it out of the anchorages on the rear shelf. Pull box 1 back out of the openings in the direction of the arrow. * NOTE Vehicle damage from nonapproved roof luggage racks The vehicle could be damaged by roof lug‐ gage racks that have not been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. # Only use roof luggage racks tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. Seats and stowing 145 # # # Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof luggage rack is installed, the trunk lid can be fully opened. Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. # # Cup holder Switching the cooling or heating function for the temperature-controlled cup holder on or off * NOTE Damage to panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel caused by roof luggage rack If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is opened when a roof luggage rack is installed, the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel may be damaged by the roof luggage rack. # Do not open the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel if a roof luggage rack is installed. Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers 1. Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manufacturer. Secure the load on the roof luggage rack. * NOTE Damage to the covers The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened. # Do not use metallic or hard objects. # Carefully fold covers 1 upwards in the direction of the arrow. When the heating function is used, the metal insert of the cup holder is heated. For this rea‐ son, you must not reach into the cup holder insert. When placing glasses in the temperature-con‐ trolled cup holder, do not close the cover of the storage compartment in the rear center console because the glasses may tip over. 146 Seats and stowing Sockets Using the 12 V socket Requirements: R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A). To switch on: press button 2 until the blue (keep cool) or red (keep warm) indicator lamp on the button lights up. # To switch off: press button 2 until the indi‐ cator lamp on the button goes out. % Clean the removable rubber mat only with clean, lukewarm water and the temperaturecontrolled cup holder 1 only with a soft cloth. # Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets: R In the front passenger footwell R On vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri‐ cally adjustable outer seats: in the electron‐ ics compartment of the rear center console R On vehicles with individual rear seats: in the storage compartment of the rear center con‐ sole R In the trunk Example: 12 V socket in the rear center con‐ sole # # Fold up socket cap 1. Insert the plug of the device. If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the storage compart‐ ment open. Seats and stowing 147 Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger compartment passenger compartment & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor‐ rect handling of the socket & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam‐ aged connecting cables or sockets You could receive an electric shock in partic‐ ular: R If you reach into the socket. R If you insert unsuitable devices or objects into the socket. You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. # Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage. # When the ignition is switched off, make sure that the 115 V power socket is dry. # Immediately have the 115 V power socket checked or replaced at a quali‐ fied specialized workshop if it is dam‐ aged or has been pulled out of the trim. # Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. # # Do not reach into the socket. Only connect suitable devices to the socket. Requirements: R Only connect devices with a suitable plug which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in. R Do not use multiple socket outlets. % Only devices up to a maximum of 150 watts (1.3 A) can be connected. Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electrically adjustable outer seats in the rear passenger com‐ partment 148 Seats and stowing # # compartment in the rear passenger compart‐ ment center console. Open socket flap 3. Insert the plug of the device into 115 V socket 2. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp 1 lights up. USB port in the rear passenger compartment Vehicles with individual rear seats # # Vehicles with a rear passenger compart‐ ment bench seat or electrically adjusta‐ ble outer seats: open the electronics com‐ partment in the rear passenger compartment center console. Vehicles with individual rear passenger compartment seats: open the stowage Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following USB ports in the rear passenger compartment: R On vehicles with individual rear seats: in the storage compartment of the rear passenger compartment center console . R On vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri‐ cally adjustable outer rear seats: in the elec‐ tronics compartment in the rear passenger compartment center console . R On vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri‐ cally adjustable outer rear seats: in the stor‐ age compartment in the rear armrest . % These USB ports in the rear passenger com‐ partment can be used to charge a mobile end device. You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charg‐ ing cable. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the devices can be charged with up to 20 V (5 A) when the ignition is switched on. Refrigerator box Using the refrigerator box & WARNING Risk of fire due to a covered vent grille on the refrigerator box If you cover the vent grille for the refrigerator box, it may overheat. # Always make sure that the vent grille is not covered. The vent grille for the refrigerator box is in the trunk. The refrigerator box can bear a maximum load of 7.7 lb (3.5 kg). Seats and stowing 149 The upper compartment of the refrigerator box can accommodate, for example, plastic bottles with a maximum capacity of 17 fl. oz. (0.5 liters) and cans with a capacity of up to 11 fl. oz. (0.33 liters) If you do not need to use the refrigerator box for an extended period, you should switch it off, defrost it and clean it. After doing so, leave the lid open for a time. More condensation may occur during intensive use. Cleaning may be required. The refrigerator box will reduce its cooling capa‐ city or switch off in the following cases: R Too many electrical consumers are turned on. R The starter battery is not sufficiently charged. If this is the case, the indicator lamps will flash on the button for switching the refrigerator box on and off. The cooling function will automati‐ cally switch back on as soon as there is suffi‐ cient voltage. Example: vehicles with individual rear seats # # Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats: fold down the rear armrest. Pull handle 1 on storage box and fold down cover 2 of storage box. Example: vehicles with individual rear seats # # To open: pull the handle on refrigerator box 1 and fold down the cover of the refrigera‐ tor box. To switch on: press button 2 repeatedly until an indicator lamp (low cooling) lights up or two indicator lamps (high cooling) light up. 150 Seats and stowing # To switch off: press button 2 repeatedly until both indicator lamps go out. # Removing or installing the refrigerator box Installing # Removing Pull up and hold handle 7. # Pull the refrigerator box with handle 7 up out of sockets 5 and 6 of the though-load‐ ing compartment. Connection 4 and the electrical contacts of refrigerator box 3 are separated from sock‐ ets 5 and 6 of the through-loading fea‐ ture. # # # # Remove cover cap 1. Open loading flap 2 in the rear passenger compartment until the loading flap locks in the highest position (/ page 139). Pull upwards and hold handle 7. The connection to refrigerator box 4 is unlocked. Slide the refrigerator box with handle 7 up into the open through-loading feature. Connection 4 and the electrical contacts of refrigerator box 3 are inserted into sockets 5 and 6 of the through-loading feature. Once the refrigerator box has been connec‐ ted in the vehicle, push down handle 7. The refrigerator box is locked. Seats and stowing 151 Opening and closing the stowage compart‐ ment of the refrigerator box in the trunk Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly # # To open: pull the stowage compartment in refrigerator box 1 out by the handle back‐ wards in the direction of the arrow. Stowage compartment 1 is open. To close: slide the stowage compartment in refrigerator box 1 forwards in the direction of the arrow. Stowage compartment 1 is closed. If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐ tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can‐ not be thrown around in such situa‐ tions. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. # # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart‐ ment. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a fire hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal. 152 Seats and stowing * NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stor‐ age compartment If objects are placed in the mobile phone storage compartment, they may be damaged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, data storage devices, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone storage compart‐ ment. * NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment. Always observe the notes for persons with elec‐ tronic medical aids (/ page 34). R R R R R R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module. The charging function and wireless connec‐ tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available if the igni‐ tion is switched on. Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone storage compartment. Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone storage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior antenna. The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may also depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background. To ensure more efficient charging and con‐ nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers which are neces‐ sary for wireless charging are an exception. Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging. A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/ Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the vehi‐ cle has the following options for wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the cockpit: R In the front storage compartment R In the storage compartment of the cockpit armrest Seats and stowing 153 In addition, malfunctions during the mobile phone's charging process are shown by the indi‐ cator lamp flashing three times. % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water. Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the rear passenger compartment passenger compartment Example: wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front storage compartment # Place the mobile phone as close to the cen‐ ter of mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front storage compartment: when a message is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunc‐ tions during the mobile phone's charging proc‐ ess are shown in the multimedia system display. Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the center console below the armrest: the mobile phone is charging when the indicator lamp is lit. Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging. A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/ Example: vehicles with individual rear passenger compartment seats # # Open the stowage compartment in the rear passenger compartment center console. Place the mobile phone as close to the cen‐ ter of mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the indicator lamp at the front of the mobile phone system lights up, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunc‐ tions during the mobile phone's charging process are shown by the indicator lamp flashing three times. 154 Seats and stowing % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water. % Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 134). Installing floor mats Installing and removing the floor mats & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. Removing floor mats Slide the corresponding seat backwards and pull the floor mat off holders 2. # Adjust the corresponding seat. # # # # Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell such that it fits. Press studs 1 onto holders 2. Adjust the corresponding seat. Light and visibility 155 Exterior lighting Information about lighting systems and your responsibility Light switch Operating the light switch 5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on/off When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the parking lights will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using suffi‐ cient lighting, in accordance with the rele‐ vant legal stipulations. The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation. * NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the right X or left W parking light. 1 2 3 4 W Left-hand standing lights X Right-hand standing lights T Parking lights and license plate lamp à Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position) If the battery is insufficiently charged, the stand‐ ing lights or parking lights will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start. 156 Light and visibility The exterior lighting (except standing and park‐ ing lights) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting (/ page 165). Automatic driving lights function The parking lights, low beam and daytime run‐ ning lights are switched on automatically depending on the ignition status and the ambi‐ ent light. Switching the rear fog lights on or off Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or à posi‐ tion. # Operating the combination switch for the lights Press the R button. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps. & WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility When the light switch is set to Ã, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to L. The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting. 1 2 3 4 High beam Turn signal light, right High-beam flasher Turn signal light, left # Use the combination switch to activate the desired function. Light and visibility 157 Switching on high beam # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. # Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the L indicator lamp for low beam will be deactiva‐ ted and replaced by the K indicator lamp for high beam. Switching off high beam Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 or pull it in the direction of arrow 3. # # To indicate permanently: push the combi‐ nation switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R A turn signal indicator activated by the driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically. Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights High-beam flasher Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3. # Turn signal light To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times. # Press button 1. The hazard warning lights will switch on auto‐ matically if: R The airbag has been deployed. # 158 Light and visibility Adaptive functions MULTIBEAM LED and DIG‐ ITAL LIGHT Intelligent Light System function In this system, the headlamps adapt to the driv‐ ing and weather situation. It also provides exten‐ ded functions for improved illumination of the road. % The availability of the functions is dependent on the country. The system comprises the following functions: R Active headlamps (/ page 158) R Cornering light (/ page 158) R Highway mode (/ page 159) R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 159) R Bad weather light (/ page 159) R City lighting (/ page 159) R Topographical compensation (vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT) (/ page 159) The system is active only when it is dark. Active headlamps function R R The headlamps follow the steering move‐ ments. Relevant areas are better illuminated during a journey. The functions are active when the low beam is switched on. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance. Cornering light function The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direc‐ tion, enabling better visibility on tight curves, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering wheel is turned Light and visibility 159 Roundabout and intersection function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or the intersection. Highway mode function (Canada) Highway mode increases the range and bright‐ ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibil‐ ity. R R The multifunction camera The navigation system The function is not active in the following cases: At speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h) R Enhanced fog light function (Canada) The enhanced fog light function reduces selfblinding and improves the illumination of the edge of the road. The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions: R When speeds greater than 62 mph (100 km/h) are reached. R When the rear fog light is switched off. Function of the bad weather light (Canada) The bad weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the headlamps. The driver and other road users are blinded less as a result. The city lighting function (Canada) City lighting improves the illumination of road‐ sides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. The function is active in the following cases: R At low speeds R In illuminated parts of urban areas The function will be active if a highway journey is detected by means of: R The vehicle's speed The function is automatically activated under the following conditions: R At speeds below 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the rear fog light is switched on. Function of the topographical compensation Based on map data, the lighting system responds pre-emptively to different road heights. This means that the headlamp range remains vir‐ 160 Light and visibility tually constant when you are driving on uphill or downhill gradients. % Only vehicles with a multimedia system with navigation have this function. Assistance functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT DIGITAL LIGHT visually expands on the driver assistance systems by projecting the assistant displays in front of the vehicle while it is in motion. DIGITAL LIGHT can therefore help the driver in critical situations. % The availability of the functions is countrydependent. The system is active in the following cases: R The light switch is in the à position. R The high beam is switched on. % If you activate the Head-up Display with aug‐ mented reality, the projections can be deac‐ tivated depending on the situation. % Depending on the country in which you are currently driving, certain functions may be disabled due to different legal requirements, even if they are enabled in the multimedia system. When a border is crossed, the vehi‐ cle will automatically adapt to the valid requirements. Warnings Spotlight The spotlight function runs in the background and flashes the headlamps at detected persons within the lane markings in four short bursts. The driver is made aware of the position of oncoming pedestrians by a projected symbol. The function is active under the following condi‐ tions: R You are driving outside illuminated areas. R The system detects a lane marking. If Traffic Sign Assist detects a corresponding sit‐ uation, a triangle will be projected onto the road in the following situations at speeds of at least 30 km/h: R You are driving in the opposite direction to the permissible direction of travel, e.g. on a freeway access road. R You are driving towards a stop sign without reducing your speed. R You are driving towards a red traffic light without reducing your speed. Light and visibility 161 Observe the system limits of Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 244). Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off Notes Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 MULTIBEAM LED # Switch Dynamic Low Beam on or off. % In vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT headlamps, the Intelligent Light System can be switched on and off on the DIGITAL LIGHT menu. If Traffic Sign Assist detects a roadworks zone, the system will provide support as follows: R A corresponding symbol will be projected onto the road when you enter a roadworks zone. Observe the system limits of Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 244). Activating or deactivating enhanced assis‐ tance functions % The availability of the functions is dependent on the country. # Select Supporting Projections. # Activate or deactivate the desired projection. # Activate or deactivate Projection when opening/closing. If the locator lighting or the exterior switchoff delay time is activated, a high-resolution greeting or farewell scene will be played back for a short period of time when the vehicle is opened or locked. % More information on locator lighting (/ page 165) More information on the exterior switch-off delay time (/ page 164) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist function & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐ trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users 162 Light and visibility The high beam will switch off automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is sufficient with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto‐ matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi‐ tions. % The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off Switching on Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina‐ tion switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the driver's display. # Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high beam will switch on automatically. Switching off Switch off the high beam using the combina‐ tion switch. # Light and visibility 163 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function (Canada) & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐ trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recog‐ nize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto‐ matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf‐ fic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R Partial high beam R High beam R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam (only vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT) 164 Light and visibility ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the bright‐ ness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum. Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It does not blind them but enables full high beam illumination for the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) or when there is sufficient street lighting: R The partial high beam and the high beam will be switched off automatically. At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): If no other road users are detected, the high beam will switch on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial high beam will switch on automatically. R At speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h): R If no other road users are detected on a straight road, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial high beam will switch on automatically. R If highly reflective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched off auto‐ matically. % The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off (Canada) Switching on # Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina‐ tion switch. When the high beam is switched on automat‐ ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the driver's display. Switching off Switch off the high beam using the combina‐ tion switch. # Switching the daytime running lamps on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 MULTIBEAM LED # Switch the Daytime Running Lamps on/off. % In vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT headlamps, the Intelligent Light System can be switched on and off in the DIGITAL LIGHT menu. Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time Requirements: R The light switch is in the à position. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/exterior lighting 5 External Lighting Delay # Set the switch-off delay time. When the vehicle's engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time. Light and visibility 165 Activating/deactivating the locator lighting Requirements: R The light switch is in the à position. Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting Operating unit inside the grab handle (rear passenger compartment) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/Exterior Lighting # Activate or deactivate Locator Lighting. When the function is activated, the exterior light‐ ing will light up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the locator lighting is switched off and automatic driving lights are activated. 1 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 2 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 3 | Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off # To switch reading lamps on/off: hold your hand under the respective reading lamp 4 or 5. 1 p Reading lamp on the respective side of the vehicle 2 u Rear interior lighting # To switch reading lamps on: press button 1. The reading lamp, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will light up. 166 Light and visibility # # To switch reading lamps off: press button 1 once or twice. After pressing it once, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go out. After pressing it twice, the reading lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go out. To switch the rear interior lighting on/ off: press button 2. The reading lamps, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamps on both sides of the vehicle will light up or go out. Adjusting the ambient lighting Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Ambient Lighting 5 Comfort Setting the color # Select Color. # Select Monochrome or Multi-color. # Set the desired color or color combination. Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness. % Depending on the ambient light conditions, the ambient lighting will automatically switch between day and night modes. Activating the brightness for zones Select Brightness. # Switch off Link Zones . The Direct, Indirect and Accent zones can be set separately. % The Light Band zone can also be set for vehi‐ cles with active ambient lighting. # Activating effects & WARNING Risk of an accident despite activated effects of ambient lighting and active ambient lighting To use the Warning Assistance effects, the respective functions must be activated in the driver assist menu. # Make sure that the functions and assists are switched on. % Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 218). # Select Effects. # Activate the desired effect. % Depending on the vehicle equipment, differ‐ ent effects are available. Operating feedback effects R Climate: If changes are made to the tempera‐ ture setting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change briefly. R Voice Assistant: For vehicles with active ambient lighting, the voice assistant is visu‐ ally animated. Warning assistance effects Warning When Exiting: If an object is detec‐ ted in the blind spot while you are getting out of the vehicle, the ambient lighting in the affected door will flash red. R Light and visibility 167 R R R Further information on the exit warning (/ page 250). Active Lane Keeping Assist: If there is a warning from Active Lane Keeping Assist, the active ambient lighting will flash red. Further information on Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 254). Active Brake Assist: If there is an Active Brake Assist warning, the active ambient lighting in the center of the dashboard will flash bright red. Further information on the Active Brake Assist (/ page 239). Active Blind Spot Assist: In vehicles with active ambient lighting, the ambient lighting on the affected side will flash red if there is a warning from Active Blind Spot Assist. Further information on the Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 250). Greeting R When you get into the vehicle, a special color animation will play. Multi-color Animation R The chosen color combination will change at predefined intervals. % In vehicles with active ambient lighting, an animation will be played. % The desired operating feedback and warning assistance can be activated or deactivated via the ´ symbol. Depending on the equipment, different operating feedback and warning assistance effects are available. % If the brightness is set to a low level, warning animations will be displayed at a higher basic brightness. Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/exterior lighting 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Switch Interior Lighting Delay on or off. When this function is active, the interior light‐ ing will light up for a short time after the vehicle is locked. 168 Light and visibility Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wipers on/off 1 g Windshield wipers off 2 Ä Automatic wiping, normal 3 Å Automatic wiping, frequent 4 ° Continuous wiping, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast Turn the combination switch to the corre‐ sponding position 1 - 5. # Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R í Single wipe R î Wiping with washer fluid % Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 343). Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: in position 2 or 3 , the windshield washing proc‐ ess is automatically triggered if dirt is detected on the windshield unless the Check Washer Fluid message is being displayed. # Cleaning the windshield intensively For heavy soiling, you can clean the windshield intensively from an outside temperature of 41°F (5°C). # In a stationary vehicle, turn the combination switch to position 1, 2 or 3. # Press the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 and hold it for approximately two seconds. The wiper arms will move into the replace‐ ment position and washer fluid will be distrib‐ uted on the windshield. After approximately 30 seconds, the wiper arms will move back again and wipe the windshield several times. Intensive cleaning has now finished. Replacing the windshield wiper blades & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before changing the wiper blades. Light and visibility 169 Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch the ignition on and then off again immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 168). The wiper arms will move into the replace‐ ment position. Installing the wiper blades Removing the wiper blades Fold the wiper arms away from the wind‐ shield. # # # # Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it will go. Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal position. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4. # # # Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1. Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position. Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor‐ rectly. 170 Light and visibility Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind‐ shield. # Switch on the ignition. # Press the î button on the combination switch. The wiper arms will return to the original position. # Switch the ignition off. % Check the condition of the wiper blades reg‐ ularly and replace them if there is visible damage or continual smearing. # Maintenance display % The duration until the color changes varies depending on the usage conditions. Replacing the windshield wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL) Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch the ignition off. # Within around 15 seconds, press the î button on the combination switch (/ page 168). The wiper arms will move into the replace‐ ment position. # Remove protective film 1 from the mainte‐ nance display on the tip of the newly instal‐ led wiper blades. When the color of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced. Light and visibility 171 Removing the wiper blades # To remove the wiper blade: press release knob 2, pull the wiper blade in the direction of arrow 3 and remove. Installing the wiper blades Press the wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 3 beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade will engage with a noticeable click and move freely again. # Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. % Check the condition of the wiper blades reg‐ ularly and replace them in the event of visi‐ ble damage or ongoing smearing. # Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors # To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow 1 beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade will engage in the removal position with a click. & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion # Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 until release knob 2 engages. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion 172 Light and visibility R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. Adjusting the outside mirrors Use button 1 to adjust the position of the selected mirror. Folding the outside mirrors in/out # Briefly press button 3. % If the battery has been disconnected or has discharged, the outside mirrors must be moved briefly using button 3. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly. & WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐ judgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoul‐ der to check the actual distance between you and the road users travel‐ ing behind you. # # Use button 2 or 4 to select the desired mirror. % In vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant and driver camera, the required outside mirror can also be preselected automatically via a natural head movement to the left or right (/ page 296). Engaging the outside mirrors If an outside mirror has been forcibly disen‐ gaged, proceed as follows. # Press and hold button 3. You will hear a click and the mirror will audi‐ bly engage. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position. Light and visibility 173 Automatic anti-glare mirrors function & WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi‐ soning due to the anti-glare mirror elec‐ trolyte Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into con‐ tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electro‐ lyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte. If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir‐ ror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror. System limits The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The engine is switched off. R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on. Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi‐ tion function The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R The parking position is stored (/ page 174). R The front-passenger mirror is selected. R Reverse gear is engaged. The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R You shift the transmission to another trans‐ mission position. R You are traveling at a speed greater than 9 mph (15 km/h). R You press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side. 174 Light and visibility Storing the parking position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear Storing Calling up # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2. # Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position. Area permeable to radio waves on the windshield Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing # Switch Automatic Mirror Folding on or off. # # # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2. Engage reverse gear. Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 1. Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll sys‐ tems, can be mounted only on areas 1 of the windshield that are permeable to radio waves. Areas permeable to radio waves 1 are best visi‐ ble from outside the vehicle when the windshield is illuminated with an external light source. Note this position for vehicles with: R Windshield heating R Infrared reflective windshield Light and visibility 175 Infrared-reflective windshield function The infrared-reflective windshield is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle inte‐ rior. The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves. 176 Climate control 2 Upper display area of the climate bar with Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control An interior air filter in combination with the pre‐ filter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollu‐ tion level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have main‐ tenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 3 4 Overview of the 3-zone automatic climate control climate bar The indicator lamps indicate that the corre‐ sponding function is activated. 5 Front climate bar on the central display (example) 1 s Increases the temperature 6 7 8 A the examples of switching off the cli‐ mate control (/ page 178), ¿ switching the A/C function on/off (/ page 179) and 0 synchronization function (/ page 180) ¬ Defrosts the windshield ¿ Switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 179) G Calls up the particulate status display (/ page 178) ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/off Depending on vehicle equipment and set‐ tings: temperature display, defrost function display, airflow, pre-entry climate control or auxiliary heating J Increases the airflow or switches on climate control (/ page 178) r Reduces the temperature ± Calls up the air conditioning menu (/ page 178) Climate control 177 B à Sets climate control to automatic mode, left (/ page 179) C I Reduces the airflow or switches off cli‐ mate control(/ page 178) Overview of the rear operating unit 3 Sets the airflow in the rear passenger com‐ 4 % The climate bar is visible even when the vehicle is parked or the air conditioning is switched off (/ page 178). % Vehicles with Distance Assist DISTRONIC: if Distance Assist DISTRONIC intervenes, the climate bar display on the central display is reduced. 5 6 7 8 Example: USA 1 Sets air distribution to the center and side air vents in the rear passenger compart‐ ment, left 2 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, left 9 A B C partment, left, or switches climate control on/off (/ page 178) Switches climate control on/off (/ page 178) Switches residual heat on/off (/ page 181) Sets the airflow in the rear passenger com‐ partment, right, or switches climate control on/off (/ page 178) Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, right Sets air distribution to the center and side air vents in the rear passenger compart‐ ment, right Sets rear passenger compartment climate control to automatic mode, right Sets the air distribution to the right rear passenger compartment footwell vents Synchronization is activated (/ page 180) Sets the air distribution to the rear passenger compartment left footwell vents Sets rear passenger compartment climate control to automatic mode, left 178 Climate control The settings for the second row of seats can be configured via the rear operating unit, the multi‐ media system (/ page 180) or the MBUX rear tablet depending on the vehicle's equipment. % If the climate control is switched off via the button, OFF will be shown on the climate bar. Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off Switching climate control on/off via the rear operating unit Switching on climate control Set the airflow to level 1 or higher via J on the climate bar on the central display or # Press Ã, s, r or ±. Switching on # Press button 4. or # Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using but‐ tons 3 and 5. or # Press button 2, 6, 8 or C. # Switching off climate control Set the airflow to level 0 via I on the cli‐ mate bar on the central display or # # Press . If climate control is switched off, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly. Switching off Press button 4. or # Set the airflow to level 0 using buttons 3 and 5. # % If rear climate control is switched off via but‐ ton 4, OFF will be shown on the rear dis‐ play. Switching the A/C function on/off using the air conditioning control panel The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. # Press the ¿ button. Switch off the A/C function only briefly; other‐ wise, the windows may fog up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a malfunction. Calling up the air conditioning menu The air conditioning menu can be called up via the air conditioning line. The air conditioning line is always shown on the lower edge of the central display. Climate control 179 # Select the Climate Menu entry in the air con‐ ditioning line. The First Row of Seats menu is opened. Jumping directly to the Air Quality menu # Select the particulate status display. The Air Quality menu is opened. An anima‐ tion of the automatic air cleaning taking place is shown. % The particulate status display is on the home screen next to the temperature display on the right and it informs you of the current particulate levels inside and outside of the vehicle. The measurement values are shown with the µg/m3 units (micrograms per cubic meter). Strong acceleration after longer parking periods will lead to a detachment of the dust covering the vehicle. This dust measured by the PM2.5 sensor might lead to a short rise of outside val‐ ues. Defrosting the windshield # # To activate: press ¬ on the climate bar on the central display. To deactivate: press ¬, à or j on the climate bar of the central display or Set the airflow to 0. % When the defrost function is activated, some functions, such as the temperature setting, are automatically deactivated. # Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 First Row of Seats Depending on the external conditions, improved cooling and dehumidification of the interior air are supported when the A/C function is activa‐ ted. # Select A/C (A/C). Setting climate control to automatic In automatic mode, the set vehicle interior tem‐ perature is controlled automatically and main‐ tained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central display. % You can increase or reduce the airflow by pressing K on the climate bar on the cen‐ tral display. # To switch to manual operation: switch off automatic mode or adjust an aspect of air distribution, e.g. P. Setting the air distribution Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu # Select First Row of Seats or Second Row of Seats. # To set the air distribution: select ¯, P or O. # Set the airflow. 180 Climate control % Several air distribution options can be selec‐ ted at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the windshield and the footwells simultaneously. However, at least one zone is always active. When the air con‐ ditioning system is switched off, the buttons remain operable and the last setting is auto‐ matically saved. The ¯ climate control for the windshield can only be selected for the first seat row. % When the automatic mode is activated, the buttons for adjusting the air distribution are automatically disabled. Setting the footwell temperature Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu # Select ^ and set the desired footwell temperature using the slider. Setting the rear climate control Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu Setting the temperature # Select Second Row of Seats. # Set the temperature. Setting the airflow # Select Second Row of Seats. # Set the air flow with s or r. Controlling the rear climate control automat‐ ically # Select AUTO. % When the defrost function is activated, some functions, such as the temperature setting, are automatically deactivated. To deactivate the defrost function, either press ¬, à or j or set the air vol‐ ume to level 0 (/ page 179). Deactivating rear climate control # Select REAR OFF. Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The driver's settings for temperature, airflow and air distribution will be adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Select First Row of Seats. # Select SYNC (SYNC). Defrosting the windows Windows fogged up on the inside # Press à on the climate bar of the central display. # If the windows remain fogged up: press ¬ on the climate bar of the central display. Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. Climate control 181 # Press à on the climate bar on the central display. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu # Press g. 5 First Row of Seats The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to fresh air mode after a while. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. Switching residual heat on/off Requirements: R The residual heat function is available. R The vehicle is parked. R The coolant temperature is sufficiently high. It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilat‐ ing the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes, depending on the temperature set. # To switch on: select Residual Heat on the climate bar on the central display. Residual heat will be switched off automatically. % If residual engine heat utilization is activa‐ ted, the two buttons for setting the tempera‐ ture and air distribution are automatically deactivated. Switching residual heat on/off via the rear operating unit Requirements: R The residual heat function is available. R The vehicle is parked. R The coolant temperature must be sufficiently high. When the residual heat of the engine is activated in the rear passenger compartment, you can heat or ventilate the front and rear passenger compartments for approximately 15 minutes. # Press the Ì button. Activating/deactivating ionization Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality Ionization improves the quality of the vehicle's interior air. Ionization of the interior air is odor‐ less. # Select Ionization. % The function can only be performed if the AUTO mode is activated or the air distribu‐ tion is set to the side air vent. The function is restricted if the side air vents on the driver's side are closed. Fragrance system Setting the fragrance system Requirements: R A flacon is inserted. 182 Climate control R R The glove box is closed. Climate control is activated. Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra‐ grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla‐ con located in the glove box. # Select Fragrance. # Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached. Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra‐ grance system & WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per‐ fume If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into con‐ tact with their eyes. # Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. # # # + Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk. If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water. If symptoms continue, consult a doctor. ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons Full flacons must not be disposed of with household waste. # Full flacons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point. 1 Cap 2 Flacon # # To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go. To remove: after opening the glove box, wait for approximately seven seconds and pull out the flacon. Climate control 183 If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it. Refillable flacon # Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon. # Fill the flacon with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml). # Screw the cap back on to the flacon. Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate informa‐ tion sheet with the flacon. Information on the windshield heater & WARNING Risk of burns from touching the windshield when the windshield heater is switched on The windshield can become very hot when the windshield heater is switched on. The health of persons with limited tempera‐ ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not touch the windshield while the windshield heater is switched on. # Allow the windshield to cool down before touching it. The windshield heater will be enabled automati‐ cally if ¬ is activated on the climate bar on the central display. After the vehicle is started, the windshield heater is switched on automatically as required. Pre-entry climate control for departure time Pre-entry climate control for departure time function & WARNING Danger to life due to expo‐ sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi‐ cle If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic‐ ular, unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐ edly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limi‐ ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affec‐ ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. 184 Climate control # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly. % This function is available only in vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ Boost technology). The air inside the vehicle can be heated, ventila‐ ted or cooled to the set temperature when the vehicle is parked. When the vehicle is connected to power supply equipment, priority is given to charging the 48 V battery to a specified minimum charge. The running time of pre-entry climate control may be reduced under the following conditions: R The vehicle is not connected to power supply equipment. R The 48 V battery is not fully charged. With active pre-entry climate control, the charge level of the 48 V battery may be reduced, even if the charging cable connector is connected. If present, seat ventilation is activated in cooling and ventilation mode. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol‐ lowing functions are activated in heating mode, if available: R Seat heating R Steering wheel heater R Panel heating R Mirror heater R Rear window heater R Windshield heater When the set temperature is changed, climate control mode will automatically be updated and switched from heating mode to ventilation or cooling mode, from cooling mode to ventilation or heating mode or from ventilation mode to heating or cooling mode. Setting pre-entry climate control for depar‐ ture time Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Pre-entry Climate Ctrl. Setting the departure time Select Edit Departure Time ´ . # Select a departure time or set a new depar‐ ture time. # Setting the repeat days Select Edit Departure Time ´ . # Set the desired departure time and select the corresponding weekdays on which this departure time is to apply. # Press OK to confirm. # Selecting seats Select Driver, Passenger, Rear Left or Rear Right. Pre-entry climate control will take place for the selected seats. # Climate control 185 Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control for departure time Requirements: R The 48 V battery is charged sufficiently. R The function has been activated via the mul‐ timedia system. To activate: set the departure time (/ page 184). Pre-entry climate control for departure time switches on a maximum of 55 minutes before the selected departure time. It will remain active for another five minutes if the departure is delayed. # To deactivate the pre-entry climate con‐ trol for departure time early: press the & button or switch off the preselection of the time in the climate menu. If present, the following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started: R Seat heating R Seat ventilation R Panel heating # Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol‐ lowing functions will also be adjusted during preentry climate control if they have already been switched on during regular vehicle operation: R Fragrancing R Ionization Activating/deactivating immediate pre-entry climate control & WARNING Danger to life due to expo‐ sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi‐ cle If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic‐ ular, unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐ edly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limi‐ ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affec‐ ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly. % Immediate pre-entry climate control is avail‐ able only in vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ Boost technology). Air conditioning of the vehicle interior can con‐ tinue for up to 50 minutes, e.g. if the journey is interrupted. 186 Climate control R R Red: Heating mode is switched on. Yellow: the departure time is preselected. Air vents Adjusting the front air vents & WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents Press button 1. The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1 will light up or go out. # Set the temperature using the w arrows on the climate bar on the central display. The colors of the indicator lamp have the follow‐ ing meanings: R Blue: Ventilation or cooling mode is switched on. # Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents. # If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following: R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear. R Keep the air inlet grille free of residue buildup (/ page 343). # To open the center and side air vents: press button 1. The three indicator lamps on the button will light up. The air vents will be opened com‐ pletely. Climate control 187 # # # To close the center and side air vents: press button 1 again. The three indicator lamps on the button will go out one by one. The air vents will be closed completely. To adjust the airflow direction of the side air vents: hold outer side air vent 2 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right. To adjust the airflow direction of the cen‐ ter air vent: hold air vent 3 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right. # Adjusting the rear air vents & WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents. # If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. # # To open the rear air vents in the center console: press button 1. The air vents will be opened completely and the three indicator lamps on the button will light up. To close the rear air vents in the center console: press button 1 again. The three indicator lamps on the button will go out one by one. The air vents will be closed completely. To adjust the airflow direction of the rear air vents in the center console: hold air vent 2 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right. # # To open the side air vents in the rear passenger compartment: press button 1. If the button is flush with the side trim, the side air vent is open. To close the side air vents in the rear passenger compartment: press button 1 again. If the button protrudes from the side trim, the side air vent is closed. 188 Climate control # To adjust the airflow direction of the side air vents in the rear passenger compart‐ ment: hold air vent 2 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right. Opening or closing the air vent in the glove box * NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive objects in the glove box Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside it. # Close the air vent when you heat the vehicle. # At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and switch on the A/C func‐ tion. The automatic climate control must be switched on to cool the glove box. 1 Air vent controller 2 Air vent # To open or close: turn controller 1 to the right or left. Driving and parking 189 Driving Switching on the power supply or ignition # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle # If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog‐ nized. R The brake pedal is not depressed. # To switch on the power supply: press but‐ ton 1 once. You can, for example, activate the windshield wipers. The power supply is switched off again if the fol‐ lowing conditions are met: R You open the driver's door. R You press button 1 twice more. 190 Driving and parking To switch on the ignition: press button 1 twice. Indicator and warning lamps go on in the driver display. The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met: R You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in posi‐ tion j or the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button 1 once. # Starting the vehicle Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but‐ ton & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ lation. & WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system. Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog‐ nized. # # # Shift the transmission to position j or i. Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once. If the vehicle does not start: Switch off nonessential consumers and press button 1 once. If the vehicle still does not start and the dis‐ play message Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual also appears in the driver display: Start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emer‐ gency operation mode) (/ page 190). % You can switch off the engine while driving. By pressing button 1 for about three sec‐ onds or by pressing button 1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 194). Observe the information regarding display mes‐ sages that can be displayed on the driver dis‐ play. # Starting the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message appears in the driver display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode. Driving and parking 191 Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi‐ cle using the start/stop button. % You can also switch on the power supply or the ignition with the start/stop button. Observe the information regarding display mes‐ sages that can be displayed on the driver dis‐ play. # # # # # Make sure that cup holder 2 is empty. Remove SmartKey 1 from the key ring. Place SmartKey 1 in cup holder 2. The vehicle will start after a short time. If SmartKey 1 is removed from cup holder 2, the engine continues running. For further engine starts, however, SmartKey 1 must be located in cup holder2 during the entire journey. Have SmartKey 1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle does not start: Leave SmartKey 1 in cup holder 2. # Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Serv‐ ices Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before starting the journey Ensure the following before starting the engine: R the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R the fuel tank is sufficiently full. R the starter battery is sufficiently charged. Charging the starter battery before starting the journey If the vehicle battery is discharged, you can receive a message on your smartphone. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full. Starting the vehicle (Remote Online) & WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap‐ ment due to unintentional starting of the engine Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. 192 Driving and parking # Always secure the engine against unin‐ tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. Requirements: R Park position j is selected. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched off. R The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. # Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes. You can carry out a maximum of two consecu‐ tive starting attempts. You must start the engine with the SmartKey before trying to start the engine again with the smartphone. You can switch off the engine at any time as fol‐ lows: R Via the smartphone app R By pressing the Ü or s button on the SmartKey % Further information can be found in the smartphone app. Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof. Breaking-in notes To preserve the engine during the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km): R Drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds. R R R R R R R Do not drive at speeds greater than 85 mph (140 km/h). Drive the vehicle in drive program A or ;. Shift to the next highest gear at the very lat‐ est when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer. Do not shift down manually in order to brake. Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle. Do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown). Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1,000 miles (1,500 km). This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following breaking-in notes: R In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a cer‐ tain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys‐ Driving and parking 193 R tem effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are either new or have been replaced only ach‐ ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred kilometers of driving. Com‐ pensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Notes on optimized acceleration If all necessary requirements and activation con‐ ditions are fulfilled, the best possible accelera‐ tion can be achieved from a standstill. Do not use the optimized acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident. Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa‐ tion on ESP® (/ page 221). Pulling away with optimized acceleration & WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning When you use optimized acceleration, indi‐ vidual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skid‐ ding and accident. # Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle. Requirements: R The vehicle has been broken in (/ page 192). R The vehicle and tires are in good condition. R You are on a high-grip roadway. R The engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature. * NOTE Increased wear due to optimized acceleration When pulling away with optimized accelera‐ tion, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load. This can lead to increased component wear. # Do not always pull away with optimized acceleration. # # # # # # Engage the h drive position (/ page 205). Move the steering wheel to the straightahead position. Select the sportiest available drive program B or C(/ page 202). Deactivate ESP® (/ page 222). Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with your left foot. With your right foot, fully depress the accel‐ erator pedal. 194 Driving and parking # # After no more than five seconds, take your left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera‐ tion. Switch on ESP® once the acceleration proce‐ dure is complete. Ending optimized acceleration Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate the ESP®. % After you pull away with optimized accelera‐ tion, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that opti‐ mized acceleration values may be reached again only after a few minutes. # Notes on driving & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect footwear Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers There is a risk of an accident. Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely. # & WARNING Risk of accident if the ignition is switched off while driving If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch off the ignition while driv‐ ing. & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ lation. Driving and parking 195 & WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐ faces to increase the engine braking effect. & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐ sonous exhaust gases If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐ tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐ cle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run‐ ning. # Open a window on the side of the vehi‐ cle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alco‐ hol and drugs while driving Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg‐ ment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci‐ dent are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. & WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over‐ heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even cause the brake sys‐ tem failure. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving. * NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over‐ revving range. 196 Driving and parking * NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal # # Do not depress the brake pedal contin‐ uously whilst driving. To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away # # Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi‐ ately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. * NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata‐ lytic converter. # # Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * NOTE Reduced battery life due to fre‐ quent short-distance trips The 12 V battery may not be sufficiently charged when the vehicle is used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery. # Drive longer distances regularly to charge the battery. Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occu‐ pied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change. You should bear the following in mind: R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and towing capacity. Also observe the technical data in the printed Operator's Manual. R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 134). R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking effect is limited on salt-treated roads. Therefore, observe the following notes: R due to salt build-up on the brake discs and brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R maintain a much greater safe distance to the vehicle in front Driving and parking 197 To remove salt build-up: brake occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey R Notes on hydroplaning Hydroplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precip‐ itation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R Reduce speed R Avoid tire ruts R Avoid sudden steering movements R Brake carefully % Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 373). Notes on driving through water on the road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage. Observe the following if you must drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h); water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi‐ cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water. The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored. Function of rear axle steering The rear axle steering is an electromechanical auxiliary steering on the rear axle which adjusts the steering of the rear wheels according to the position of the front wheels, depending on the speed. This results in greater maneuverability and improved driving stability, e.g. when corner‐ ing. Rear axle steering has the following characteris‐ tics: R Reduced steering effort and turning radius resulting in reduced parking effort R Improved driving stability, e.g. when corner‐ ing R More direct steering resulting in improved handling of the vehicle Observe the notes on snow chains and snow chain mode (/ page 374). 198 Driving and parking ECO start/stop function ECO start/stop function % Depending on the engine, the ECO start/ stop function is not available in all drive pro‐ grams. Observe the status display in the driver display for this. The engine is switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met: R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans‐ mission position h or i. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: You depress the brake pedal when traveling at a low speed. If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop: R You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehi‐ cle in front of you. R The vehicle that stopped in front of you starts up again. R You maneuver, turn the steering wheel sharply or engage reverse gear. % If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, for example, a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position j, the engine can be switched off in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor. The engine is restarted automatically if: R You engage transmission position h or k. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R An automatic engine start is required by the vehicle. R You release the brake pedal. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: You release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does not roll. The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter glide mode at 15 mph (20 km/h). ECO start/stop function symbols in the driver display: R The è symbol (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: The engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The ç symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: Not all vehicle condi‐ tions for an engine stop have been met. R Neither the è nor ç symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: An intelli‐ gent stop inhibitor was detected, for exam‐ ple, a stop sign. R The s symbol appears: The ECO start/ stop function is deactivated or there is a mal‐ function. If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn‐ ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the following display message appears in the driver display: Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting Driving and parking 199 If you do not switch off the ignition, it is auto‐ matically switched off after three minutes. Deactivating or activating the ECO start/ stop function # Press button 1. A display appears in the driver display when switching the ECO start/stop function off/on. % A continuous s display appears in the driver display while the ECO start/stop func‐ tion is deactivated. ECO display function The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driving style on the driver display depending on the situation. This enables you to check the effi‐ ciency of your driving style and adjust it if neces‐ sary. The ECO Display menu shows a ball 2 that will roll forwards or backwards on a stylized road in the direction of travel according to the driving characteristics. Above and below the road, lines mark the area for an efficient driving style 3. Ball 2 will light up in green if it is rolling within these lines. Out‐ side the lines, the ball will light up in orange. The ECO display assesses the following criteria for an economical driving style: R Coasting at the right time R Consistent speed R Moderate acceleration The overall assessment of your driving style "from start" is indicated with stars. It starts with five empty stars, which you can fill one after the other if you drive efficiently. When all five stars are filled, a glow appears in the background. % You can call up the ECO Display function via the Classic and Exclusive menus (/ page 281). ECO Assist function (vehicles with 48 V onboard electrical system) % ECO Assist is active only in drive pro‐ grams ; and A. 200 Driving and parking ECO Assist analyzes data for the vehicle's expec‐ ted route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead and the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill gradi‐ ent. ECO Assist display on the driver's display on the Assistance menu 1 "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation 2 Route event ahead If a route event that can be dealt with more effi‐ ciently by adjusting your driving style is detected ahead, corresponding symbol 2 will be dis‐ played. In addition, the ý symbol will be displayed until you take your foot off the accelerator or until you have passed the route event. Symbol 2 will disappear as soon as ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route ahead. The following route events can be detected by ECO Assist: 3 Roundabout 4 5 6 7 8 9 S-curve Sharp curve T-intersection Downhill gradient Vehicle in front Speed limit % Only route event 8 "vehicle in front" will be displayed in drive program A. System limits If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be fore‐ seen. The quality depends on the map data. ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsi‐ ble for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Driving and parking 201 The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐ tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐ ged up, damaged or covered. R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are covered. R If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes. DYNAMIC SELECT button Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT button % Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs. Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change between the following drive programs: The chosen drive program appears in the driver display. = Individual R Individual settings B Sport+ R Very sporty driving style with lowered sus‐ pension R Emphasizes the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics for a more active driving style R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road C Sport Sporty driving style with lowered suspension R Still sporty, but with an emphasis on stability R R R Allows the sporty driver a more active driving style Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road A Comfort R Comfortable and economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions N Curve Only available for vehicles with E‑ACTIVE BODY CONTROL R Comfortable driving with curve inclination function R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions R ; Eco R Particularly economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions 202 Driving and parking Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics: R Drive Engine and transmission management Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Availability of Glide mode R ESP® R Suspension Suspension and damping Vehicle level R Steering Selecting the drive program Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 DYNAMIC SELECT 5 Vehicle Setting drive program I # Select Individual. # Select and set a category. Switching the reset display on/off Switch Request at Start on or off. % This function must be activated for each user profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and ECO start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile. Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an addi‐ tional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. # # Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 1 on the left or right. The chosen drive program appears in the dis‐ play of the button. Driving and parking 203 % The prompt appears only if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings. Function off: the next time the vehicle is star‐ ted the A drive program is set automatically. The ECO start/stop function is activated auto‐ matically. Displaying vehicle data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Vehicle. The vehicle data is displayed. Displaying engine data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Engine. The engine data is displayed. % The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine tor‐ que may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines). Influencing variables that can influence this are, for example: R Sea level R Fuel quality R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine Please adjust your driving style accordingly. The p warning lamp in the instrument cluster is on until the engine has reached operating temperature. % The values displayed serve only as orienta‐ tion. The values for engine output and engine torque shown in the central display may deviate from the actual values. % p to display the power reduction after engine start is not available in all vehicle models. Calling up the fuel consumption indicator Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Consumption. The current and average fuel consumption is displayed. Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect gearshifting If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi‐ tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position h or k when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time. 204 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is shown in the driver display. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Engaging reverse gear R Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance. # Engaging neutral N Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. % To shift into neutral i with the ignition on, push the selector lever up or down for sev‐ eral seconds to the first point of resistance. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. # In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # i Neutral h Drive position j Park position k Reverse gear Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i, even if the ignition is switched off or the driver's door is opened: # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i when the vehicle is at a standstill. Driving and parking 205 # # Release the brake pedal. Switch the ignition off. The Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activated Manually No Automatic Change to P message appears on the driver's display. % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans‐ mission remains in neutral i. The park position j is automatically re-engaged as soon as one of the following conditions is met: R You switch to transmission position h or k. R You press the button j. Engaging park position P Observe the notes on parking the vehicle (/ page 210). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. # When the vehicle is at a standstill, press but‐ ton j. When the transmission position display shows j, the park position is engaged. If no transmission position display j appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. % Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display. Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch off the ignition when the vehicle is stationary and the transmission position is h or k. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission position is h or k. R You switch off the engine and bring the vehi‐ cle to a standstill when the vehicle is rolling and the transmission position is h or k. # R R You switch off the engine, bring the vehicle to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when the vehicle is rolling and the transmission posi‐ tion is i. Engaging park position j automatically is required by the vehicle. % To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while at a standstill and engage transmission position h or k again. Engaging drive position D Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. When the automatic transmission is in transmis‐ sion position h, it shifts the gears automati‐ cally. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal R The driving speed # 206 Driving and parking Manual gearshifting Temporary setting: To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1 or 2. Manual shifting is activated for a short time. The transmission position display shows p and the current gear. # When the automatic transmission is shifted to position h, you can manually shift it with the steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission shifts to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshift paddle being pulled. You have two options to manually shift the auto‐ matic transmission: R Temporary setting R Permanent setting The gears shift automatically when manual shift‐ ing is deactivated. % How long the manual shifting stays activated is dependent on various factors. Manual shifting can be automatically deacti‐ vated in the following cases: R Changing the drive program R Restarting the vehicle R When the transmission position h is engaged again R Driving style # To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2. # To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1. # To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2 and hold it in place. The transmission position display shows h. Permanent setting: Change to drive program =(/ page 202). # Select drive setting p (/ page 202). # Gearshift recommendation The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style. # If gearshift recommendation 1 appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear. Driving and parking 207 Using kickdown # Maximum acceleration: depress the accel‐ erator pedal beyond the pressure point. To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached. Glide mode function With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterized by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position display h is shown in green. R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ Boost technology): The com‐ bustion engine can be switched off. All of the vehicle functions remain active. Glide mode is activated if the following condi‐ tions are met: R Drive program ; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill inclines or tight curves. R You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake applications). % Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program =. Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow‐ ing parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R Height R Speed R Operating status of the engine R Traffic situation Function of the 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over‐ ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe‐ cially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. 208 Driving and parking Refueling Refueling the vehicle & WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available, the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐ oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐ tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ ing. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. & WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor. # Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. # To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline. This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal Driving and parking 209 If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks * NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi‐ cles with a gasoline engine If you have added too much fuel because of a defective filling pump, for instance: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. # # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap. Otherwise, engine output can be reduced and fuel consumption increased. * NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked. % Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel. 1 Fuel filler flap 2 Bracket for fuel filler cap 3 Tire pressure table 210 Driving and parking 4 QR code for rescue card 5 Fuel type # # # # # # # Press on the back area of fuel filler flap 1. Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it. Insert fuel filler cap from above into bracket 2. Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel. Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. Close fuel filler flap 1. Parking Parking the vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehi‐ cle rolling away If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi‐ ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving. # Apply the parking brake. # Switch the transmission to position j. & WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. # In particular, do not park on dry grass‐ land or harvested grain fields. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Driving and parking 211 # # Engage transmission position j in a station‐ ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 205). # Switch off the engine and the ignition by pressing button 1. # Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away # Always secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing away. * NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lower‐ ing Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: The vehicle can lower because of temperature differences or longer non-operational times. This can cause dam‐ age to parts of the body. # When stopping the vehicle and when driving off, make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body. Garage door opener # # # Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal. On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving. Apply the electric parking brake. Programming buttons for the garage door opener & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. 212 Driving and parking # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ lation. & WARNING Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, per‐ sons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement. # Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's move‐ ment. Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and reversing fea‐ ture R Doors which conform to the current U.S. safety standards Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on. # % The garage door opener function is always available when the ignition is switched on. # Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada) Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow. % It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi‐ cator lamp flashes yellow. # Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow. # Point remote control 5 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1, 2 or 3. # Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin‐ uously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro‐ gramming was successful. Additionally, Driving and parking 213 synchronization of the rolling code with the door system must be carried out. # If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure. # Release all of the buttons. % The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener. Synchronizing the rolling code Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range of movement of the door. # Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds. Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com‐ pleted. % Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive. # Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control 5 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control 5. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐ shop. # Hold remote control 5 at various angles from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every posi‐ tion for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button 6 on remote control 5 again before transmission ends. # Angle the antenna line of the garage door opener unit towards the remote control. % Support and additional information on pro‐ gramming: R On the toll free HomeLink® Hotline on 1-800-355-3515 R On the Internet at https:// www.homelink.com/mercedes Opening or closing the garage door Requirements: The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door. R # # Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes. If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold 214 Driving and parking the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes. Clearing the garage door opener memory Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release buttons 1 and 3. The entire memory has been deleted. R R # Electric parking brake Function of the electric parking brake (apply‐ ing automatically) & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. The electric parking brake is applied if the transmission is in position j and one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. % To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 215). In the following situations, the electric park‐ ing brake is also applied: R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta‐ tionary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill. R In addition, one of the following condi‐ tions must be fulfilled: The engine is switched off. The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. There is a system malfunction. The power supply is insufficient. Driving and parking 215 - The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver display. % The electric parking brake is not automati‐ cally applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Function of the electric parking brake (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver's door is closed. R The engine is running. R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground. R If the transmission is in position k, the trunk lid must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat. When the electric parking brake is released, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp in the driver display goes out. Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually Applying Push handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐ tor lamp lights up in the driver display. % The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red F (USA) or ! (Can‐ ada) indicator lamp is lit continuously. # Releasing Switch on the ignition. # Pull handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐ tor lamp in the driver display goes out. # Emergency braking Press and hold handle 1. As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please Release Parking Brake message is displayed and the red ! indicator lamp flashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red F (USA) or ! (Can‐ ada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver dis‐ play. # 216 Driving and parking Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle If a collision is detected when the tow-away alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch on the ignition. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged. R The force of the impact. The following situations can lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a twostory garage. % Deactivate the tow-away alarm in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti‐ vate the tow-away alarm, collision detection will also be deactivated. You can permanently deactivate collision detection via the multimedia system (/ page 216). % If the battery is severely discharged, the function for detecting a collision on a parked vehicle is automatically deactivated to facili‐ tate the next engine start. System limits Detection may be restricted in the following sit‐ uations: R The vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g. if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a SmartKey R An impact occurs at low speed R The electric parking brake is not applied Setting collision detection on a parked vehi‐ cle Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Collision Notification # Activate or deactivate the function under Collision detection. % A maximum of three incidents can be regis‐ tered. Up to 15 photos are taken for every incident. In the event of another incident, the photos of the first incident will be overwrit‐ ten if they have not been deleted already. Activating or deactivating the collision pho‐ tos function Please note possible legal restrictions in some countries regarding automatic recording of the vehicle surroundings. # Activate or deactivate Collision photos. Transferring the collision photos with the Mercedes me app # Select Upload Collision Photos. # Scan the QR code on the central display with the Mercedes me app. The encrypted collision photos will then be uploaded to Mercedes me. % Any device that can scan QR codes can be used to view the collision photos in the Mercedes me app. Copying the collision photos to a USB flash drive # Connect a USB flash drive . Driving and parking 217 Select Manage Collision Photos. Select Copy (USB). All collision photos are copied to the USB flash drive. % To ensure secure operation, only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices. # # Deleting collision photos # Select Manage Collision Photos. # Select Delete. All collision photos will be deleted. Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam‐ aged by heavy discharging. % Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Standby mode (extension of the starter bat‐ tery's period out of use) Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimized during extended periods of non-oper‐ ation. Standby mode is characterized by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears in the driver's display. R The connection to online services is interrup‐ ted. If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on. Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera‐ tional time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it can‐ not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine. Charge the starter battery in the following situa‐ tions: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be extended. R The starter battery charge level is insufficient for standby mode. % Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on. Activating/deactivating standby mode (park‐ ing the vehicle for an extended period) Requirements: R The engine is switched off. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing # Activate or deactivate Standby Mode. 218 Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneu‐ vering the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic condi‐ tions. Information on vehicle sensors and cameras Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar, lidar or ultrasonic sen‐ sors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Multifunction camera Cameras in the outside mirrors Front radar Front camera Corner radars Ultrasonic sensors Rear view camera Driving and parking 219 & WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehi‐ cle sensors and cameras If the area around vehicle sensors or cam‐ eras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. # Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean. # Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 346). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional license plate bracket, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear win‐ dows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. % The rear view camera may move in and out automatically for the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image in the display. Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems R R R R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 220) BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 220) ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (/ page 221) ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 222) R R R R R R R R R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution) (/ page 222) STEER CONTROL (/ page 222) HOLD function (/ page 223) Hill Start Assist (/ page 224) ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 224) Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 244) Traffic light view (/ page 248) AIRMATIC (/ page 256) E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL (/ page 258) Driving Assistance package R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 226) R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-depend‐ ent) (/ page 230) R Route-based speed adaptation (countrydependent) (/ page 231) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 239) R Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 233) 220 Driving and parking R R R R R R Active Emergency Stop Assist (countrydependent) (/ page 235) Active Lane Change Assist (country-depend‐ ent) (/ page 237) Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-depend‐ ent) (/ page 233) Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 250) Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 254) PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side (/ page 61) Parking Package % The availability of individual functions is country and equipment-dependent. R Rear view camera (/ page 261) R Surround view camera (/ page 263) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 268) R Active Parking Assist (/ page 271) Functions of ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ABS regulates the brake pressure in critical driv‐ ing situations: R During braking, e.g. at maximum full-stop braking or insufficient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving. System limits R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 3 mph (5 km/h). R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yel‐ low ! ABS warning lamp lights up contin‐ uously in the instrument cluster after the engine is started. Function of BAS & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys‐ tem) If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. # Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres‐ sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Driving and parking 221 Function of ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro‐ gram) & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations. ESP® can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations, within physical limits: R When pulling away on a wet or slippery road. R When braking. If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to the situation. When ESP® is deactivated, the å warning lamp lights up continuously: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. % When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assis‐ ted by ESP® when braking. When the ÷ warning lamp flashes, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP®. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when pulling away. Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to improve traction: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel. % Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continu‐ ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 561) R Display messages (/ page 503) ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Influence of drive programs on ESP® The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif‐ ferent weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate 222 Driving and parking ESP® mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 202). Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi‐ cle in the lane: R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 47 mph (75 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ‐ ual brake application on one side. Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta‐ bility Program) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 ß 5 y % ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® # # can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu. Select ESP. Select On or å Off. ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn‐ ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe any information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. Function of EBD Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char‐ acterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends. Function of STEER CONTROL STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering recommendation is given in the fol‐ lowing situations: R Both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake R The vehicle starts to skid System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP® is deactivated. R ESP® is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning. If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering. Driving and parking 223 HOLD function HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand‐ still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi‐ bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver. System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%. Activating/deactivating the HOLD function & WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. # Always secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing away before you leave it. Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened. R The engine is running or has been automati‐ cally switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R R R The electric parking brake is released. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐ vated. The transmission is in position h, k or i. Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal, and after a short time quickly depress further until the ë display appears in the driver display. # Release the brake pedal. Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis‐ play disappears from the driver display. The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow‐ ing situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted. R The transmission is shifted to position j. R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐ ing brake. 224 Driving and parking In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. In addition, the Brake Immediately message may appear in the driver display and a horn tone may sound at regular intervals. # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message disappears. The HOLD function is deactivated. # Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away. Function of Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the fol‐ lowing conditions: R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist. ATTENTION ASSIST Function of ATTENTION ASSIST with micro‐ sleep detection % The microsleep detection subfunction is only available in combination with the driver cam‐ era. ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto‐ nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver are detected, the system suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: increased system sensitivity: the driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by the system is adapted accordingly. If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra‐ tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears on the driver display. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you Driving and parking 225 will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes. - The following information is displayed on the driver display: R The length of the journey since the last break R The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST: More segments 2 of the circle dis‐ played, the higher the detected attention level. Fewer segments 2 are displayed in the circle as the attention level decreases. R Microsleep detection 1 status: Deactivated: display 1 is hidden. Activated but not operational: display 1 is gray. Activated and operational: display 1 is green. If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If the system, which uses the driver camera, detects indicators of microsleep, the ATTENTION ASSIST Nodding Off Take a Break! warning message appears on the driver display and a warning tone sounds simultaneously. This warn‐ ing message must be confirmed by Touch Con‐ trol. It is recommended that you take a break immediately. If a warning is given on the driver display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga‐ tion to this rest area. ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection is activated automatically when the engine is restarted. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. The microsleep detection function is available at a speed of 12.5 mph (20 km/h) and above. Particularly in the following situations, ATTEN‐ TION ASSIST only functions in a restricted man‐ ner and warnings may be delayed or not occur: R If you have been driving for less than approx‐ imately 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor‐ nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis‐ tance Assist DISTRONIC is active. R If the clock is set to the incorrect time. R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre‐ quently In active driving situations. 226 Driving and parking Microsleep detection also does not function when the driver camera cannot detect the driv‐ er's eyes, for example as a result of the following factors: R The driver's eyes are covered due to the steering column position, for example. R Poor ambient light. R Some types of eyeglasses or sunglasses. R The driver's line of vision is outside the driver camera's field of vision. Also observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed on the driver display. The tiredness and alertness assessment of ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection is reset and restarted when continuing the journey in the following situations: R If you switch off the engine. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break). Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is main‐ tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend‐ ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is available in the 15 mph (20 km/h) to 130 mph (210 km/h) speed range. Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfort‐ able or dynamic) (/ page 201) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R R Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles) Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (country-dependent) Additional function available in certain coun‐ tries: if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has braked the vehicle to a standstill, it can automat‐ ically follow the vehicle in front when driving off again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected in the surrounding area when driving off, such as a person in the vehicle path, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ready to pull away when the green ç vehicle symbol flashes cyclically. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 218). Driving and parking 227 Driver display in the Assistance menu 1 Vehicle in front 2 Distance indicator 3 Set specified distance Vehicle detected in front 1 is highlighted in green. It may also be in the lane to the left of your vehicle in situations where it is not permit‐ ted to overtake on the right, for example on high‐ ways. Permanent status display R ç (white): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set R ç (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected The stored speed is shown under the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedome‐ ter. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the status display is grayed out. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up. When the set specified distance is increased or decreased, the Ò display briefly appears under the vehicle in the permanent status dis‐ play. % On highways or high-speed major roads, the green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cycli‐ cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away. % If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas‐ sive mode. The ç Suspended message appears on the driver display. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R The windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. R In parking garages or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles. In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel‐ erating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations. 228 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of accident from acceler‐ ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel‐ erate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis‐ tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi‐ cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita‐ ble distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action. R # # Always carefully observe the traffic con‐ ditions and be ready to brake at all times. Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. & WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta‐ tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles to complex traffic conditions to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly. Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Requirements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP® is activated and is not intervening. R The transmission is in position h. R All the doors are closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed. R Snow chain mode is not active (/ page 374). Driving and parking 229 # To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the respective button with only one finger or swipe on the control panel. Activating/deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Press H. Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC To activate without a stored speed: on control panel 1 press M on the upper section or N on the lower section or J. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. or # To activate with a stored speed: press J. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle. # J Adopts the stored/detected speed ± Deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 1 Increases/decreases the speed K Increases/decreases the specified dis‐ tance H Activates/deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Increasing or reducing the speed # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph (1 km/h). # To decrease the stored speed: swipe down‐ wards from the top of control panel 1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph (1 km/h). or # Briefly press M on the upper section or N on the lower section of control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h). or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # Press M on the upper section of control panel 1. Adopting the limit speed shown in the driver display # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. 230 Driving and parking # Press J. The limit speed displayed in the driver display is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed. Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal. # Press J. or # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out. Reducing or increasing the specified dis‐ tance from the vehicle in front # Press K. The h display appears. The specified dis‐ tance is reduced by one level. If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level. Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC & WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi‐ cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat. # Press ±. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If a change in the speed limit of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more is detected and automatic adoption of speed limits is activated, the new speed limit is automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 232). The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the driver display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If you are driving on German highways and there is no speed limit, the system uses the speed stored for a stretch of road with no speed limit as the set speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on a stretch of road with no speed limit, the recommended speed of 80 mph (130 km/h) is adopted. If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelera‐ tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. The maximum permissible speed does not take the road condition and current weather and traf‐ fic conditions into account. Adjust your speed accordingly, when necessary. Driving and parking 231 Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 218). System limits The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs (/ page 244). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehi‐ cle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations. & WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) R R # # in wet conditions or in fog when towing a trailer Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations. Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions. Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti‐ vated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accord‐ ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti‐ ates a route event ahead in a fuel-saving, com‐ fortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. Route-based speed adaptation can be activated in the multimedia system (/ page 232). The following route events are taken into account: R Curves R R R R Roundabouts T-intersections Turns and exits Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic ) Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi‐ cator is switched on and one of the following sit‐ uations is detected: R Turning off at intersections R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, round‐ abouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand‐ still. If a corresponding route event is detected while route guidance is active, the first speed adjust‐ ment is carried out automatically. If the turn sig‐ nal indicator is switched on, the selected route is 232 Driving and parking confirmed and further speed adjustment is acti‐ vated. Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event and it is therefore assumed that the route event is not relevant to the driver. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process. System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed. In difficult conditions, the speed selection made by the system may not always be suitable. This applies to the following situations, for example: R Unclear roads R Road narrowing R Varying maximum permissible speeds in indi‐ vidual lanes, for example at toll plazas R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc‐ tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol‐ lowing situations: R If the driver does not follow the calcula‐ ted route R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations # Adapt the speed to the traffic situation. Setting Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC driving styles Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving 5 Active Distance Assist Selecting a driving style Select DYNAMIC SELECT based , Dynamic or Comfort. # Setting speed adaptation Select When cornering etc. or For limits. When these functions are active, the vehicle speed is adjusted according to a route event ahead or to speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist. % When one of the following systems is active, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Driving and parking 233 R Variable limiter Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 228). % Further information on speed adaptation (/ page 231). Function of Active Stop-and-Go Assist Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you when in traffic jams on multi-lane roads with separate roadways by automatically pulling away within up to 60 seconds and with moderate steering maneuvers. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in. Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 218). Active Stop-and-Go Assist activates automati‐ cally when all of the following conditions are met: R You are in a traffic jam on a freeway or highspeed major road. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted and active (/ page 228). R Active Steering Assist is activated and active (/ page 235). R You are traveling no faster than 35 mph (60 km/h). When Active Stop-and-Go Assist is active the ¬ status display appears in the driver display. System limits The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 233). Active Steering Assist Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer‐ ence. % Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec‐ essary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving away from the center of the lane. If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case. Permanent status display on the driver dis‐ play Ø Gray: activated and passive Ø Green: activated and active Ø Red, flashing: prompt to the driver to actively confirm or transition from active to passive status, system limit detected 234 Driving and parking % During the transition from active to passive status, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the Ø symbol is shown as gray on the driver display. Contact detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to inter‐ vene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time. time or has removed their hands from the steer‐ ing wheel, an optical warning is given first. Dis‐ play message 1 appears on the driver display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver does not react to this warning for a considerable period, an emergency stop is initi‐ ated (/ page 235). The warning is not issued or is stopped as soon as the system detects that the driver has touched the steering wheel. Touch detection may be limited or inoperative in the following situations: R The driver is wearing gloves. R There is a steering wheel cover on the steer‐ ing wheel. If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 218). System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor‐ que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R Insufficient road illumination. R The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. R No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or at intersections. Driving and parking 235 R R R R The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. The road is narrow and winding. There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers. The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On very tight curves and when turning. R When crossing intersections. R At roundabouts or toll plazas. R When actively changing lane without switch‐ ing on the turn signal indicator. R When the tire pressure is too low. & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func‐ tioning If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying atten‐ tion to traffic conditions. & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to traffic conditions. Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist Requirements: R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving # Select Ø Act. Steering Asst. . Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist Active Emergency Stop Assist uses touch sen‐ sors to monitor whether the driver holds the steering wheel and initiates an emergency stop if necessary. If Active Steering Assist is deactivated, the accelerator and brake pedal are monitored as well as the steering wheel. A warning is issued when the steering wheel is not being held or when a pedal is not depressed, and the vehicle is in danger of leaving the lane. 236 Driving and parking If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer‐ ing wheel, visual warning 1 is issued. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning mes‐ sage. Also observe the instructions on the contact detection of Active Steering Assist (/ page 233). Active Emergency Stop Assist issues the follow‐ ing warnings in order: R Display message 1 appears in the driver's display. R In addition to display 1 a warning tone sounds. R The Beginning Emergency Stop message appears on the driver display, a continuous warning tone sounds, the vehicle no longer accelerates, and there is a slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt. R The vehicle speed is reduced in increments until it is at a standstill. Sharp brake impul‐ ses are also produced. Depending on the country, a lane change to the adjacent right-hand lane is carried out, if possi‐ ble. % It is only possible to change across one lane and only into the right-hand lane, and not onto the hard shoulder. When automatic braking is initiated, Active Dis‐ tance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Depend‐ ing on the country, the hazard warning light sys‐ tem is switched on. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐ ing brake. R The vehicle is unlocked. R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. Before automatic braking is initiated, you can cancel Active Emergency Stop Assist by steer‐ ing. You can cancel the intervention by Active Emer‐ gency Stop Assist after automatic braking is ini‐ tiated by one of the following actions: R Accelerating or braking: the emergency stop is canceled, but the warning message, warn‐ ing tone and power steering remain active R Steering: power-assisted steering is can‐ celed, the warning message and warning tone remain active and the vehicle continues to be braked Driving and parking 237 % Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an emergency stop a maximum of three times within one ignition cycle. After this Active Steering Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are deactivated for that ignition cycle. System limits If Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect lane markings, Active Emergency Stop Assist is not active. For the detection of vehicles and other obsta‐ cles, observe the system limits of the following functions: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 226) R Active Steering Assist (/ page 233) R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 237) Active Lane Change Assist Function of Active Lane Change Assist Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes and is activated by indicat‐ ing briefly. Active Lane Change Assist is only an aid and not a substitute for your attention. It is essential that you observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility in the vehicle Operator's Manual; you may otherwise fail to recognize dan‐ gers. The following conditions must be fulfilled for a lane change: R You are on a highway or high-speed major road. R The vehicle speed is between approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h). R The neighboring lane is separated by a bro‐ ken lane marking. R No vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane. R Since the last time the vehicle was started, the sensors have detected a vehicle at a suit‐ able distance behind your vehicle. R Active Lane Change Assist is selected in the multimedia system. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are activated on highways. The system is not available and must be reacti‐ vated in the following situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist were already activated before entering the highway. R The system briefly does not detect the road you are on as a highway or a similar road, e.g. on a freeway intersection. As soon as Active Lane Change Assist detects a suitable road, you can reactivate it with J, M or N. 238 Driving and parking Driver display in the Assistance menu 1 Green arrow: lane change initiated 2 Red arrow: lane change canceled When Active Lane Change Assist is available, the ± display appears along with green arrows in the driver display. If the system has been activa‐ ted but is not currently available, the ± dis‐ play appears along with gray arrows in the driver display. If no vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adja‐ cent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins after the driver has indicated briefly. The lane change is shown to the driver with a flashing green arrow next to the ± steering wheel symbol. Green arrow 1 is dis‐ played in the appropriate adjacent lane in the Assistance menu in the driver display. The Lane Change to the Left message, for example, also appears. Active Lane Change Assist can be canceled in various situations, including the following: R Change in the surrounding conditions (e.g. detected obstacle). R The driver removes their hands from the steering wheel. R The driver steers with too much force or in the opposite direction. R The driver moves the turn signal indicator in the opposite direction. R R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active Steering Assist is deactivated. The vehicle cannot make the lane change as planned. Cancellation of Active Lane Change Assist is dis‐ played as follows: R The arrow in the selected direction of travel turns red. R A corresponding message appears on the driver display. R In certain circumstances a warning tone sounds. & WARNING Risk of accident when chang‐ ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. # Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users. Driving and parking 239 # Monitor the lane change. & WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops func‐ tioning If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guar‐ antee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque. # Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R R R R R R R R R Due to insufficient illumination of the road, or if the exterior lighting indicates a malfunc‐ tion. The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. The sensors are damaged, covered or dirty. No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or intersections. The system does not detect a suitable road, for example, in tight curves or shortly after an access road. The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers. When the tire pressure is too low. Also observe the system limits of Active Steering Assist and the information on vehicle sensors and cameras in the vehicle Operator's Manual. % The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process, and no arrows are dis‐ played next to the Ø Active Steering Assist symbol. Selecting Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving # Select the function. Active Brake Assist Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function 240 Driving and parking R R R Autonomous braking function Situation-dependent braking assistance Evasive Steering Assist (country-specific) Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐ sion, a warning tone sounds and the L dis‐ tance warning lamp lights up. In the Assistance menu, an insufficient distance 1 to the vehicle in front is displayed in red. If you further reduce the distance, the vehicle in front is also highlighted in red. When the system detects a risk of collision, red radar waves 2 appear in front of the vehicle. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt. % Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning Support is activated, the Active Brake Assist warning is also accompanied by ambient lighting (/ page 166). If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can also initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warn‐ ing tone occur simultaneously with the braking application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa‐ tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak‐ ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max‐ imum full-stop braking if necessary. If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, pop up 1 appears in the driver display and then automati‐ cally goes out after a short time. If the autonomous braking function or the situa‐ tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated. Driving and parking 241 & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa‐ tions. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: R Give a warning or brake without reason R Not give a warning or not brake Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐ essary. % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, æ appears in the driver display. If the system is unavailable or the functions are restricted, Ä appears. Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist. The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges: The distance warning function issues a warning in the following situations: R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the driver display. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated ten‐ sioning of the seat belt. If possible, brake immediately or maneuver to avoid the obstacle. Distance warning function The distance warning function can assist you by means of an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi‐ cles, pedestrians and cyclists. R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists. 242 Driving and parking Autonomous braking function The autonomous braking function can intervene from speeds of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h): R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi‐ cles, pedestrians and cyclists. R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists. Situation-dependent braking assistance Situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from speeds of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h): R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi‐ cles, pedestrians and cyclists. R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists. Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown. R Releasing the brake pedal. Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli‐ cation when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle R There is no longer a risk of collision R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle Reaction to oncoming road users Active Brake Assist can also react to detected oncoming road users: R Reaction up to speeds of approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) R Warning for oncoming road users through acoustic warning and warning lamp Driving and parking 243 R Autonomous braking application in order to reduce the severity of an accident Evasive Steering Assist & WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva‐ sive Steering Assist Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog‐ nize objects or complex traffic situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐ essary. # End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations. # Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle. Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac‐ teristics: R Detection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehi‐ cles. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving maneuver. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving maneuver. R Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle. R Reaction from a speed of approximately 13 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx‐ imately 68 mph (110 km/h). The steering support of Evasive Steering Assist can be canceled at any time by counter steering. System limits Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off. If the system is unavailable or the functions are restricted, the Ä warning lamp appears in the driver's display. The system may be impaired or may not func‐ tion, particularly in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered (/ page 218). R If the sensors are impaired due to interfer‐ ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in parking garages. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has been detected and displayed. R In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified. R If pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range. R If road users are hidden by other objects or are located close to other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian or cyclist cannot be distinguished from the back‐ ground. 244 Driving and parking R R R If a pedestrian or cyclist is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened. On curves with a tight radius. % The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto‐ matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in proc‐ ess. Setting Active Brake Assist Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Avoid collision 5 Active Brake Assist # Select the desired setting. The setting is retained when the engine is next started. Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated. # Select Off. The distance warning function, the autono‐ mous braking function and the Evasive Steer‐ ing Assist are deactivated. When the engine is next started, the medium setting is automatically selected. % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display. Traffic Sign Assist Function of Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the multifunction camera and compares this with information in the digital navigation map. It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions on the driver display and on the Head-up Display. The system can issue a warning when you exceed the maximum permissible speed. In some countries, the system can provide you with further functions and can warn you when you are approaching pedestrian crossings or when you are about to drive past stop signs or red lights unintentionally. The camera also detects and analyzes traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). Traffic Sign Assist only visualizes selected signs on the driver display. Actual traffic signs and speed limits have priority over traffic signs and speed limits shown on the driver display. Also observe the following information: R Select a speed adapted to the traffic, sur‐ roundings and weather conditions R Observe actual traffic signs R Observe applicable traffic rules and regula‐ tions Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 218). Driving and parking 245 Messages on the driver display 1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction The system can show up to two traffic signs on the driver display simultaneously. The system always prioritizes displaying speed limits. Up to one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed can be shown on the Head-up Display. If two speed signs are shown on the driver display, for example, when speed limits are detected, the value of left-hand speed limit 1 is transmitted to the limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for adoption and is shown on the Head-up Display. Examples of traffic signs which can be displayed Traffic Sign Assist can detect and display follow‐ ing traffic signs 1: R Speed limits R End of the speed limit R Overtaking restrictions R Play streets R Signs showing the start or end of highways R Signs showing the start or end of express‐ ways R Recommended speeds Traffic Sign Assist can detect following addi‐ tional signs 3 and, if necessary, analyze the relevance of the restrictions using other vehicle sensors: R When wet R Slippery road surfaces R In fog R Temporary restrictions R Exits R Restrictions for vehicle/trailer combinations Traffic Sign Assist also uses data from the digital street map in the navigation system. When you leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on a freeway exit or access road for example, or after you turn at an intersection, the display on the driver display can thus be updated without a traffic sign having been detected. In addition, the system can display speed limits ahead on the driver display and the Head-up Dis‐ play. The driver display can also show the dis‐ tance to an upcoming lower limit speed. For this 246 Driving and parking purpose, information from the digital road map of the navigation system is used. Depending on the current situation and the assumed route, the display message is shown up to 380 yds (350 m) in advance. The Assistance menu can also dis‐ play a dynamic visualization of the speed limits ahead. If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the cur‐ rently applicable maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears on the driver display: Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun‐ tries. If the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not supported, this is displayed continuously. % Also observe the information on display mes‐ sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 503). Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can set the warning to visual only (the traffic sign flashes three times on the driver display) or visual and acoustic, including a warning tone. Additional functions of Traffic Sign Assist (country-specific) Warning for no-entry signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you if you drive the wrong way down a section of road, for example on freeway access roads or one-way streets. Warning at pedestrian crossings: If you approach pedestrian crossings, provided that pedestrians are in the danger zone or are moving towards it, Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h). Warning at stop signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) if you are about to drive past a stop sign unintentionally. For this to be possible, the signs must be clear, for example if the system detects more than one stop sign, or a stop sign can be confirmed using the digital navigation map. No warning can be issued if several differ‐ ent signs are detected. Warning at red lights: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) if you are about to drive through a red light unintentionally. The following conditions must be fulfilled: R Several traffic lights have been detected. R All traffic lights detected are red. R At least one of the red traffic lights detected is on the front passenger side beside the vehicle's own lane. R The traffic lights are in the following sequence (from top to bottom): red, yellow, green. Driving and parking 247 % If the function is available, you can activate or deactivate the warnings at pedestrian crossings, stop signs and red lights in the Traffic Sign Assist menu under Further Warnings (/ page 247). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illu‐ mination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐ tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐ ged up, damaged or covered. R If traffic signs are difficult to detect, e.g. because they are dirty, covered, faded, cov‐ ered with ice, damaged, badly positioned, poorly lit or twisted. R R R R R R R Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly or at all due to techni‐ cal factors, such as transmission frequency. If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect, incomplete or out of date. If signs or the road layout is ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs in roadworks, at exits and ramps, in neighboring lanes or parallel roads. If signs do not conform to the standard. If signs or road layouts are specific to the country and deviate from the route guidance in the navigation system, e.g. at or beyond construction sites. After sharp turns and tight curves, when traf‐ fic signs are outside the camera's field of vision. If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs which are affixed or attached to them. Setting Traffic Sign Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist Activating or deactivating the speed warning # Activate or deactivate Speed Limit Warning. Setting the type of warning # Select ´ next to Speed Limit Warning. # Select Visual & Audible or Visual. Setting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold. Activating or deactivating further functions of Traffic Sign Assist # Activate or deactivate Further Warnings. The available functions are activated or deac‐ tivated. 248 Driving and parking Setting the type of warning for further func‐ tions # Select ´ next to Further Warnings. # Select Visual & Audible or Visual. Traffic light view Information about the traffic light view The traffic light view supports the driver when waiting in front of a red light by displaying the camera image on the central display. The cam‐ era image is displayed when the driver is the first vehicle in front of the red light and faded out when the vehicle drives off. Displaying traffic light view Requirements: R The Traffic Light View option is switched on. R A traffic light view is available. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Light View % This function is not available in all countries. If the vehicle is in first position at a traffic light, the camera image with traffic light view is shown in the central display. When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is faded out. # Activate D or deactivate E Traffic Light View. Using other available functions Select Z. # Select On Request or Automatic. If On Request is set and a traffic light view is available, the Tap Here for Traffic Light View message is displayed. The camera image is shown after confirmation of the message. When Automatic is set, the camera image is automatically displayed when the traffic light view is available. # Overview of the traffic light data service & WARNING Risk of an accident or injury due to distraction, incorrect or missing data The traffic light information display is an aid and cannot replace the observation of the actual driving situation. # Keep the actual traffic situation con‐ stantly in view when approaching a traf‐ fic light and when changing lanes. # Avoid prolonged viewing of the Instru‐ ment Display and Head-up Display. The traffic lights and countdown of remaining time 1 until the next green phase are shown in the driver display. Driving and parking 249 Example representation in the driver display The display is hidden about five seconds before the traffic lights change to green. % The display also goes out in the following cases: R When turning off before the intersection into a cross or side street R When turning before the intersection % The direction arrows are displayed depend‐ ing on the following functions: R A turn signal is set R A lane is recommended during active route guidance If neither function is active, the remaining time until the next green phase for the lane straight ahead is displayed. % Use of the traffic light information service requires the regular transmission of vehicle positions and driving directions to Mercedes-Benz. The data is immediately anonymised by Mercedes-Benz and forwar‐ ded to the provider of the traffic light infor‐ mation service. The vehicle positions and driving directions are deleted after a very short time (a few seconds) and are not per‐ manently saved. If you do not want to transmit the vehicle positions and driving directions, you have the following options: R You deactivate the service in the Mercedes me portal. R You have the service deactivated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. % This traffic light data service is only available in certain cities and regions. The function is supported under the following conditions: R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia system featuring navigation and a communi‐ cation module with an activated, integrated SIM card. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle has been connected with the user account. R The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R The traffic light data service is within the scope of the navigation service. The current vehicle position and the direction of travel are transmitted via the communication module and aligned with the data from the traf‐ fic light data service provider. The provider gath‐ ers data from traffic lights which transmit their changing phases. When the vehicle approaches an intersection with networked traffic lights, data is transmitted to the vehicle. 250 Driving and parking A set turn signal left or right and lane recom‐ mendations during active route guidance are taken into account for the display. The service is for information purposes only and is not linked to any other vehicle functions, sys‐ tems or components. Please note that the dis‐ played data is not available in all traffic areas and may be incorrect. Certain light signal systems automatically adapt their switching times to the current traffic situa‐ tion. This can lead to a sudden change in the countdown display. The driver display is shown after selecting the Assistance menu. If another menu is selected, the traffic light countdown is not displayed. Also observe the following information: R Select a speed adapted to the traffic, sur‐ roundings and weather conditions R Observe actual traffic signs R Observe applicable traffic rules and regula‐ tions Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers. System limits The display does not appear in the following sit‐ uations, for example: R There is no traffic light data available. R The time remaining until the next green phase is less than ten seconds. R Emergency vehicles or local public transport are located in the vicinity of the intersection. R The data transmission from the vehicle has been interrupted. R Light signal systems are located in a con‐ struction site area or are being maintained. R The light signal system is malfunctioning. R The subscription to the service has expired. Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Function of Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and 10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle. The system can detect vehicles traveling from speeds of approximately 8 mph (12 km/h) and issue a warning if they move into the monitoring range. Status display in the driver's display ¸ Gray: the system is activated but inopera‐ tive. ¸ Green: the system is activated and opera‐ tional. Driving and parking 251 Driver display in the Assistance menu If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range, the red warning lamp lights up in the cor‐ responding outside mirror. In the Assistance menu, the lamp in outside mirror 1 also lights up red, and the lane in which the vehicle is detected is hatched out. If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a warning tone sounds twice and the warning lamp flashes red in the respective outside mirror. Red radar waves 2 are displayed next to your vehicle in the Assis‐ tance graphic. If the turn signal indicator remains on, the dis‐ play in the outside mirror flashes for all other detected vehicles, but no further warning tone sounds. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given. % Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning Support is activated, the Active Blind Spot Assist warning is also accompa‐ nied by ambient lighting (/ page 166). Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 218). & WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the following: R if you overtake a vehicle too closely so that it is in the blind spot area R if vehicles traveling at a much faster speed approach and then overtake Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warn‐ ings or intervene in such situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐ tance at the side of the vehicle. Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Active Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants attempting to leave the stationary vehicle about approaching vehicles. & WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clear‐ ance. 252 Driving and parking If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range, the red warning lamp lights up in the corre‐ sponding outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant pulls the door handle on the side of the warning, a warning tone sounds twice and the ambient lighting in the respective door and the warning lamps in the correspond‐ ing outside mirror flash red. Vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant: the visual warning begins as soon as the hand of a vehicle occupant moves in to the area of the door. % Vehicles with ambient lighting or active ambient lighting: theWarning Support of the ambient lighting can be activated and deactivated (/ page 166). % The warning assistance can differ depending on the equipment and may vary according to the setting. The exit warning is only available when Active Blind Spot Assist is activated and up to a maxi‐ mum of three minutes after the ignition has been switched off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi‐ tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi‐ cle occupants. System limits Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the fol‐ lowing situations, in particular: R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured R In poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow R If there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes R If the road has very wide or narrow lanes R If vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is suffi‐ cient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving along‐ side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro‐ longed time. Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. Additionally, the exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R When the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces R When people approach the vehicle R In the event of stationary or slowly moving objects Function of the brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor‐ recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is availa‐ ble in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h). Driving and parking 253 & WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐ tance at the side of the vehicle. A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐ self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a coursecorrecting brake application. # Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. & WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist Active Blind Spot Assist does not react in the following situations: R If you overtake vehicles at a high speed. R If vehicles approach and overtake you at a greatly different speed. Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warn‐ ings or intervene in such situations. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir‐ ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis‐ play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the driver's display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro‐ priate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. System limits Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur especially in the following situa‐ tions: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist. R ESP® is deactivated. R A loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is detected. 254 Driving and parking Activating/deactivating Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision Avoidance 5 Active Blind Spot Assist # Select Active Blind Spot Assist. # Select On or Off. Active Lane Keeping Assist Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunc‐ tion camera (/ page 218) and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. The system can guide you back into your lane through a course-correcting steering interven‐ tion and additionally warns you with vibration pulses in the steering wheel. Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). The system can intervene in the following situa‐ tions: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking. R One of your front wheels goes over a lane marking. If you activate the turn signal indicator, a steer‐ ing intervention does not occur on the corre‐ sponding side. If the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, a steering intervention occurs regardless of the turn signal indicator. If you leave the lane without activating the turn signal indicator, but danger of a collision with a moving obstacle is detected in your lane, a steering intervention does not occur. Display 1 will appear in the driver display and a warning tone will sound in the following situa‐ tions: R A steering intervention by Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist lasts longer than approximately ten seconds. R The system carries out two or more steering interventions within approximately three minutes without any steering intervention from the driver. In the Active Lane Keeping Assist settings, you can set the sensitivity of the system and set the level of support. Additionally, you can set whether the system should react to discontinu‐ Driving and parking 255 ous lane markings or only continuous lane mark‐ ings (/ page 256). Status displays for Active Lane Keeping Assist ï White: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. ï Yellow: there is a malfunction. Please also observe the display messages. ð Gray: Active Lane Keeping Assist is acti‐ vated, but not operating. ð Green: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated and operating. If the system is operational on only one side, the lane marking is shown in green on the corre‐ sponding side. ð Red: Active Lane Keeping Assist has gui‐ ded you back into your lane with a course-correcting steering intervention. The status display will flash if there is also a haptic warning in the steering wheel. The lane marking is shown in red only on the side for which there is a warning. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: if both lane markings are simultaneously shown in red in the status display, Active Lane Keeping Assist has initiated an emergency stop (/ page 235). Active Lane Change Assist display in the "Assistance" menu If the front wheel of the vehicle drives over a detected lane marking, this will be highlighted red in the Assistance menu in the driver's dis‐ play. % Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning Support is activated, the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning is also accom‐ panied by ambient lighting (/ page 166). System limits In the following situations, no lane-correcting steering intervention occurs but rather a warning in the steering wheel, depending on the situa‐ tion: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel‐ erate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel‐ eration. R When ESP® is deactivated. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has been detected and displayed. 256 Driving and parking The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐ tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐ ged up, damaged or covered. R If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov‐ ered. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R If the road is very narrow and winding. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 218). Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Avoid collision 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Switch the function on or off. Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be activated and deactivated in the Favorites menu. % After starting the engine, the settings are country-specific. Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Avoid collision 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist Setting the sensitivity # Select ´. # Select Early, Med. or Late. The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the engine is started. % The standard setting for this function is dependent on the country. Activating or deactivating assistance on dis‐ continuous lane markings # Select Advanced Support. The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the engine is started. % The standard setting for this function is dependent on the country. % This function must be activated in vehicles without Driving Assistance Package, so that Emergency Stop Assist is fully available. Further information on Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 235) AIRMATIC Function of AIRMATIC AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with varia‐ ble damping for improved driving comfort. The Driving and parking 257 all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clear‐ ance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con‐ sumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level. AIRMATIC includes the following components and functions: R Air suspension with automatic all-round level control R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption R Increased vehicle level for greater ground clearance, selected via the multimedia sys‐ tem R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment) Suspension setting depending on the drive program Drive program C and B: R The suspension setting is firmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R R The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low level -1. Drive program A and ;: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R The vehicle is lowered to low level -1 when driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). R The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h). R When driving at speeds below 75 mph (120 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low level -1. R When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to the normal level. Setting the vehicle level & WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering. # Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions. & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐ cle lowering When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. 258 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehi‐ cle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked. # When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody. * NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered. # Make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered. Requirements: R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle is not moving faster than 37 mph (60 km/h). R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/ bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 ß 5 y Raising the vehicle Select t. The indicator lamp lights up continuously. The vehicle is raised to off-road level +1. # Your selection is saved. The off-road level +1 set remains stored even after the ignition has been switched off. The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit‐ uations: R When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). R When driving briefly between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h). R R After selecting a different drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. In this case, the vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/ bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h). Lowering the vehicle # Select t. The indicator lamp goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. % In the Sport drive program, only the normal vehicle level is possible when the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack). E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Function of E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is an electrohydraulic suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible sus‐ Driving and parking 259 pension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driv‐ ing safety and to reduce fuel consumption. The suspension setting is adjusted depending on the road surface, vehicle load and the drive program selected. The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function detects areas of unevenness in the road before you drive over them by means of a multifunction camera. This reduces chassis movements. The damping is adjusted individually to each wheel and depends on the following factors: R Driving style, e.g. sporty R Road condition, e.g. bumps R Drive program E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is comprised of the following functions and components: R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: ROAD SURFACE SCAN R Curve inclination function CURVE R Air suspension with automatic level control R R R R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption ADS PLUS: Adaptive Damping System with constant adjustment of damping characteris‐ tics DYNAMIC SELECT button for selecting a drive program (/ page 202) Manual level adjustment via the multimedia system Drive program C and B R The suspension setting is firmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above approx. 75 mph (120 km/h). R When driving at speeds below approx. 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low level -1. R ROAD SURFACE SCAN is active. Drive program A, N and ; The suspension setting is comfortable. R R R R R R R R The vehicle is set to the normal level. The vehicle is lowered to low level -1 when driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h). When driving at speeds below 75 mph (120 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low level -1. When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to the normal level. A and N: ROAD SURFACE SCAN is active. N: the curve inclination function is active. % Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if the electrical connection has been correctly established, the vehicle, irrespective of speed or the drive program selected, is not automatically lowered or raised but rather remains at normal level. 260 Driving and parking Function of ROAD SURFACE SCAN % This function is not available in all countries. The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitors the road in front of your vehicle using a multifunc‐ tion camera (/ page 218). ROAD SURFACE SCAN detects unevenness in the road surface, e.g. bumps, before the vehicle drives over them. Chassis movements are reduced and driving comfort is increased. ROAD SURFACE SCAN is automatically activated if the following conditions are met: R Drive program ; is not selected. R No raised vehicle level is set. R You are driving at a speed between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). System limits ROAD SURFACE SCAN can be impaired in the following situations or can stop functioning: R If the road is insufficiently lit, e.g. at night. R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R R R R R If the windshield in the area of multifunction camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or cov‐ ered. If the road surface has no optic structure or reflects light. If you are driving too close to the vehicle in front. If sections of the route have a very small radius of curvature. During abrupt driving maneuver, e.g. heavy braking or sudden acceleration. Observe the notes on cleaning the multifunction camera (/ page 346). Setting the vehicle level & WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering. # Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions. & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐ cle lowering When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehi‐ cle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards. Driving and parking 261 You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked. # When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody. * NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered. # Make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered. Requirements: R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle is not moving faster than 37 mph (60 km/h). R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/ bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 ß 5 y Raising the vehicle Select t. The indicator lamp lights up continuously. The vehicle is raised to off-road level +1. # Your selection is saved. The off-road level +1 set remains stored even after the ignition has been switched off. The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit‐ uations: R When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). R When driving briefly between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h). R After selecting a different drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. In this case, the vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/ bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h). Lowering the vehicle # Select t. The indicator lamp goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. % In the Sport drive program, only the normal vehicle level is possible when the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack). Rear view camera Function of the rear view camera The rear view camera monitors the area behind your vehicle. When you engage reverse gear, the image from the rear view camera is automati‐ cally shown on the central display. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the 262 Driving and parking maneuvering area while maneuvering and park‐ ing. % The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mir‐ ror. 3 Wide-angle view 4 Activates/deactivates Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 271) 5 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 268) 6 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area 7 Path marking the course the tires will take with the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 8 Driven surface depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 9 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area % When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes 7 are displayed in green (/ page 271). Camera Views menu (top view) 1 Parking Assistance menu 2 Rear view camera with top view Wide-angle view System limits If the system is not ready for operation, the System Inoperative message appears on the central display. Driving and parking 263 The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). R The trunk lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if light is shining into the camera. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐ ged up. Observe the notes on cleaning the rear view camera (/ page 346). R The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam‐ aged. In this case, have the camera and its position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. R The detection range is limited by additional vehicle attachments at the rear, such as a license plate bracket or bicycle rack. Also observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 218). % Do not use the rear view camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. % The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. 360° camera Function of the surround view camera The surround view camera is a system that con‐ sists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The cameras assist you when you are parking, for example, or at exits with reduced visibility. The surround view camera includes the following cameras and evaluates their images: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors The cameras are only an aid and may show a dis‐ torted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. They are not a substi‐ tute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneu‐ vering area while maneuvering and parking. 264 Driving and parking Menu overview Camera Views 7 To activate/deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 271) 8 To set the GPS activation point (/ page 267) 9 To switch between standard and wide-angle view Function of the guide lines % In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display is shown (/ page 268). 1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1 Menu Parking Assistance 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with image from the rear view cam‐ era 4 3D view, left-hand side of the vehicle 5 3D view, right-hand side of the vehicle 6 3D auto view 1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area 2 Path marking the course the tires will take with the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 3 Driven surface depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area Driving and parking 265 % When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes and guide lines are displayed in green instead of yellow (/ page 271). Top view with image from the front or rear view camera If the function is activated, the image from the rear view camera is automatically displayed on the central display when reverse gear is selec‐ ted . 3D view, left/right-hand side of the vehicle * NOTE Risk of accident due to objects being severely distorted in the display or not displayed at all Due to the projection of the cameras, objects in the 3D views may be severely dis‐ torted when displayed or not displayed at all. # Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the maneu‐ vering area while maneuvering and parking. 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 268) In the 3D view, left-/right-hand side of the vehi‐ cle, the virtual camera moves to the respective side of the vehicle. When you change the trans‐ mission position, the view is automatically adap‐ ted. 1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 268) 2 Your vehicle from above 3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle 3D auto view % The area behind the vehicle is not displayed as a mirror image as is usual in the 3D views. 266 Driving and parking Wide-angle view 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 268) 2 Guide lines In the 3D auto view, the virtual camera moves to the standard perspective, facing forward from the rear above the roof. The view changes auto‐ matically when approaching obstacles. If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes to 3D view with free rotation. You can turn, tilt and zoom the views by touch. 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 268) 2 To switch between standard and wide-angle view System limits If the system is not ready for operation, the System Inoperative message appears on the central display. The surround view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situa‐ tions: R You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). R The doors are open. R An outside mirror is not completely folded out. R The trunk lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if light is shining into the camera. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐ ged up. R If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. Driving and parking 267 % Do not use the surround view camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to addi‐ tional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket, bicycle rack). % The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. See the notes on cleaning the surround view camera (/ page 346). Calling up the surround view camera views using the button Selecting a view for the surround view cam‐ era (reverse gear) # Engage reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 263). Surround view camera with GPS - managing activation positions Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera # # # Press button 1. Select the Camera Views menu. In the multimedia system, select the desired view (/ page 263). Renaming an activation position % You can determine activation positions in the Camera Views menu. (/ page 263) # Select an activation position. # Select ´. # Enter a name and confirm. The activation position is saved under the new name. Deleting an activation position # Select Manage Activation Positions. # Select an activation position. 268 Driving and parking # # Select E. Confirm the prompt. The activation position is deleted. Opening the camera cover of the rear view camera Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera # Select Open Camera Cover. % The camera cover closes automatically after some time or after an ignition cycle. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the distance between the vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. These must be detected beforehand by the sensors in the front or rear bumper while driving by them. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. The passive side impact protection can be activated and deactivated via the multimedia system. In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a dis‐ tance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled one vehicle length, obsta‐ cles on all sides can be shown. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐ roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver‐ ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces. Messages on the central display Vehicles with surround view camera Vehicles with rear view camera Driving and parking 269 As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera‐ tional, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue. 1 Operational, front and rear 2 Operational, all around 3 Operational, all around and obstacle detec‐ ted ting, the system warns you from a distance of 3.3 ft (1 m), in the standard setting only from 1.2 ft (0.4 m). The color of the display changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: > 3.3 ft (1 m) (no obstacles detected) R Yellow: approx. 3.3 ft (1 m) - 2.2 ft (0.7 m) R Orange: approx. 2.2 ft (0.7 m) - 1.2 ft (0.4 m) R Red: < 1.2 ft (0.4 m) Vehicles with surround view camera: the boundary line shifts dynamically depending on the position and distance of the obstacles detec‐ ted. Depending on the distance to the obstacle detected, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia system. In the Warn Early set‐ Vehicles with rear view camera Vehicles with surround view camera If you are not in the Camera & Parking menu and an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected, under the following conditions pop-up window 1 appears on the driver display: R Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than 8 mph (12 km/h). 270 Driving and parking R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than 11 mph (18 km/h). R R R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks. Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehi‐ cle from the side. Objects placed next to the vehicle. Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the fol‐ lowing situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch off the igni‐ tion. R You open the doors. Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front 2 and 2.2 ft (0.7 m) on sides 3 can also be displayed on the Head-up Display. System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa‐ rily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects. After the engine is restarted, obstacles must be detected again by driving past them before a new warning can be issued. Also observe the system limits of the following systems: R Rear view camera (/ page 261) R Surround view camera (/ page 263) Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; the system otherwise cannot function properly (/ page 218). Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three seconds and then goes out, and the é symbol appears on the driver display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may have been deactivated due to signal interfer‐ ence. Start the vehicle again and check if Park‐ ing Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location. If a warning tone also sounds, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 346). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving and parking 271 Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC * NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi‐ cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth‐ erwise be damaged. Requirements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears. # Tap = in the central display. If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not lit or the é symbol appears in the instru‐ ment cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the engine is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu. Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking Setting the volume or pitch of the warning tones # Set the desired level under Volume or Tone Pitch. Activating/deactivating audio fadeout Activate or deactivate Audio Fadeout. The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced during a Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tone. or # # Switch Audio Fadeout When in R on or off. The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced when reverse gear is engaged. Setting the time of the warnings # Select Time of Warning. # Set the time for the warning. Active Parking Assist Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the rear view camera and sur‐ round view camera. When you are driving for‐ wards up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist offers the following func‐ tions: Vehicles with rear view camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road 272 Driving and parking R Backing up into parking spaces perpendicu‐ lar to the road Vehicles with surround view camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the road (optionally either forwards or reverse) R Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such due to markings (for exam‐ ple at the roadside) R Exiting a parking space parallel to the road R Exiting a parking space perpendicular to the road (optionally either left or right) Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. If Active Parking Assist is available, the Ç message appears on the driver display. When the system detects parking spaces, È appears. The arrows show on which side of the road free parking spaces are located. These are then shown on the central display. When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the cal‐ culated path of your vehicle. When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the proce‐ dure is assisted by acceleration, braking, steer‐ ing and gear changes. To start the parking procedure, press the c button (/ page 273). Active Parking Assist will be canceled in the fol‐ lowing situations: R You deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. R You press the c button again. R You begin steering. R You engage transmission position j. R ESP® intervenes. R You open the driver's door. System limits If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available. Also observe the system limits of the following systems: R Rear view camera (/ page 261) R Surround view camera (/ page 263) Objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist, such as over‐ hanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or the borders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely or brake too late. Certain environmental conditions, such as snow‐ fall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. Driving and parking 273 & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. This could cause a collision. In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. # Active Parking Assist can also display unsuitable parking spaces, e.g. parking spaces in which parking is not permitted or parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain. R R R R R R R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient. When snow chains are installed. Directly after a tire change or when spare tires are installed. If the tire pressure is too low or too high. If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. after bottoming out on a curb. On steep inclines of more than approximately 15%. Parking with Active Parking Assist # Press button 1. 274 Driving and parking # # Vehicles with surround view camera: to change the parking direction, tap the selec‐ ted parking space again. To start the parking procedure: press but‐ ton 1 again. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space. The turn signal indicator is switched on automat‐ ically when the parking procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indi‐ cator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. # Select Parking Assistance menu 2. Parking spaces 3 detected by the system are shown on the central display. When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle path 4 into currently selected parking space 5 also appears. # If parking spaces are displayed: bring the vehicle to a standstill. # If necessary, select another parking space. & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐ cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. Driving and parking 275 # # Pay attention to objects and other road users. Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. On completion of the parking procedure, the Active Parking Assist Finished: Take Control of Vehicle display message appears. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb. % You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro‐ cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa‐ ble, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be can‐ celed. Immediate parking from the camera view Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist Requirements: R The vehicle is equipped with a surround view camera. R The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist. # # Select the Camera Views menu. When the vehicle is stationary and the trans‐ mission is position k, and the m symbol 6 appears in the camera image: press the m symbol 6 on the side on which you wish to park. The parking procedure is initiated in the direction selected. % The parking space and parking direction can‐ not be changed in immediate parking. % This function can be deactivated in the Parking menu. # # Start the vehicle. Press button 1. 276 Driving and parking # # # # Select Parking Assistance menu 2. If necessary, change direction of exit 3. To start exiting the parking space: press button 1 again. If necessary, change the transmission posi‐ tion. Observe any messages displayed on the driver display and central display. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when exiting a parking space begins and switched off when it is completed. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If nec‐ essary, select the turn signal indicator accord‐ ingly. After the parking space has been exited, a warn‐ ing tone and the Ø Active Parking Assist Finished: Take Control of Vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear your‐ self again. If you do not react to the prompt to take control of the vehicle, the system will brake the vehicle to a standstill. Pausing Active Parking Assist You can interrupt the parking or exiting proce‐ dure of Active Parking Assist by one of the fol‐ lowing actions, for example: # Depressing the brake pedal # Opening the front passenger door, a rear door, the trunk or the hood Applying the electric parking brake or acti‐ vating the HOLD function # To resume the parking or exiting proce‐ dure: gently depress the accelerator pedal. % If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start the parking or exiting procedure. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no lon‐ ger in the maneuvering range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist. # Automatic braking function of Active Parking Assist Persons or objects detected in the maneuvering range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exiting procedure is resumed. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no lon‐ Driving and parking 277 ger in the maneuvering range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist. R Maneuvering assistance R Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If the system detects an obstacle in the direction of travel, the vehi‐ cle's speed is briefly reduced to approximately 1 mph (2 km/h). A risk of collision may arise in the following sit‐ uations, for example: R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake pedals. R If the driver engages an incorrect gear. R If the driver depresses the accelerator pedal with too much force. Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If the vehicle was stationary and the trans‐ mission position was changed to k or h. If the vehicle has rolled less than approx‐ imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) since being at a stand‐ still. If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m) away. The Drive-away Assist can be deactivated or activated in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 279). If a critical situation is detected, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & Parking menu: % If Drive Away Assist is not available, the same symbol appears in gray. If the Camera & Parking menu is not opened on the central display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear. Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub‐ stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden‐ tify objects and traffic situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec‐ essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva‐ sive action. System limits The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 271). On uphill gradients, the performance of Drive Away Assist is restricted. Function of cross traffic warning The cross traffic warning can warn you of cross‐ ing traffic when you are exiting a parking space. 278 Driving and parking The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. The cross traffic warning is active under the fol‐ lowing conditions: R Warning for Cross Traffic, Rear: the vehicle is driving in reverse at a speed slower than approx. 6 mph (10 km/h). R Warning for Cross Traffic, Front: the vehicle is driving forwards at a speed slower than approx. 6 mph (10 km/h) and the camera image is shown on the central display (/ page 267). The Warning for Cross Traffic, Front can be deactivated or activated in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 279). If a critical situation is detected, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & Parking menu: Warning for Cross Traffic, Rear: the vehicle can be automatically braked if cross traffic is detec‐ ted. % If the cross traffic warning is not available, the L symbol appears in gray. If the Camera & Parking menu is not opened on the central display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear. The cross traffic warning is only an aid and not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of the cross traffic warning The cross traffic warning cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on the cross traffic warning alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec‐ essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva‐ sive action. System limits The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 271). If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. In the following situations, the cross traffic warn‐ ing is not available: R On inclines Maneuvering brake function The maneuvering brake function can prevent col‐ lisions with pedestrians when the vehicle is backing up at slow speeds. If the rear view cam‐ era detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill. The maneuvering brake function can intervene under the following conditions: R The vehicle is backing up at a speed slower than 6 mph (10 km/h). Driving and parking 279 R The camera image is shown on the central display (/ page 267). You can activate and deactivate the maneuvering brake function in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 279). If the maneuvering brake function is triggered, the following symbol appears in red in the selec‐ ted view in the Camera & Parking menu: % If the maneuvering brake function is not available, the same symbol appears in gray. If the Camera & Parking menu is not opened on the central display, the symbol and popup of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear. The maneuvering brake function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐ roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver‐ ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the maneuvering brake function The maneuvering brake function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function. In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on the maneu‐ vering brake function alone. # Be ready to brake. System limits Observe the system limits of the following func‐ tions: R Active Parking Assist (/ page 271) R Surround view camera (/ page 263) R Rear view camera (/ page 261) The maneuvering brake function is not available in the following situations: R On inclines Activating/deactivating maneuvering assis‐ tance Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking # Select Maneuvering Assistance. # Activate or deactivate the desired maneuver‐ ing assistance. Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can lead to damage on the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys‐ tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Comply with the per‐ mitted towing methods (/ page 363) and the instructions for towing with both axles on the ground (/ page 364). 280 Driver display Notes on the driver display R & WARNING Risk of accident due to a driver display malfunction R If the driver display has failed or malfunc‐ tioned, the function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems are not visible. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The driver display shows basic information such as speed, engine speed, fuel level and coolant temperature. Additional functions available to you include the following: R Different menus, e.g. for assistance and navi‐ gation R R Status displays for the driving systems Display messages Indicator and warning lamps Information on Consumption and range The menu contents and settings can be individu‐ ally adjusted and set. Notes on the 3D driver display The 3D driver display enables a spatial represen‐ tation of the content of the driver display. It is a prerequisite that the driver be recorded by the driver camera. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The driver camera is deactivated or is not working. R The driver is outside the detection range of the driver camera. R The operating conditions are not in place, e.g. if the outside temperature is too low or too high. Operating the driver display & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat‐ ing the driver display. Driver display 281 Scrolling on the menu bar swiping with one finger. Confirm the selection by pressing the Touch Control. % To operate Touch Control 3 in the most effective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. You can also set the sensitivity of the Touch Control on the central display . # Briefly press main menu button 2. # Select a menu by swiping to the left or right on Touch Control 3. # Press Touch Control 3 to confirm. Menus on the driver display Notes on the menus on the driver display 1 Back button 2 Main menu button 3 Touch Control The content of the driver display is controlled using the control elements on the left side of the steering wheel. Touch Control 3 is used to navi‐ gate in a vertical and horizontal direction by & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat‐ ing the driver display. The following menus can be called up via the menu bar on the driver display: R Understated R Sport R Exclusive R Classic R Navigation R Assistance R Service In some of these menus, you can choose between different display content on the center display area. 282 Driver display In most of the menus, you can use Options to configure further settings for the menu-specific display content. % You can find further information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Operator's Manual. The following image shows an example of the context with augmented reality. 7 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. Active Head-up Display with navigation and aug‐ mented reality (10x5°) 8 Detected traffic signs (Traffic Sign Assist) Head-up Display Function of the Head-up Display The Head-up Display projects various content into the driver's field of vision, for example. You can use the Head-up Display menu bar to select different contexts, e.g.: R Minimal R Sport R Standard R Augmented reality R ECO display R Settings R Head-up Display on/off 1 Navigation instructions 2 Augmented reality navigation instructions 3 Navigation status displays, such as remain‐ ing distance to the destination, expected time of arrival 4 Active Lane Keeping Assist status 5 Steer Assist status 6 Current speed Distance Assist DISTRONIC) When you receive a call, the 6 Call Waiting message will appear on the Head-up Display and the driver display. System limits Visibility is particularly influenced by the follow‐ ing conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light R Wet road surfaces R Objects on the display cover R Polarization in sunglasses Function of the Head-up Display with aug‐ mented reality % Augmented reality is only available in con‐ nection with the 10x5° Head-up Display. Driver display 283 The Head-up Display with augmented reality projects content into the driver's field of vision, such as: R Information from and visualization of the nav‐ igation system R Information and visualization of the driver assistance systems, e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Information from the menus of the driver dis‐ play Head-up Display with augmented reality (example) 1 Marker of the detected vehicle in front (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) 2 Change-of-direction arrows for the route (navigation) 3 Status line for driver assistance systems The marker of the detected vehicle in front and the change-of-direction arrows for the route are dynamic displays. The vehicle marker stays with the vehicle in front, and Active Distance Assist regulates your speed based on this. The changeof-direction arrows point the way calculated by the navigation system. System limits The marker of the detected vehicle in front may be inaccurate or may not be applied to the cor‐ rect vehicle in some situations. Always pay attention to the actual driving situation. Route guidance with augmented reality is not available in some situations, e.g. in the event of poor satellite reception or roads that have not been digitized. Visibility is influenced by the following condi‐ tions: R Driver camera and multifunction camera recording R The extent to which the windshield in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured. Further system limits of the Head-up Display (/ page 282). 284 Driver display Operating the Head-up Display Selecting display content of the Head-up Dis‐ play via the menu bar of the driver display # Press the ò main menu button on the left. # To select the menu bar of the Head-up Display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. Switching between display contents on the Head-up Display # Swipe right or left on the left-hand Touch Control. The Head-up Display shows a preview of the selected display contents after each swipe. # Press the a button to confirm the desired content. Switching back to the driver display Press the G or ò button. # Setting the position and brightness On the menu bar of the Head-up Display, select Settings by swiping to the left or right. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. The current position and brightness settings will be displayed graphically on the Head-up Display as well as on the driver display. # To adjust the position: swipe up or down on the left-hand Touch Control. # To adjust the brightness: swipe to the right or left on the left-hand Touch Control. The settings configured for position and brightness will be saved automatically. # Press the G or a button to exit the settings. % Vehicles with augmented reality func‐ tion: when the position is adjusted, the sta‐ tus bar will be moved upward and the display area reduced. This may slightly affect the area on which the augmented reality content is displayed. # Selecting the Head-up Display with augmen‐ ted reality # # # Press the main menu button ò on the left. To select the menu bar of the Head-up Display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. To select the Head-up Display with aug‐ mented reality: swipe to the left or right on Driver display 285 the left-hand Touch Control to activate the desired content. Switching the Head-up Display on/off Driver display: 4 © Switching on Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Con‐ trol. Head-up Display will appear. # Press a on the left-hand Touch Control. # Switching off # Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Con‐ trol. # Select Head-up Display by swiping on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press a on the left-hand Touch Control. Setting the Head-up Display in the multime‐ dia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 ß 5 Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ Boost technology) y Switching the 3D display for the driver dis‐ play on or off # Select 3D Driver Display. The 3D display of the driver display is switched on or off. % The 3D display for the driver display is only activated when the driver camera detects the driver. Otherwise, the driver display switches from the 3D display to the 2D dis‐ play (/ page 280). Switching the Head-up Display on/off # Select Head-up Display. The Head-up Display is activated or deactiva‐ ted. 1 The area shows the electric drive support. 2 This area shows the recuperation behavior of the electric motor. õ shows the drive system's operational read‐ iness. % Due to various system limits, the displayed values may temporarily differ slightly from the actual value. 286 Driver display Overview of status displays on the driver display The status displays for the driving and driving safety systems can be found in areas 1 to 4. Y Pedestrian detection (only on assistant display) Ç Active Parking Assist is available (/ page 273) È Active Parking Assist has detected a park‐ ing space (/ page 273) é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 271) ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 226) Ò Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 226) æ Active Brake Assist switched off (/ page 244) Ä Active Brake Assist impaired or not func‐ tioning (/ page 244) Ø Active Steering Assist (/ page 233) ± Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 237) ð Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 254) Z Active Blind Spot Assist (only on assistant display) (/ page 252) ° Haptic accelerator pedal (/ page 199) è ECO start/stop function (/ page 198) ë HOLD function (/ page 223) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 161) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 163) ¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 233) Ò Slippery road surface warning Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 244) MBUX multimedia system 287 Overview and operation Notes on the MBUX multimedia system & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. * NOTE Increased surface temperature due to direct sunlight on the central dis‐ play Overview of the MBUX multimedia system The surface of the central display is very dark. If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the surface can become very hot. # If the central display has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool down before touching it for a long time. 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Expe‐ rience. • Operating Touch Control 2 Central display with touch functionality • Home screen overview • Operating the touchscreen 3 Control panel with fingerprint sensor ú, switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off Ü, switches the mute function on or off a and adjusts the volume ø 288 MBUX multimedia system Further operating options: Conducting a dialog with the MBUX Voice Assistant. R Operating functions contact-free with the MBUX Interior Assistant. The interaction then follows intelligently, reactively or with hand or head movements. R If the vehicle is equipped with a driver cam‐ era, functions can be triggered via "Look & Answer". Home screen overview R G Calls up previous menu © Calls up the home screen û Previous track or previous radio sta‐ tion ü Next track or next radio station Active call: display of the call duration % You can find further information about oper‐ ation as well as about applications and serv‐ ices in the Digital Operator's Manual. Anti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 7 Calls up applications 8 Quick-access to application 9 Global menu 1 Status line 2 Calls up user profile settings and switches 3 4 5 6 user Uses the global search Calls up the Control Center (pull down) Calls up favorites Displays in the status line In the image, the applications are arranged as a carousel. Pressing and holding on © arranges the applications in a grid. This presentation is also used by a smartphone, for example. The following functions are called up in the Con‐ trol Center: R Notifications Center R Content sharing menu R Favorites R Vehicle quick-access MBUX multimedia system 289 Content sharing menu 5 Rear displays with active content (cover dis‐ play) 6 MBUX rear tablet To share content, drag a display and drop it over another display. To control media playback, tap a display. 3 4 5 6 Operating the MBUX multimedia system Using Touch Control 7 8 Example: showing displays 1 Calls up a menu 2 Central display with active content (cover display) 3 Displays animation for content sharing 4 Ä Bluetooth® headphones connected to the right rear display 1 © Shows the home screen 2 Touch Control =9Ì: swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate) a Press (confirm) G Returns to the previous display 6 Makes or accepts a call ~ Rejects or ends a call Increase volume: swipe upwards Reduce volume: swipe down 8 Switch off the sound: press ß Calls up favourites (press briefly) or adds favourites (press and hold) £ Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant You can navigate through menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control 2 using a single-finger swipe, for example: # To enter a character: select a character using the keyboard and press on Touch Con‐ trol 2. # To select a menu option: scroll in a list and press Touch Control 2. # To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. 290 MBUX multimedia system Using the touchscreen # # # # # # # 1 Fingerprint sensor 2 Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off 3 Switches the mute function on/off 4 To adjust the volume Press ± or q or swipe over the button # # To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry. To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger. To reduce the map scale: tap with two fin‐ gers. To enter characters with the keypad: tap on a button. To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right. To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart. To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fingers together or apart. To turn the digital map: turn counter-clock‐ wise or clockwise using two fingers. # # # # # To move the digital map: touch the touchscreen and move your finger in any direction. To save the destination in the digital map: touch the touchscreen and hold until a message is shown. To call up the home screen: swipe up with three fingers in an application. To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the finger to the left or right. To call up a global menu in the applica‐ tions: touch the touchscreen and hold until the Options menu appears. Function of the MBUX Voice Assistant & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle MBUX multimedia system 291 when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. For your own safety, always observe the follow‐ ing points when operating mobile communica‐ tions equipment and especially your voice con‐ trol system: R Observe the legal requirements for the coun‐ try in which you are driving. R If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be unnecessarily delayed. R Familiarize yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey. Using the MBUX Voice Assistant, vehicle func‐ tions and various areas of the MBUX multimedia system can be operated by voice input. The MBUX Voice Assistant is operational approx‐ imately half a minute after switching on the igni‐ tion and can be operated from all seats. Further information and examples of voice commands can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. You can use the MBUX Voice Assistant to oper‐ ate the following functions depending on the vehicle equipment: R Telephone R Text message and e-mail R Navigation R Radio, media, TV R Vehicle functions R Online functions Full functionality of the voice control system is only available for you with activation of online voice control. Conducting a dialog Starting a dialog # Say "Hey Mercedes" to activate the MBUX Voice Assistant. Voice activation must be switched on in the multimedia system. or # Press the £ button on the multifunction steering wheel. A blue line appears in the MBUX multimedia system. The dialog can be started. For the dialog with the MBUX Voice Assistant, you can use complete sentences of colloquial language as voice commands. Voice activation can also be directly combined with a voice com‐ mand, e.g. "Hey Mercedes, how fast can I drive?". Calling up help For information about the MBUX Voice Assistant: say "Hey Mercedes, what can you do?" # Digital Operator's Manual: "Show me the Operator's Manual". The full extent of the # 292 MBUX multimedia system Digital Operator's Manual is available when the vehicle is stationary. Operating functions (examples) # To operate the navigation: "Search for an Asian restaurant, but not Japanese, in South London." # To operate the phone: "Call my father." # To change the system language to Eng‐ lish (short command): "Change language to English". # To operate the radio: "Show me the list of radio stations." # To operate media: "Switch on random playback." # To operate vehicle functions: "Switch the seat heating to level 2." # To operate online functions: "What's the time in Sydney?" # To ask a question about the vehicle: "Do I have Blind Spot Assist?" Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant & WARNING Risk of injury from the cam‐ era's laser radiation This product uses a classification 1 laser sys‐ tem. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. This product complies with the requirements of the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with exception of the variations according to the FDA Laser Notice No. 50 from 24. June 2007. % The camera records image data for the appli‐ cations, for example body, head and hand detection. The camera converts the image data directly into meta data. No image data is saved in the process. The data is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle. % You can activate or deactivate Interior Assis‐ tant functions, e.g. Light. The settings are saved in your current user profile and are seat-specific. Via the user profile they are also available in another vehicle with the MBUX Interior Assistant. This means that you only have to make the settings once and can take them with you to the other vehicle. % You can switch the Interior Assistant front and rear camera on and off using Front and Rear . The selected camera settings (on/off) are not saved in the user profile and only apply to the current vehicle. If you change to another vehicle with the MBUX Interior Assistant, please check the settings and adjust them if necessary. The MBUX Interior Assistant is equipped with front and rear cameras. % Alternatively, a configuration with front cam‐ era only is also available. The front camera consists of two cameras that support the driver and the front passenger. The rear camera consists of two cameras that support the left and right rear seat passengers. MBUX multimedia system 293 The MBUX Interior Assistant records the vehicle occupants via 3D laser cameras. The cameras of the front camera are located in the overhead control panel. The cameras of the rear camera are located in the roof bows. The Assistant detects interactions of the vehicle occupants via the cameras. It interprets the nat‐ ural hand, head and body movements of the vehicle occupants either in context or at their explicit request. The Assistant can thus automat‐ ically trigger vehicle interior functions and assist appropriately to the situation. 1 Arrangement of the cameras of the front camera in the overhead control panel The vehicle occupant actively requests a function using a hand movement or pose. The Assistant offers functions for the following: SAFETY The Assistant supports vehicle occupants with the use of restraint systems. R COMFORT The Assistant enhances comfort by automat‐ ing functions inside the vehicle and support‐ ing natural interaction with the vehicle. R INFOTAINMENT Operating options or information are high‐ lighted and/or shown on the central display as your hand approaches. The vehicle occu‐ pants can carry out a favorite function with a hand pose. R 1 Arrangement of the rear camera in the roof bows The Assistant supports vehicle and infotainment functions at three interaction levels: R INTELLIGENT The Assistant recognizes vehicle occupants automatically and activates functions. R REACTIVE The Assistant recognizes the natural body language of a vehicle occupant and carries out functions automatically, appropriate to the situation. R CONTACTLESS System limits, display messages and notes for rectification The error messages are shown on the central display, for example. 294 MBUX multimedia system The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The cameras may heat up during operation. As a result the cameras may switch off tem‐ porarily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures. Do not touch or cover the cameras and wait until the cameras have cooled down and are available again. The Interior Assistant Unavailable Further Information to Follow message appears. You receive a message when the camera is available again. R Front or rear camera is covered or dirty, fog‐ ged up or scratched. Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera cover. The Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual message appears. Clean the outside of the camera cover with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use micro‐ fiber cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning. R R R A vehicle occupant is very large. Clothing being worn (gloves, hat, scarf, color of cloth‐ ing) or objects carried on a person, for exam‐ ple a watch with a large face, are affecting the camera view. Or the detection range of the camera is restricted. The Interior Assistant availability for the driver is limited, see Operator's Manual mes‐ sage appears. Keep the camera's field of vision clear. Objects in the detection area of the camera can restrict the camera view. Please make sure, that e.g. no objects hang on the inside rearview mirror. The MBUX Interior Assistant is faulty. The Interior Assistant Not Available. Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealer. mes‐ sage appears. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐ ter. Vehicles with rear bench seat: as soon as the center rear seat is occupied, the rear seat functions are not supported. The Interior Assistant in rear compartment only available when center seat is vacant message appears. To use the Interior Assistant in the rear passenger compartment, keep the center rear seat free. Anticipatory exit warning (SAFETY/reactive) Requirements: The vehicle is equipped with Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning. R Active Blind Spot Assist is activated (/ page 254). R The vehicle is equipped with active ambient lighting or ambient lighting. R The cameras are switched on: The front camera activates the front doors. The rear camera activates the rear doors. R % Observe the information on the system limits of Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 250). MBUX multimedia system 295 The function can warn vehicle occupants about a possible collision with an approaching vehicle or bicycle when they exit the vehicle. As soon as a vehicle occupant moves their hand towards the door handle, depending on the vehi‐ cle equipment, the following warnings are issued: R The active ambient lighting or ambient light‐ ing flashes red. R The warning lamp in the outside mirror also flashes red for one of the front doors. R When the door is opened, a warning tone sounds. % The visual warning is thus already given before the door is opened. % Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 250) and on ambient lighting (/ page 166). Switching the reading light and search light and on or off R Requirements: R For the reading light: the cameras are switched on: The front camera activates the reading light for driver and front passenger. The rear camera activates the reading light for the left and right rear seat passengers. R The driver's and front passenger's hand movement takes place under the inside rear‐ view mirror. Rear passengers move their hand at the grab handle in front of the read‐ ing lamp. R For the search light: the function is availa‐ ble in the vehicle when it is dark. The cameras are switched on: The front camera records the interaction area of the unoccupied front passenger seat. The rear camera records the interaction area of the unoccupied left or right rear seat. Switching the reading light on and off The seats covered are unoccupied or a child is sitting in a child restraint system. Carrying out operation of the reading light for the driver and front passenger 296 MBUX multimedia system Switching the search light on and off Automatic preselection of the outside mirror (COMFORT/reactive) Requirements: R The front camera is switched on. Carrying out operation of the reading light for rear occupants # Move your hand up and down vertically under the inside review mirror. Interaction area for activating the search light # or # Move the hand on the grab handle vertically up and down in front of the reading light. The reading light is switched on or off. # To switch on: reach with your hand into the area of an unoccupied seat. The search light is switched on automatically for the vehicle occupants. To switch off: withdraw the hand from the area of the unoccupied seat. The search light is switched off again. Until now, to set the outside mirror the desired mirror had to be selected using a preselection button in the driver's door. With the MBUX Interior Assistant, the mirror to be set is preselected automatically by the natu‐ ral movement of your head to the left or right. When the hand touches the button for adjusting the outside mirror, the LED under the button of the preselected mirror side lights up. Use the button to set the position of the active outside mirror. % Preselection of the outside mirror using but‐ tons is still possible. Further information on adjusting the outside mirrors (/ page 171). % The driver camera is also used for this appli‐ cation. MBUX multimedia system 297 Calling up favorites with the V pose (INFO‐ TAINMENT/contactless) With your other fingers bent inwards. Briefly hold the V pose. The favorite is called up. Requirements: R The front camera is switched on. R At least one favorite has been saved in the favorites list. R The favorite has been connected with the MBUX Interior Assistant. R The area for detecting the favorites pose (V pose) is above the center console in front of the central display. R The V pose is held for a brief time. The V pose makes it easier to call up favorites. The front vehicle occupants can associate their own favorite with the V-pose. Some examples include a navigation destination, a radio station or a massage program for a seat. % If a favorite has not yet been saved and con‐ nected with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the multimedia system will assist you. Function of the driver camera The driver camera is in the driver's display or in the 3D driver display. The driver camera detects the following charac‐ teristics: R Head position R Viewing direction R Eyelid closure characteristics R Driver's face Implementation of the V-pose above the storage compartment of the center console at the height of the central display # Position your hand above the storage com‐ partment of the center console at the height of the central display. The back of your hand is facing upwards. In doing so, your index and middle finger are spread to form a V. % The driver camera records image data for applications such as ATTENTION ASSIST and facial recognition, for example. The camera converts the image data directly into meta data. No image data is saved in the process. The data is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle. The camera is activated automatically each time the engine is started. 298 MBUX multimedia system The driver camera must be set up for face detec‐ tion before use. Teaching-in biometric data (/ page 300). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The camera is covered or dirty, fogged up or scratched. R The driver's face and/or eyes are covered. R The driver is wearing glasses that block infra‐ red. Display messages In the following situations display messages may be shown: R The driver camera is inoperative. The camera is faulty. The Driver Camera Inoperative See Operator's Manual message appears. R The driver camera cannot capture the posi‐ tion of your head. R The Change the steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen. message appears. The view of the driver camera is reduced or restricted. The Driver Camera View Currently Restricted See Operator's Manual message appears. Notes on care Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 348). Switching the driver camera on or off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Intelligent Assistance # Select On or Off. When the driver camera is switched off, the fol‐ lowing functions are not available or limited: R The 3D driver display (/ page 280) R The MBUX augmented reality Head-up Dis‐ play (/ page 282) R R R The microsleep detection of ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 224) The facial recognition This function serves as sensor input for authentication and unlocking of the user pro‐ file and protected applications (/ page 300). Multimodality This function activates the MBUX Voice Assistant with eye control, e.g. for the confir‐ mation of a display message by voice. Information on users, suggestions and favor‐ ites & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the posi‐ tion saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. MBUX multimedia system 299 # Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move‐ ment. If there is a risk of someone becoming trap‐ ped, stop the adjustment process immedi‐ ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the cen‐ tral display. or # b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stop‐ ped. The driver's seat is equipped with an access pre‐ venter. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile. User profiles and user-specific content Prerequisites for the vehicle owner: R You have a Mercedes me user account. R You have a Mercedes me PIN. R You have agreed to the terms of use. R The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account. % If one of the pre-requisites listed is missing or if no user profile has been selected, the data described in the following section will be saved in the vehicle as the standard set‐ ting. Standard settings can be changed by all vehicle users. User profiles save personal settings. If the vehi‐ cle is used by several people, a person can change their profile settings without changing the settings of other users. You can individualize a user profile in the vehicle using the set-up assistant or using the settings in your user profile. Some settings, e.g. the Mercedes me PIN and a profile photo are made in the Mercedes me app or in the Mercedes me Portal. User-specific content and applications with per‐ sonal data are protected by different levels of security. To access protected content, the Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors can be used. % The security level is set by the multimedia system and calculated from the combination of all sensor inputs. Some security levels cannot be turned off. % When a user profile is activated, the follow‐ ing personalized comfort systems, for exam‐ ple, can be adjusted or their settings loaded: R Seat R Ambient light R Outside mirrors R Blinds R Air conditioning adjustment If the user profile is activated when driving then the driver's seat position will not be adjusted. 300 MBUX multimedia system Depending on the vehicle equipment you can, as a user, save the following settings, for example: R Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror set‐ tings R Climate control R Ambient lighting R Radio (including station list) R Suggestions and favorites Suggestions The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then makes suggestions regarding navigation destinations, phone numbers and music prefer‐ ences. The requirements for that are the selec‐ tion of a user, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data. Favorites Favorites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. 100 favorites are available in total. Configuring users, suggestions and favorites If more than one user profile is available, you will be directed to the user selection. When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up assistant starts automatically after user selection. Requirements: R To use the set-up assistant: the vehicle is sta‐ tionary. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f 5 Change User Adding a user Select f Add User . A QR code is loaded. # Scan the displayed QR code with the Mercedes me app or any QR code scanner on a mobile device. If the Mercedes me app is not yet installed on your mobile device, you will be directed to the store of your mobile device. # Follow the directions in the app. The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. This automatically creates your user profile in the vehicle. If only your user profile is available, it will be loaded automatically. # Selecting user options Select Settings. # Select Suggestions. # Select Allow All Suggestions. or # Switch the options on or off individually. If an option is switched on and sufficient data has been gathered, suggestions based on your user behavior will be offered to you. # For intelligent multimodality: select Multimodality. If the option is active, the MBUX Voice Assis‐ tant can be activated in certain situations. # To switch the learning function off for 24 h: switch on Deactivate 24h Intelligent Learning. # MBUX multimedia system 301 # To delete cumulated suggestions: select Reset Suggestion History and confirm Ja (Yes). Protecting user-specific content and applica‐ tions If you add a new user, access protection is already activated for the user profile. The Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors are available for access. Biometric sensors must be taught in in the vehicle. The authentication process then takes all taught-in and available sensors into account. The following user-specific content and applica‐ tions are protected, for example: R User selection and user profile settings R Biometric sensors The teaching-in of biometric sensors is pro‐ tected. R Suggestions The data and determination of the most probable navigation destinations, media R R sources, radio stations, contacts and mes‐ sages are protected. ENERGIZING COACH The recorded health data and their evaluation are protected. Mercedes me connect store The purchase of services is protected. Switch Protect Content on or off. Switch Access Protection on or off. % When access protection is switched off, your user profile can be accessed and changed from every vehicle seat. % Access protection is switched on or off on a vehicle-specific basis. # # Teaching in, editing and deleting biometric data The biometric data models are saved in the sen‐ sors in the vehicle. If recognition has been taught-in, this sensor serves as a contributory factor for authentication on the multimedia sys‐ tem. # Select Protect Content. # Select Facial Recognition, Fingerprint Recognition or Voice Recognition. % If necessary, authenticate yourself on the multimedia system. # To use face recognition: close the driver's door or fasten the driver's seat belt. # Look at the driver display for about five sec‐ onds. Your face is scanned. A message in the driver display shows whether facial recognition was successful or not. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with the facial scan. # To use fingerprint: place and lift your finger several times on the fingerprint sensor under the touchscreen . The finger is scanned. If the scanning proce‐ dure is successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user pro‐ file and protected applications with your fin‐ ger print. 302 MBUX multimedia system # To use voice recognition: speak the sen‐ tence shown on the central display and fol‐ low the instructions of the voice assistant. If the voice recognition was successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with voice input. % Avoid background or disturbing noises dur‐ ing voice recognition. # To delete biometric data: select Delete. # Select Ja (Yes). Selecting a user % When you call up your driver profile, the driv‐ er's seat and the steering wheel can be set. You can cancel the setting process with the following actions: R Tap on the Tap Here to Cancel message in the central display. R Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door. # Select Change User. # Select a user. When requested to do so, authenticate with the Mercedes me PIN or a taught-in biomet‐ ric characteristic. The user profile is loaded and activated. % If you select Continue Without Selecting a User, no specific settings for the user profile are loaded. # Adding favorites from categories # Select ©. # Select ß. # Select r. # Select W Create New Favorite. # Select the category. # Select a favorite. Linking favorites with the MBUX Interior Assistant V pose # Select ©. # Select ß. # Select r. # Select Driver or Passenger. # # Select the category. Select a favorite. System settings Overview of the system settings menu In the system settings menu, you can make set‐ tings in the following menus and control ele‐ ments: R Display: Display brightness R Control elements: Keyboard language and handwriting rec‐ ognition Touchpad sensitivity Sensitivity of the Touch Controls Haptic operation for the touchscreen R MBUX Voice Assistant R MBUX Interior Assistant R Sound: Entertainment MBUX multimedia system 303 Navigation and traffic announcements Telephone Voice amplification Connectivity: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, NFC MBUX rear tablet child-proof lock Time & date Language Units for distance System PIN Updating software System Reset - - R R R R R R R R Overview of software updates Important software updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. The multimedia system displays a corresponding message when a software update is available. If the Automatic Online Update option is active, software updates are downloaded automatically. If the option is deactivated, you will be informed of new software updates once. The software updates are available for downloading for a limi‐ ted period of time. Carrying out a software update: R You can start online software updates via the communication module. R You can start software updates via a Wi-Fi hotspot. R You can start map updates from an external medium. % Online software updates cannot be per‐ formed via external Wi-Fi hotspots that are encrypted using TKIP. % To complete software updates via the com‐ munication module, the vehicle must be con‐ nected with the Internet and a Mercedes me user account. % To complete software updates via Wi-Fi, the vehicle must be connected to an external WiFi hotspot. A software update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required for installation R Installation of the downloaded software update R Activation of the downloaded software update. % It may be necessary to restart the MBUX multimedia system after completion of a software update. % While some software updates are being downloaded, the multimedia system cannot be operated and the vehicle functions may be restricted. % Some software updates require a safe vehi‐ cle status for the installation to be comple‐ ted. They may only be carried out in a safely parked vehicle with the ignition switched off. For software updates requiring a safe vehi‐ cle status: when the last installation step is reached, a message appears on the central dis‐ play after the ignition is switched off. Follow the 304 MBUX multimedia system step-by-step instructions on the central display to complete the installation. There are software updates that can only be installed when the vehicle is safely parked, there are no more people in the vehicle and the vehi‐ cle is locked. You can immediately install the software update, schedule it, or postpone it. If you schedule the software update and unlock the vehicle in the meantime, the installation must be rescheduled. Availability of the driver display and central display During the installation of software updates, it is not possible to use the vehicle, central display and driver display. You may receive the following display messages when an installation is run‐ ning: available. Drive on carefully and consult a spe‐ cialist workshop as soon as possible. % The display message does not appear every time a software update is installed. In rare cases, an error can occur during the installation. The multimedia system automati‐ cally attempts to restore the previous version. If it is not possible to restore the previous ver‐ sion, the display messages shown above appear every time the engine is started. Failure of the central display If the central display fails or the display message shown above is shown continuously, several sys‐ tems such as the rear view camera, PARKTRONIC or climate control are no longer Failure of the driver display If the driver display fails or there is a malfunc‐ tion, you may not recognize limitations in the functions of systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired. Drive on care‐ fully and have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately (/ page 513). Further information about software updates can be found at https://me.secure.mercedesbenz.com. Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot Requirements: R Wi-Fi is activated on the multimedia system and the communication device to be connec‐ ted. R The communication device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connec‐ tion described. MBUX multimedia system 305 The connection types shown depend on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % Some functions may first need to be activa‐ ted on the communication device being con‐ nected. More detailed information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions. % The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth % The availability of the functions is dependent on the country. # Select Wi-Fi. The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched on. When Wi-Fi is switched on, you can connect the multimedia system with external hotspots or make it available as a hotspot for external devi‐ ces. When Wi-Fi is switched off, it is not possible to establish a hotspot connection. When Wi-Fi is switched off, no connection can be established with the MBUX rear tablet. % The data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal. % The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries. Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hot‐ spot # Select MBUX Hotspot. # Select one of the following connection options. Connecting using a QR code Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the device being connected. Alternatively: the device being connected has an integrated QR code scanner (see manufacturer's operating instructions). # Scan the QR code shown. The Wi-Fi connection is established. Connecting using NFC Activate NFC on the device to be connected. # When the NFC icon is displayed in the MBUX Hotspot menu, hold the device to be connec‐ ted to the NFC interface. # Follow the instructions on the device. The Wi-Fi connection is established. Connecting using a security key # Select the vehicle from the device to be con‐ nected. The vehicle is displayed with the MBUX XXXXX network name. # Enter the security key which is shown in the central display on the device to be connec‐ ted. # Confirm the entry. # 306 MBUX multimedia system Generating a new security key # Select the hotspot name MBUX XXXXX in the MBUX Hotspot menu. # Confirm the prompt with Yes. A new security key is generated. A connection will be established with the newly created security key. % When a new security key is generated, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then discon‐ nected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being reestablished, the new security key must be entered. Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the multimedia system. The data tariff of the mobile communication device via Purchased Data Plan is used for the data connection. % This function is country-dependent. % With external Wi-Fi hotspots, which are encrypted via TKIP, online software updates cannot be carried out via the external Wi-Fi hotspot. # Select the Set Up option in the Internet and Bluetooth menu. # Select Connect to the Internet. Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi % The Wi-Fi function on the mobile phone and Internet access via Wi-Fi must be activated (see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐ tions). # Select Search for Access. # Select the network. # Log in to the Wi-Fi network. or # Select the mobile phone with the ö Wi-Fi symbol. System language Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the lan‐ guage for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all lan‐ guages. If a language is not available, the naviga‐ tion announcements will be in English. Setting the language Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Language 5 System Setting the system language A list of the available system languages is shown. # Select a language. The system language is switched to the selected language. Resetting the multimedia system (reset func‐ tion) & WARNING Risk of accidents due to fail‐ ure of the central display functions While the multimedia system is being reset, its functions such as the rear view camera are not available. MBUX multimedia system 307 # Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is stationary. Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. R Some settings can only be reset when the vehicle is stationary. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset When resetting the system, personal data and settings are deleted, for example: R Connected devices R Individual user profiles R Biometric data % The data used and saved in the multimedia system by the driver assistance systems is deleted. # Select Reset. A query appears asking if the system should really be reset. Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. The multimedia system is restarted after the system reset. % Due to data protection, as well as the func‐ tion of individual driving systems and driving safety systems, it is a requirement to carry out a complete system reset before selling the vehicle or transferring it to a third party, or after use as a hire car. # Navigation and traffic Notes on navigation Route guidance with augmented reality & WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depic‐ tion or wrong interpretation of the dis‐ play The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. # # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation. Avoid extended observation of the cam‐ era image. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of addi‐ tional information The additional information from the augmen‐ ted reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carrying out all driving maneuvers. Switching navigation on Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation # Alternatively, activate the MBUX Voice Assis‐ tant (/ page 291). 308 MBUX multimedia system # Switch to navigation. The map appears. Navigation overview Digital map 4 Selects the map orientation 5 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or arrow) 6 Navigation menu Navigation menu 1 Enters a POI or address and additional desti‐ nation entries 1 Navigation window Route guidance active: display for destina‐ tion information, route list, lane recommen‐ dations, for example 2 Calls up the Control Center in the status line 3 Searches for parking facilities in the vicinity 2 Interrupts route guidance (if route guidance is active) 3 Repeats a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on or off 4 Calls up Route, and Traffic menus MBUX multimedia system 309 • Showing the route overview, entering intermediate destinations, selecting alterna‐ tive routes • Displaying traffic incidents and local area reports 5 Makes settings for View, Messages & Acoustic Signals and Route R R Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me The service is available. The service has been activated at an author‐ ized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? % If the navigation menu is not shown, tap on the digital map. % The options are not available in all countries. Entering a destination Requirements: R For online search: an Internet connection is established . R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted the terms of use. Example: entering a POI or address 1 Input line with current entry 2 Search result 3 Selects destination input, displays further destination inputs with double arrow 4 Deletes an entry 310 MBUX multimedia system 5 Adopts the search result in the input line and 6 7 8 9 A B C # continues the search Deletes the last character entered Hides the keypad Switches to handwriting recognition Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant Sets the written language Switches to digits and special characters Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters Select the destination in the list. The route is calculated. % Observe the notes on the MBUX multimedia system (/ page 287). # Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance Enter the destination in 1. The entries can be made in any order. The search results are displayed in a list. % Online search results for POIs may contain additional information, for example opening times and prices. The information is provi‐ ded by an online map service. This online function is not available in all countries. % You can enter a destination as a 3 word address from what3words. This option is not available in all countries. # Hide the keyboard with a. Example: detailed display 1 Calls up alternative routes 2 Calculates the route and starts route guid‐ ance 3 Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of the destination MBUX multimedia system 311 4 Shares the destination 5 Saves a destination as a favorite 6 Destination address After selection of a destination the route is be calculated. # Select one of the options. Calling up the route overview Select Routes. # Select an alternative route. # # # # # Starting route guidance # Select ¥ Let's Go!. Calling up the detailed display with destina‐ tion address # Pull the bar above the ¥ Let's Go! sym‐ bol upwards. Depending on the destination selection and availability, online content, for example rat‐ ings, prices and weather information, is shown. To share a destination: select Ç Share . This option allows you to scan the displayed QR code. To save a destination as a favorite: select ß Favorite and then an option. To call up an Internet address: if a web address is available, select www. To call the destination: if a telephone num‐ ber is available, select Call. Searching for POIs in the vicinity of the des‐ tination shown # Select In The Vicinity. # Search using categories, enter a search entry or search for a personal POI . Selecting a route type Select Z in the navigation menu (/ page 308). # Select Route. The route is calculated as a fast route with a short journey time. Trailer mode is available if a trailer has been coupled with the vehicle. If available, you can select online routes. # Traffic announcements for the route are taken into account via Reroute Based on Traffic r. % Trailer mode and online routes are not availa‐ ble in all countries and for all vehicles. Calculating alternative routes Select Z in the navigation menu. # Select View. # Activate Route Overview after Start. Alternative routes are calculated for every route. # Selecting alternative routes % If Route Overview after Start has been switched on and a route has been calcula‐ ted, the function is available. # Select ¡ in the navigation menu. # Select Alternative Routes. # When the alternative routes have been calcu‐ lated, display the route in the navigation win‐ dow by swiping to the right or left. # Select Start. 312 MBUX multimedia system Activating a commuter route % A user profile has been created and Allow Destination Suggestions has been activated in the user options (/ page 300). Route guidance is not active. # Select Z in the navigation menu. # Select Route. # Activate Activate Commuter Route. The navigation system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. For the daily commuter route, traffic inci‐ dents on the route are also reported when driving without active route guidance. # To select or delete a commuter route: selectStart or ¨. Avoiding or using route sections, e.g. high‐ ways or ferries # Select Z in the navigation menu. # Select Route. # Select Avoid Options. # Activate or deactivate the avoid option. Activating route guidance with augmented reality # Tap on ¨ in the map. The indicator lamp lights up blue. The AR camera's video image is shown in the central display before a turning maneuver. The video image includes additional informa‐ tion. # To return to the navigation map: tap on ¨ again. The indicator lamp is not lit. Showing property information for route guid‐ ance with augmented reality Road guidance with augmented reality is activa‐ ted. # Select Z in the navigation menu. # Select View. # Select Augmented Reality Video. # Activate Street Names and House Numbers. During route guidance, the activated options are shown as additional information in the camera image. Using map functions Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation Increasing map scale When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with one finger on the central display. # Decreasing map scale When the map is displayed, tap the central display with two fingers. # Moving the map When the map is displayed, swipe in any direction with one finger on the central dis‐ play. # To reset the map to the current vehicle position: select \ Center . # MBUX multimedia system 313 Selecting map orientation # Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol on the map. The map orientations changes in this order: R The 3D map view is aligned to the direc‐ tion of travel. R The 2D map view is aligned to the direc‐ tion of travel. R The 2D map view is displayed so that north is always at the top. R The map shows the complete route. Using services Requirements: R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. R R Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me The service is available. The service has been activated at an author‐ ized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation Showing traffic information # Select Z in the navigation menu. # Select View. # Select Map Symbols. # Activate Traffic Incidents and Free Flowing Traffic. Traffic incidents, for example roadworks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning mes‐ sages, are shown on the route. The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. The smallest value for the display for traffic delays is a minute. Displaying hazard warnings If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic Incidents option. # Set the option using Z. If the option is activated, all of the symbols are shown. If the option is deactivated, the symbols are only shown when there is a hazard warning. The following hazards may be shown on the map: R Accidents and breakdowns R Fog and ice R Hazards reported manually R Vehicle with active hazard warning light R Mobile roadworks Displaying online map contents Select Z in the navigation menu. # Select View. # Select Map Symbols. # 314 MBUX multimedia system # Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. The service information is not shown in all map scales, e.g. weather symbols. Parking service & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to not observing the maximum per‐ mitted access height If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi‐ mum permitted access height for parking garages, the roof and other parts of the vehi‐ cle may be damaged. Vehicle occupants may be injured. # Before entering a parking garage or underground parking, observe the sign‐ posted entrance height. # If the vehicle height is greater than the access height, do not enter. * NOTE Before selecting the parking option The data is based on information provided by the respective service provider. Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the accuracy of the information provided relating to the parking garage/parking lot. # Always observe the local Information and conditions. % This service is not available in all countries. # Select Z and activate Parking. # Tap on j in the map. # Select a parking option. The map shows the parking options in the vicinity. The following information is displayed (if available): R Destination address, distance from cur‐ rent vehicle position and arrival time R Information on the parking garage/park‐ ing facility # For example, opening times, parking charges, current occupancy, maximum parking time, maximum access height. The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need for observation of the actual cir‐ cumstances. R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards) R Details on parking tariffs R Number of available parking spaces R Payment method (e.g. at the parking meter) R Services/facilities at the parking option R Telephone number Calculate the route (/ page 310). MBUX multimedia system 315 Notes on the dashcam * NOTE Before using the dashcam You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated. Therefore, observe the legal requirements, in particular the data protection regulations, in your country. For this reason, before using the dashcam inform yourself about the regulation details for the respective country. This function is not permitted in all countries. # Observe the country-specific regula‐ tions. % To ensure secure operation, only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices. % The file size and therefore the duration of single recording is limited by the limitations of the USB flash drive format. So FAT32 for‐ matted USB flash drives do not allow files larger than 4 GB, for example. When the file size is reached, the recording stops and you receive a notification. Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam Requirements: R At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam # Select the USB symbol. # Select the USB device. % When USB devices contain multiple parti‐ tions, recorded video files are not always dis‐ played in the recording list. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition. Starting or stopping video recording with the dashcam Requirements: R For recording and saving a video file: a USB device is connected with the multimedia sys‐ tem. R The ignition is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam # If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select a USB device (/ page 315). If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when recording starts. # To select a recording mode: select Loop Recording or Individual Recording. Loop Recording records several short video files. When the memory is full, recording is continued automatically. In doing so, other files will be overwritten starting with the old‐ est file. Individual Recording stops recording when the memory limit is reached. An individual 316 MBUX multimedia system recording is automatically protected against being overwritten. # To start: select Start Recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Please do not remove the storage medium. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device. # To end: select End Recording. % In some countries, geo-coordinates (longi‐ tude and latitude) are shown in the video image. For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates may show greater inaccuracies. A report may appear in the following cases: R Individual Recording: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently. Change the USB device or delete a video file. R The camera is not functional, the Camera Unavailable message appears. Have the camera checked in an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R R If the country border indication has been switched on. If an outdoor recording is started with the camera app during a dashcam recording, the dashcam recording pauses and resumes automatically after the camera recording is finished. A notification to this effect is dis‐ played. Telephone Telephony Notes on telephony & WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐ ating integrated communication equip‐ ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. & WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip‐ ment while the vehicle is in motion Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com‐ munications devices when the vehicle is stationary. # As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when MBUX multimedia system 317 operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐ tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can‐ not be thrown around in such situa‐ tions. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart‐ ment. Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 134) Bluetooth® connection The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth® profile of the connected mobile phone. If the mobile phone supports all the fol‐ lowing Bluetooth® profiles, the full range of fea‐ tures is available: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system. R MAP (Message Access Profile) The mobile phone message functions can be used on the multimedia system. R HFP (hands-free profile) Wireless telephony is available on the multimedia system. R SAP (SIM Access Profile) The car telephone has access to the SIM card data and dials into the mobile phone network via the exterior antenna. Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functional‐ ity can by used with any mobile radio unit. For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the man‐ ufacturer's operating instructions. Network connection: The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception station, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A require‐ 318 MBUX multimedia system ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice® . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate. Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Telephone menu overview 4 Battery status of the connected mobile 5 6 7 8 9 1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone 2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode) 3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network phone Options Messages Calls up my devices Numerical pad Starts contact search Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel‐ ephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐ dia system via Bluetooth®. R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode). You can use all the functions of the multi‐ media system with both mobile phones. MBUX multimedia system 319 Connecting a mobile phone Requirements: R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐ tions). R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 My Devices 5 Z 5 Devices Searching for a mobile phone # Select Connect New Device. Connecting a mobile phone # Select a mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If both codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone. Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.: R Accept a call k End Call Answering a call with a message i Conference Accepting or rejecting a waiting call R Managing contacts, e.g.: Downloading mobile phone contacts Managing the format of a contact's name Deleting favorites R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.: Using the read-aloud function Dictating a new message Mercedes me and apps Mercedes me connect Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv‐ ices. You can use the following services via the multi‐ media system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system) R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto‐ matic emergency call and SOS button) The Mercedes me connect Accident and Break‐ down Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are available to you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 321). 320 MBUX multimedia system You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system (/ page 322). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 327). Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account. Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Information on Mercedes me connect Acci‐ dent and Breakdown Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call system (/ page 327) R R R If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for‐ wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci‐ dent and Breakdown Management. Forward‐ ing the call is however not possible in all countries. Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehi‐ cle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You may be charged for these services. Addition to the emergency guide after auto‐ matic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 322) In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur‐ ther vehicle data is sent which enables opti‐ mal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the authorized service partner or breakdown assistance. Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are sub‐ ject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary. % These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone cover‐ age, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia sys‐ tem. More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com MBUX multimedia system 321 Data transferred during Mercedes me con‐ nect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me con‐ nect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice con‐ trol system R The activated Mercedes me connect services Mercedes me calls Making a call via the overhead control panel Making an emergency call # To open the cover of SOS button 2, press it briefly. # Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one second. If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls. You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me con‐ nect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account. 1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system) Making a Mercedes me call # Press me button 1. Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the me button in the over‐ head control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 321). Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service: R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general information about the vehicle You can find information on the following topics: Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle R 322 MBUX multimedia system R R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Other products and services from MercedesBenz Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 323). Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system Requirements: Access to a GSM network is available. R The contract partner's GSM network cover‐ age is available in the respective region. R The ignition must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automati‐ cally. R Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 © # Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the central display. Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection Requirements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on. % This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances. In the event an accident or breakdown is detec‐ ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. # Select Call. After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Break‐ down Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (/ page 320). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center takes your call and organizes the break‐ down and accident assistance. R You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initi‐ ated. This has priority over all other active calls. % In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined. MBUX multimedia system 323 % If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with Call Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again. Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance manage‐ ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. You will then receive individual recom‐ mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi‐ media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer center takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to confirm the appoint‐ ment and if necessary consult about the details. % If you select Call Later after the service mes‐ sage appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time. # Transferred data during a Mercedes me call If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable targeted advice and an efficient service. The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data: R The ignition is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is sup‐ ported by the mobile phone network pro‐ vider. R The quality of the mobile connection is suffi‐ cient. Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission technology. R The activated Mercedes me connect serv‐ ices. R The service selected in the voice control sys‐ tem. Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv‐ ices are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activa‐ ted, the following data is transferred: R Vehicle identification number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Confirmation of the data protection prompt R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system 324 MBUX multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia sys‐ tem, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center: R Current vehicle location Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and, if required to process the incident, forwar‐ ded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https:// www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. % The recorded message is not available in every country. Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me apps updated. You can call up the menu using Apps in the mul‐ timedia system. In the Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me user account R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes me user account and the vehicle R Calling up the Mercedes me services R Calling up apps such as, In-Car Office or the web browser depending on availability MBUX multimedia system 325 Web browser overview % Under Ä you have the following options: R Bookmarks R Request Mobile Website R Tabs % Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion. Overview of smartphone integration 1 2 3 4 5 Search To refresh/stop Previous website Options Settings With Smartphone Integration, you can use cer‐ tain functions on your mobile phone via the mul‐ timedia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐ ted via Smartphone Integration to the multime‐ dia system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Blue‐ tooth® with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte‐ gration is only possible with an Internet connec‐ tion. The appropriate application must be down‐ loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to the multimedia system via the USB port using a suitable cable. Apps for Smartphone Integration R Mercedes-Benz Link (implementation of the function using the Mercedes-Benz Link con‐ trol box) R Apple CarPlay® (wireless connection via Bluetooth® also possible) R Android Auto (wireless connection via Blue‐ tooth® also possible) % For safety reasons, the first activation of Mercedes-Benz Link, Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is sta‐ tionary and the parking brake is applied. You can start Smartphone Integration using the My Devices menu. You can end Smartphone Integration via the My Devices or by disconnecting the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. 326 MBUX multimedia system % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connection via the device manager or the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymized) The transfer of this data is used to optimize com‐ munication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identifica‐ tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi‐ media system is reset (/ page 306). The following driving status data is transmitted: Transmission position engaged R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster R Drive type R The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel). Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call system Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911. Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insufficient net‐ work coverage from the wireless service provid‐ ers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your MercedesBenz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data detailed in the Transmitted Data section that fol‐ lows (/ page 328). To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle's communication mod‐ ule. MBUX multimedia system 327 Deactivation of this module prevents the activation of any and all Mercedes me con‐ nect services. After the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The ignition must be switched on before an auto‐ matic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is trans‐ ferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system. Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. The emergency call can be made automatically (/ page 327) or manually (/ page 328). Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit‐ uation. Triggering an automatic Mercedes-Benz emergency call Requirements: The ignition is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system trig‐ gers an emergency call automatically in the fol‐ lowing cases: R After activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices after an accident R After an automatically initiated emergency stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an auto‐ matic emergency call. If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice 328 MBUX multimedia system R R connection is established with the emer‐ gency call center operator. Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu‐ lance is sent to the vehicle immediately. Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call # To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long (/ page 321). or To use voice control: use the voice com‐ mands of the MBUX Voice Assistant. The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. # R R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer‐ gency call center operator. Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. If no connection can be made to the emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the central display. # Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone. Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # Select ~ on the multifunction steering wheel. Depress the button for several sec‐ onds. Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call system In the event of an automatic or manual emer‐ gency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route (a few hun‐ dred meters before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people determined to be in the vehicle R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBU‐ MBUX multimedia system 329 SA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FORMERC. For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be deter‐ mined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established. Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu Symbol Designation Function 6 Play Select to start or continue playback. 8 Rest Select to pause the playback. 330 MBUX multimedia system Symbol Designation Function : Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. R Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated. 9 Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order. û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track. Ä Additional options Select to show additional options. 5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.). ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example. Z Settings Select to make settings. © Home Select to return to the home screen. MBUX multimedia system 331 Symbol Designation Function j Messaging Select to call up messaging. 2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode. The following functions and settings are availa‐ ble in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth®) R Playing back audio or video files Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu Symbol Designation Function © Home Select to return to the home screen. j Messaging Select to call up messaging. û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station. 332 MBUX multimedia system Symbol Designation Function Z Settings Select to have further options shown. The setting options are country-dependent. HD HD radio® Select to switch the HD Radio® function on or off. This function is not available in all countries. 4 Station list Select to have the station list shown. ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example. Additional functions of TuneIn Radio % A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using TuneIn Radio. MBUX multimedia system 333 Symbol Designation Function Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account ß Favourites Select during playback to save the station cur‐ rently set as a favorite. 6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback. 4 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio station. Additional functions of the satellite radio SIRIUS XM® satellite radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and enter‐ tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM® satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satel‐ lites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM® Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). % Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. 334 MBUX multimedia system Symbol Designation Function Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the satellite radio menu: R Activate child safety lock to lock channels with adult content R Set alarm programming for music and sport alerts R Create TuneMix lists to listen to music seam‐ lessly 6 Play Select to start or continue playback. 8 Rest Select to pause the playback. Depending on the frequency band selected, dif‐ ferent functions are available to you. Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner. Calling up TuneIn Radio Requirements: R There is a user account at https:// www.mercedes.me. R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account. R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me portal. R R The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. A fast Internet connection for data transmis‐ sion free of interference. % Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal. MBUX multimedia system 335 % The functions and services are countrydependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio. The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing. % The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception. Setting up satellite radio Requirements: R Satellite radio equipment is available. R Registration with a satellite radio provider has been completed. R If registration is not included when purchas‐ ing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Z # Select Service Information. The service information screen appears showing the radio ID and the current sub‐ scription status. # Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service staff's instructions. The activation process may take up to ten minutes. % You can also have the satellite service acti‐ vated online. To do so, please visit https:// www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Music and sport alerts Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z 5 Alerts 5 SiriusXM Setting music and sport alerts This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. # Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of matches in the live program. Activating messages for a category Select a category and activate D. # Adding messages for a category Select a category and add a message W. # Select Artist Alerts or Song Alerts in the dia‐ log window. The message is set for the activated O track and artist. If a match is found, a prompt # 336 MBUX multimedia system appears asking whether you wish to change to the station. Deleting messages in a category # Select a category, mark the desired mes‐ sages and delete E. or # Do not mark any messages and delete all entries E. Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system installed. You can find out which sound system is installed in your vehicle in the Digital Operator's Manual. Standard sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer: Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume: - Automatic adjustment Burmester® 3D-surround sound system and Burmester® high-end 4D surround sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer: Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seat (Burmester® high-end 4D surround sound system only) R Sound profiles R Volume: Automatic adjustment Maintenance and care 337 ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the driver display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is often left idling for long periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the serv‐ icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Displaying the service due date Driver display: 4 Service The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the driver display (/ page 280). Information on regular maintenance work * NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # Adhere to the prescribed service inter‐ vals. # Always have the prescribed mainte‐ nance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐ mal operation of the vehicle. Have the mainte‐ nance work carried out more often than prescri‐ bed if operating conditions are difficult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi‐ bility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more often than speci‐ fied based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R Regular city driving with frequent intermedi‐ ate stops R Mainly short-distance driving R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces 338 Maintenance and care R R When the engine is often left idling for long periods Operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further infor‐ mation can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Battery disconnection periods The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected. # Display the service due date on the driver display and note it down before disconnect‐ ing the battery (/ page 337). Engine compartment Opening and closing the hood & WARNING Risk of accident due to driv‐ ing with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood The hood may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Do not open or close the hood if there is a person in the hood's range of move‐ ment. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot gases. R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping operating fluids. # # Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down. In the event of a fire in the engine com‐ partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts Components in the engine compartment may continue running or start up suddenly, even if the ignition is switched off. Maintenance and care 339 Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch the ignition off. # Never reach into the danger zone sur‐ rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. # Remove jewelery and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts. & WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. The live components include the following, for example: R Ignition coils R R Fuel injectors Electric lines to the ignition coils or the fuel injectors Opening the hood & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine com‐ partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open When the engine hood is open and the wind‐ shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before opening the engine hood. # # Pull on handle 1 twice. The hood will be released and open slightly. Then lift the hood by hand. 340 Maintenance and care Closing the hood * NOTE Damage to the hood If the hood is closed manually, there is a risk of dents. # Do not close the hood manually. # # Lower the hood to a height of around 8 in (20 cm) and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go. If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly. Engine oil The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style. Driver display: 4 Service The engine oil level is shown. One of the following messages will appear on the driver display: R Engine Oil Level Measuring Now…: measure‐ ment of the oil level is not yet possible. # R Checking the engine oil level with the driver display Requirements: R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. R The hood is closed. Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving. Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the driver display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct. R Engine Oil Level Refill 1,0 liq.gal. and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the driver display is yellow and is below "min": # Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. R Engine Oil Level Reduce and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the driver dis‐ play is yellow and is above "max": # Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop. For Engine Oil Level Switch On Ignition R # R Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil level. Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected. R Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Oil Level Currently Unavailable # Close the hood. # Refilling engine oil & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine com‐ partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. Maintenance and care 341 Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. # & WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil # # If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart‐ ment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler opening. # Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐ oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐ nent parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐ tives # Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi‐ cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals. Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals. Do not use additives. * NOTE Damage caused by refilling too much engine oil Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist workshop. % Depending on driving style, the vehicle con‐ sumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liter) of oil per 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. % Depending on the engine, the cap may be installed in the engine compartment in dif‐ ferent locations. # # # # Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. Add engine oil. Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it engages. Check the oil level again (/ page 340). 342 Maintenance and care Checking the coolant level Refilling the windshield washer system & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine com‐ partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. Certain component parts in the engine com‐ partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pres‐ sure. # Only have the coolant checked or refilled at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. Remove cap 1 by the tab. Add washer fluid. % Further information about the windshield washer fluid (/ page 500) # # Maintenance and care 343 Keeping the air-water duct free # Keep the area between the hood and the windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves. Cleaning and care Notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash & WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored. * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐ tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit‐ uations: # During towing # In a car wash * NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash # Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions. # # Ensure there is sufficient ground clear‐ ance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash. Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient. To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐ vated. R The HOLD function is switched off. R The surround view camera or the rear view camera is switched off. R The vehicle is locked and the door handles retracted. R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. R The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off. R The windshield wiper switch is in position g. 344 Maintenance and care R R R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 20 ft (6 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid or a door could open uninten‐ tionally. For car washes with a conveyor system: Neutral i is engaged. The vehicle is locked from inside. Do not make any hand movements in the area of the overhead control panel or deacti‐ vate (/ page 302) the Sliding Sunroof and Roller Sunblind option in the settings for the MBUX Interior Assistant. % If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise. Notes on using a power washer R & WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unex‐ pectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with roundspray nozzles. # Have damaged tires or chassis parts replaced immediately. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol‐ lowing when using a power washer: R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid or a door could open uninten‐ tionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) to the vehicle. R R Vehicles with decorative foil: Parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140°F (60°C). Observe the information on the correct dis‐ tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper‐ ating instructions. Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer directly at sensitive parts, such as tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sources and ventilation slits. Maintenance and care 345 Washing the vehicle by hand * NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress # Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood. Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. # Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois. % Observe the notes on the care of vehicle parts (/ page 346). Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes: Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro‐ leum ether or lighter fluid. R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate‐ rials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible. Matte finish Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate‐ rials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop. R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards. R Do not use car wash programs with a final hot wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polish‐ ing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. R In the event of paintwork damage: R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. R Make sure the radar sensors function (/ page 218). Notes on cleaning decorative foils Observe the notes on matte finish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paint‐ 346 Maintenance and care work care" (/ page 345). They also apply to matte decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage. Cleaning For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decora‐ tive foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recom‐ mended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash. R Avoiding damage to the decorative foil The service life and color of decorative foils are impaired by: Sunlight Temperature, e.g. hot air blower Weather conditions Stone chippings and dirt Chemical cleaning agents Oily products R Do not use polish on matte decorative foil. Polishing will have the effect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. R Do not treat matte or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur. R Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif‐ ferences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil after removing a decorative foil. % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car‐ ried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Notes on care of vehicle parts & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. Maintenance and care 347 minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out. & WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐ pipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehi‐ cle parts: Wheels and rims Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few R Windows Clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom‐ mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solventbased cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows. R % After changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windshield thoroughly with cleaning agents recommen‐ ded for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or blinding spots. % Remove external fogging or dirt on the wind‐ shield in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or not avail‐ able (/ page 218). Wiper blades Move the wiper arms into the replacement position (/ page 168). R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. R % Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating can leave residues on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too often. Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo (/ page 218). R When using a power washer, maintain a mini‐ mum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm). 348 Maintenance and care Rear view camera and surround view camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia system (/ page 268). R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens. R Do not use a power washer. Tailpipes Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents. R Notes on care of the interior & WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol‐ vent-based care products Care and cleaning products containing sol‐ vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐ ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit. & WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol‐ lowing notes on cleaning and care: Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 176°F (80°C) or exposing them to direct sunlight. Display Switch off the display and let it cool down. R R R Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-LCD). Do not use any other agents. Head-up Display R Clean with a soft, non-static, lint-free cloth. R Do not use cleaning agents. Plastic trim R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen‐ ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate‐ rials. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact with the plas‐ tic trim. Real wood and trim elements R Clean with a microfiber cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: Clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen‐ ded for Mercedes-Benz. Maintenance and care 349 R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes. Headliner R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent rec‐ ommended for Mercedes-Benz. Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINAMICA * NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners # R R R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use pol‐ ishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish. Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth. For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen‐ ded for Mercedes-Benz. Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. Do not use a microfiber cloth. % Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color differences. Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth. R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. R Do not use a microfiber cloth. DINAMICA seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a microfiber cloth. Fabric seat covers Clean with a damp microfiber cloth and 1% soapy water and allow to dry. R EASY-PACK trunk box R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use any alcohol-based thinners, gaso‐ line or abrasive cleaning agents. 350 Breakdown assistance Replace the safety vest in the following cases: The reflective strips are damaged or dirt on the reflective strips can no longer be removed R The maximum number of washes is exceeded R The fluorescence has faded Emergency Removing the safety vest R The safety vests are located in storage spaces in the front door. Take the safety vest bag out of storage space 1. # Open the safety vest bag and pull out the safety vest. % Safety vests can also be stored in the rear door storage spaces. # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Maximum number of washes Maximum wash temperature Do not bleach Do not iron Do not tumble dry Do not dry clean This is a class 2 vest The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled in the following cases: R The safety vest is the correct size R The safety vest is fully closed whilst being worn Breakdown assistance 351 Warning triangle Setting up the warning triangle Removing the warning triangle # # Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a tri‐ angle and attach at the top using upper press-stud 2. Fold legs 3 down and out to the side. First-aid kit (soft sided) # # Push both sides of warning triangle holder 1 in the direction of the arrow and open it. Remove warning triangle 2. First-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is located on the right-hand side of the trunk and is secured with Velcro strip 2. Flat tire Notes in the event of a flat tire & WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire A flat tire severely affects the driving charac‐ teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tires without run-flat characteristics: # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Change the flat tire immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. 352 Breakdown assistance Alternatively, consult a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. Tires with run-flat characteristics: # Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire). In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equip‐ ment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos‐ sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) (/ page 352). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 353). R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 321). R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 396). % The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries. Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) & WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode When driving in emergency mode the han‐ dling characteristics are impaired. # Do not exceed the specified maximum speed of the MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle. # Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R Banging noise R R R R # # Vehicle vibration Smoke which smells like rubber Continuous ESP® intervention Cracks in the tire side walls After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified special‐ ist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How‐ ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con‐ junction with an activated tire pressure monitor‐ ing system. Breakdown assistance 353 If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows: R Check the tire for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes. Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning: Load condition Driving distance pos‐ sible in emergency mode Partially laden 50 miles (80 km) Fully laden 19 miles (30 km) The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has been punctured and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a standard tire as a temporary measure. TIREFIT kit storage location Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the stor‐ age bag for the TIREFIT kit is located in the cargo compartment or on the left side of the stowage net. Comply with the loading guidelines (/ page 134). Using the TIREFIT kit Requirements: R Tire sealant bottle and tire inflation compres‐ sor (/ page 353) R TIREFIT sticker R Gloves (depending on the vehicle equipment) You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora‐ tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 °F (-20 °C). & WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases: R There are large cuts or punctures in the tire (larger than damage previously men‐ tioned) R The wheel rims have been damaged R After journeys with very low tire pressure or with flat tires # # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita‐ tion. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. 354 Breakdown assistance If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor‐ oughly rinse out the eyes using clean water. # If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thor‐ oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. # Change out of any clothes contamina‐ ted with tire sealant immediately. # If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately. Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced in a quali‐ fied specialist workshop every five years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tire. # # * NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla‐ tion compressor running too long # Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption. # Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the faulty tire. # # Pull plug 6 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tire inflation compressor housing. Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 4 of tire sealant bottle 3 until the plug engages. Place tire sealant bottle 3 head down into recess 2 of the tire inflation compressor. Breakdown assistance 355 # # # # # # Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the faulty tire. Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7. Insert plug 6 into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. Switch on the ignition. Switch on the tire inflation compressor using On/Off switch 1. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum‐ ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation compres‐ sor during this phase! Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera‐ ble to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy‐ lene. If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. # Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately 33 ft (10 m). # Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). & WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being ach‐ ieved If the specified tire pressure is not achieved after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking characteristics as well as the driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the faulty tire. 356 Breakdown assistance & WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. # Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph (80 km/h). * NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre‐ sponsible disposal Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. # # # Store the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla‐ tion compressor. Pull away immediately. Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). & WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained If the specified tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire seal‐ ant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. In cases such as the one mentioned above, con‐ tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values. # To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. Breakdown assistance 357 Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery & WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐ tery # # # # # To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button 1 next to manometer 2. When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tire. Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire. Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bot‐ tle. Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work‐ shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there. Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety sys‐ tems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R When braking R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions # # In the event of a short circuit or a simi‐ lar incident, contact a qualified special‐ ist workshop immediately. Do not drive on. # R R Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information on ABS (/ page 220) Further information on ESP® (/ page 221) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes‐ ted and approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithiumion battery & WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐ trostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat‐ tery. 358 Breakdown assistance The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance. All vehicles + & WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐ oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately. ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat‐ teries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con‐ tact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corro‐ sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses. Keep children away. Breakdown assistance 359 Observe this Operator's Manual. Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Activate standby mode. R Alternatively: connect the battery to a bat‐ tery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery. Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐ tion point in the engine compartment. * NOTE Damage to the battery from over‐ voltage When charging using a battery charger with‐ out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐ mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. All other vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐ tion point in the engine compartment. * NOTE Damage to the battery from over‐ voltage When charging using a battery charger with‐ out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐ mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. & WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐ gen gas igniting There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when charging the battery if there is a short circuit or sparks start to form. # Make sure that the positive terminal of the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. # Never place metal objects or tools on a battery. # The described order of the battery clamps must be observed when con‐ necting and disconnecting the battery. # When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat‐ tery terminals with identical polarity. # During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con‐ necting and disconnecting the jumper cable. # Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐ tery clamps while the engine is running. 360 Breakdown assistance & WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo‐ sive gas mixture. # Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. # Make sure there is sufficient ventila‐ tion. # Do not lean over a battery. & WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐ zen battery A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐ tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg‐ ing, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing starting assis‐ tance. If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro‐ zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, espe‐ cially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat‐ tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles * NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine. Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charg‐ ing cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start con‐ nection point. R The jumper cable/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. R Keep away from fire and open flames. R Do not lean over the battery. Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Only use battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instruc‐ tions before charging the battery. Breakdown assistance 361 Starting assistance Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may only be provided using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Vehicles with a gasoline engine: jumpstart the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold. Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery Preparing for starting assistance/the charg‐ ing process # Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. # Select transmission position j. # Switch off the ignition and all electrical con‐ sumers. # Open the hood. # # Open cover 1. Slide protective cover 2 of positive contact 3 on the jump-start connection point in the direction of the arrow. # # # Connect the positive contacts of the vehicles with the jumper cable. Start with your own vehicle first. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. Connect negative terminal 4 of the donor battery to the ground point of your vehicle 362 Breakdown assistance # # # using the jumper cable. Start with the donor vehicle first. Start the engine of your own vehicle. Let the engines run for several minutes. Before disconnecting the jumper cables, switch on an electrical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or the lighting. When starting assistance has finished: First, remove the jumper cable from the ground point of your own vehicle and the negative terminal of the donor battery, then remove the jumper cable from the positive contacts of both vehicles. Always start with your own vehicle first. # Close protective cover 2 of positive contact 3 and close cover 1. Charging the 12 V battery Connect the positive contacts of the vehicle and the charger with the charging cable. Start with the vehicle first. # Connect the negative contact of the charger and ground point 4 on the vehicle with the charging cable. Start with the charger first. # Start the charging process. # When the charging process is complete: Remove the charging cable from ground point 4 on the vehicle and the negative con‐ tact of the charger first and then from the positive contacts on the vehicle and charger. Always start with the vehicle first. # Close protective cover 2 of positive contact 3 and close cover 1. # # Further information can be obtained at a quali‐ fied specialist workshop. Replacing the 12 V battery # Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 357). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the specific vehicle require‐ ments. The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol‐ ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith‐ ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith‐ ium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con‐ nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Install any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. Breakdown assistance 363 R Make sure that detachable parts are recon‐ nected in the same way. Tow starting or towing away Permitted towing methods * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐ tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit‐ uations: # During towing # In a car wash Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems (/ page 279). * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow‐ ing away incorrectly # Observe the instructions and notes on towing away. Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company. Vehicles with rear wheel drive Permitted towing methods Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Front axle raised No Rear axle raised Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the center position with a steering wheel lock 4MATIC vehicles Permitted towing methods Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Front axle raised No Rear axle raised No 364 Breakdown assistance Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground # # Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 363). Make sure that the battery is connected and charged. When the battery is discharged, the following actions cannot be performed: R The engine cannot be started R The electric parking brake cannot be released or applied R The automatic transmission cannot be shif‐ ted to position i or j % If the automatic transmission cannot be shif‐ ted to position i or the driver's display in the instrument cluster does not show any‐ thing, have the vehicle transported (/ page 365). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transporta‐ tion. * NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis‐ tances The drivetrain could be damaged when tow‐ ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km) must not be exceeded. & WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or rollover. # Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass. If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden‐ tification plate (/ page 492). # Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door; the automatic transmission will otherwise automatically shift to position j. # Install the towing eye (/ page 368). # Fasten the towing device. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐ tion of the tow bar # # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes. Deactivate the automatic locking mecha‐ nism . Breakdown assistance 365 # # # # # Do not activate the HOLD function. Deactivate the tow-away alarm (/ page 104). Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 244). Shift the automatic transmission to position i. Release the electric parking brake. & WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐ ted safety-related functions during the towing process Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐ ger available in the following situations: R The ignition is switched off. R The brake system or power steering sys‐ tem is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electri‐ cal system is malfunctioning. When your vehicle is towed away, signifi‐ cantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # # Use a tow bar. Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away. * NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly. Loading the vehicle for transport Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The engine is switched off. R The driver display is in the initial state with no menus open (/ page 280). Transport is also possible with a warning message visible. R The 12 V battery is charged. If necessary, set the system language (/ page 306). # Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 364). # Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle. # Switch on the power supply (/ page 189). # Shift the automatic transmission to position i. % The automatic transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the electrics. To shift to i, provide the onboard electrical system with power (/ page 361). # * NOTE Possible damage to the vehicle when loading or unloading When loading or unloading, the vehicle must be raised to transport level. If the transport settings are not shown or the Vehicle not ready for loading display mes‐ sage is shown, the vehicle may not be loaded or unloaded. 366 Breakdown assistance # # If required, raise the vehicle to trans‐ port level again. A vehicle that cannot be raised to trans‐ port level may not be loaded or unloa‐ ded using a ramp. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident due to acti‐ vated transport level When you use transport level, driving and driving safety systems have only limited avail‐ ability and the view from the vehicle is limi‐ ted. Driving safety is severely restricted and there is a risk of an accident! # Do not use transport level in normal road operation. # Only activate and use transport level when not on public roads. # Ensure that no persons or obstacles are located in the area surrounding the vehicle. Raising the vehicle to transport level # Press the G button for at least five sec‐ onds. # Immediately press and hold the a button for at least one second. The Switch vehicle on for transport level dis‐ play message appears. # Start the engine (/ page 190). The transport settings are displayed. # Swipe downward to select Transport level and press a. The vehicle is raised and the Vehicle rising display message is shown for 5 seconds. The # raising process can last up to 60 seconds and can be canceled with the G button. When raising, do not switch off the engine. While the vehicle is being raised, you can maneuver at a maximum speed of 25 mph (40 km/h). Wait to load until transport level has been reached and the Transport level status is shown. % If the vehicle is raised to transport level, the transport settings will continue to be shown even after a restart. Operation of the driver display is meanwhile restricted. # Breakdown assistance 367 When the vehicle is at transport level, it is low‐ ered again in the following situations: R When driven faster than 25 mph (40 km/h). R The 12 V battery is discharged. # # Switch off the engine and the power supply. Only secure the vehicle by the wheels. 4MATIC vehicles Unloading the vehicle # Make sure that the vehicle is raised to trans‐ port level before unloading (/ page 365). Lowering the vehicle after unloading Switch on the power supply. # Start the engine. # Swipe upward in the transport settings to select Standard level and press a. The vehicle is set to the height of the last active level and the Vehicle lowering display message is shown. # After the vehicle has been lowered, press the G button for at least two seconds. The transport settings are closed. # The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active level. Transporting the vehicle Load the vehicle onto the transporter. # Shift the automatic transmission to position j. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. # # Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle # Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi‐ cle. 368 Breakdown assistance Towing eye storage location Installing the towing eye * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be dam‐ aged in the process. # Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow away or tow start the vehicle. # Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle during recovery. Towing eye 1 is located under the trunk floor. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the towing eye may be located at another position in the trunk. Tow-starting the vehicle (emergency engine start) # # # Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove. Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten. Make sure that cover 1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye. * NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐ mission due to tow-starting Tow-starting the vehicle can damage the automatic transmission. # Do not tow-start the vehicle. # Do not tow-start the vehicle. Breakdown assistance 369 Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa‐ ded. This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci‐ fied new fuses containing the correct amperage. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func‐ tionality may be significantly impaired. # Only use fuses that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognized by the color and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and fur‐ ther information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: in the vehicle docu‐ ment wallet. * NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box. # When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor‐ rectly on the fuse box. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special‐ ist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R R All electrical consumers are switched off. The ignition is switched off. The electrical fuses are located in the following fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side (/ page 369) R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (/ page 371) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 372) R Fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 372) Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment Requirements: Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 369). R Have the following tools readily available: A dry cloth R 370 Breakdown assistance - A screwdriver with an appropriate head # Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be an electrical component 2 on the fuse box lid. If present, unscrew screw 3 and put the component to the side without disconnecting the electrical connection. # If present, release hoses 4 from the retain‐ ing clips on the fuse box and vehicle body. Opening % Depending on the vehicle equipment, access to the fuse box may be limited. MercedesBenz recommends consulting a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open When the engine hood is open and the wind‐ shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before opening the engine hood. # # Release the rotary catches on cover 1 and pull the cover up and out. Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. Breakdown assistance 371 # # # # # If present, release hoses 5 from the retain‐ ing clips in the engine compartment and vehicle body. Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit # Unscrew screws 6 and fold out bar 7. Unscrew screws 8 and remove fuse box lid 9 to the side. Closing Check whether the seal is positioned cor‐ rectly in lid 9. # Place lid 9 on the fuse box and tighten screws 8. # Fold back bar 7 and tighten screws 6. # # If present, engage hoses 5 in the retaining clips in the engine compartment and vehicle body. If present, engage hoses 4 in the retaining clips on the fuse box and vehicle body. If present, insert electrical component 2 into the holder on the fuse box lid and tighten screws 3. Insert cover 1 and engage the rotary catches. Requirements: R Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 369). 372 Breakdown assistance # Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it. # Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell Requirements: R Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 369). # Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it. Opening and closing the fuse box in the trunk Requirements: R Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 369). Fold cover 1 down in the direction of the arrow. Wheels and tires 373 Notes on noise or unusual handling charac‐ teristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehi‐ cle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire dam‐ age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tire is malfunctioning, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires & WARNING Risk of injury through dam‐ aged tires Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. & WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insufficient tire tread Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. R R R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. Check the valve caps. Visual check of the tire tread depth and the tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in (4 mm). Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tires: â in (3 mm) R M+S tires: ãin (4 mm) # For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached. Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg‐ ularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving offroad: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 375). Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tire tread depth of approx‐ imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. 374 Wheels and tires Notes on snow chains & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect mounting of snow chains If you have mounted snow chains to the front wheels, the snow chains may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. # Never mount snow chains on the front wheels. # Only mount snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs. * NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to mounted snow chains If you mount snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo‐ nents of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only mount snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles. Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are installed, the maximum permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. R Vehicles with level control: If snow chains are installed, only drive at raised vehicle level (/ page 257). R Vehicles with rear axle steering: If snow chains are installed, only drive with snow chain mode active (/ page 374). % You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (/ page 222). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force. Activating or deactivating snow chain mode Multimedia system: 4 © 5 ß 5 y # Activate or deactivate Snow Chain Mode. When the function is active, the vehicle behaves as if snow chains were mounted. For example, the maximum steering movement of the rear wheels is limited. Additionally, parts of the driving and driving safety systems are not available when snow chain mode is active. Wheels and tires 375 Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ ficient or excessive tire pressure Tires with either too low or too high a pres‐ sure present the following hazards: R the tires could burst R the tires could wear excessively and/or unevenly R the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking characteristics may be severely impaired # R R R R Observe the recommended tire pres‐ sures and check the tire pressure of all tires including the spare wheel: monthly if altering the load on the vehicle prior to long journeys if the operating conditions change, for example when driving off-road # Adjust the tire pressure where neces‐ sary. Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning. & WARNING Risk of accident due to too low a tire pressure Tires with pressure that is too low can over‐ heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak‐ ing properties and the handling characteris‐ tics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressure. Tire pressure which is too low can cause: Tire malfunctions as a result of overheating R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R R Increased fuel consumption & WARNING Risk of accident due to too high a tire pressure Tires with excessively high pressure can burst. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak‐ ing properties and the handling characteris‐ tics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures. Tire pressure which is too high can cause: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage 376 Wheels and tires & WARNING Risk of accident due to repea‐ ted pressure drop in the tires The wheels, valves or tires could be dam‐ aged. Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires bursting. # Examine the tires for foreign objects. # Check whether the tire has a puncture or the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. You can find information on tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar of your vehicle (/ page 380). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (/ page 376). Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 386). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. Only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile (1.6 km). The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem: You can also see the tire pressure in the driver display. The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect the ride comfort. & WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable accessories on tire valves If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. % The data shown in the images is example data. Wheels and tires 377 Checking the tire pressure manually Read the tire pressure recommended for the current operating conditions from the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure. # Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked. # Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. # Read the tire pressure. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recom‐ mended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. # If the tire pressure is higher than the recom‐ mended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen, for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge. # Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 375) # If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for those tire sizes and their respective load condition. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num‐ bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this. Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 387). R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 380) R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 386) 378 Wheels and tires R R Tire pressure table (/ page 376) Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 380) Tire pressure monitoring system Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem & DANGER Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect tire pressure Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommen‐ ded by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehi‐ cle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter‐ mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor‐ ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐ ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu‐ minates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi‐ cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han‐ dling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi‐ bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres‐ sure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys‐ tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumina‐ ted, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea‐ sons, including the installation of replace‐ ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi‐ cle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. The system checks the tire pressure and the tire temperature of the tires installed on the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear in the driver display (/ page 379). If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages (/ page 555) or the h warning lamp in the instrument cluster (/ page 577). Wheels and tires 379 The tire pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val‐ ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 379). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R Incorrect reference values were taught in R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tire, for example R There is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres‐ sure monitoring system Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. Driver display: 4 © 5 Service # Select Tire Pressure and confirm with a. One of the following displays appears: R Current tire pressure of each wheel: R R Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes. Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being moni‐ tored. Compare the tire pressure with the recom‐ mended tire pressure for the current operat‐ ing condition (/ page 376). Additionally, observe the notes on cold tires (/ page 375). % The values displayed in the driver display may deviate from those of the tire pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high ele‐ vations, the tire pressure values indicated by a tire pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the driver display. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 375) # Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on each of the four wheels (/ page 375). Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has been changed. 380 Wheels and tires R The wheels or tires have been changed or newly installed. Driver display: 4 © 5 Service # Select Tire Pressure and confirm with a. # Swipe down on Touch Control on the steering wheel. The driver display shows the Use current pressures as new reference values? mes‐ sage. # Select Yes and confirm the restart with a. The driver display shows the Tire Pressure Monitor Restarted message. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow h warning lamp goes out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the cur‐ rent tire pressures are within the specified range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 375) Loading the vehicle Notes on Tire and Loading Information plac‐ ard & WARNING Risk of accident from overloa‐ ded tires Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteris‐ tics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load rating of the tires. # The load rating must be at least half the permissible axle load of the vehicle. # Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle. 1 Tire and Loading Information placard Wheels and tires 381 R R Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage. Recommended tire pressure 1 for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. Please also note: Information on permissible weights and loads on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 492). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pres‐ sure table (/ page 376). R % The data shown in the illustration is example data. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the following information: R Maximum number of seats 2 according to the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle. Further related subjects: Determining the maximum permissible load (/ page 381) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 375). R Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur‐ suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # (1): Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. # (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. # (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. # (4): The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas‐ sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐ ble cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) # (5): Determine the combined weight of lug‐ gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the availa‐ 382 Wheels and tires # ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula‐ ted in Step 4. (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter‐ mine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. % Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Even if you have calculated the total load care‐ fully, you should still make sure that the maxi‐ mum permissible gross weight and the maxi‐ mum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehi‐ cle identification plate. # Have your loaded vehicle – including driver, occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate. Further related subjects: R Calculation example for determining the max‐ imum load (/ page 382) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 380) R Tire pressure table (/ page 376) R Vehicle identification plate (/ page 492) Calculation example for determining the maximum load The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehi‐ cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 380). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage. Step 1 Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Example 1 Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Wheels and tires 383 Step 2 Example 1 Example 2 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) Example 1 Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg) Step 3 Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) 384 Wheels and tires Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling 5 Manufacturer 6 Tire characteristics (/ page 387) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (/ page 387) 8 Tire name % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Tire Quality Grading In accordance with the US Department of Trans‐ portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand‐ ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three per‐ formance factors: 1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire Identification Number 3 Maximum tire load (/ page 386) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 386) 1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade % The data shown in the illustration is example data. % The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated. Tread wear grade The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1\1/2\) Wheels and tires 385 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas‐ ured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con‐ crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Traction grade Temperature grade & DANGER Risk of accident due to inade‐ quate traction The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests. # Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin # Avoid wheelspin. & WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possi‐ ble tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pres‐ sure. # Regularly check the pressure of all the tires. # Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐ tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man‐ ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced. 386 Wheels and tires R R R % The data shown in the image is example data. The TIN is a unique identification number to identify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manu‐ facturer identification code 2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 392). Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Manufacturing date: manufacturing date 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008). % The data shown in the image is example data. Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissi‐ ble weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci‐ fied load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv‐ er's side (/ page 380). Specifications for maximum tire pressure Information on the maximum tire load % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Wheels and tires 387 Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 speci‐ fied for the tire. Always observe the recommen‐ ded tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (/ page 376). Information on tire characteristics % The data shown in the image is example data. This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall 1 and under tire tread 2. Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index & WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ ing the specified tire load-bearing capa‐ city or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 First letter(s) Nominal tire width in millimeters Aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load-bearing index Speed rating Load index % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. 388 Wheels and tires First letter(s) 1: R Without: passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu‐ facturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. Aspect ratio 3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in per‐ cent (tire height divided by tire width). Tire code 4 (tire type): R "R" radial tire R "D": bias ply tire R "B": bias belted tires R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above 149 mph (240 km/h) (optional) Rim diameter 5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index 6: Numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre‐ sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of your vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 380) R Maximum tire load (/ page 386) R Load index Speed rating 7: Specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. % An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) Wheels and tires 389 Index Speed rating ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR1 over 149 mph (240 km/h) R R R 1 2 Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code 4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h). If your tire code 4 includes "ZR" and there is no speed rating 7, find out what the max‐ imum speed is from the tire manufacturer. If load-bearing index 6 and speed rating 7 are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To find out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer. "ZR" stated in the tire code. Or "M+Si" for winter tires. All-weather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) Q Winter tires bear the i snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu‐ facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. Load index 8: No specification given: standard load (SL) tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein‐ forced tire R "Light Load": light load tire R R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubbercoated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly‐ ester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOTmarked tires fulfill the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi‐ cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg). 390 Wheels and tires Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer follow‐ ing specifications from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommen‐ ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac‐ tory. The tire and information table contains the rec‐ ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max‐ imum permissible load and the maximum per‐ missible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen‐ ded tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum permissible axle load. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso‐ ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug‐ gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli‐ cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci‐ fied on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maximum load and the weight of optional equip‐ ment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side wall of the tire. This specifies the loadbearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand‐ ard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if Wheels and tires 391 these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi‐ mum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi‐ mum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the pur‐ chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur‐ er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric‐ tion between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi‐ tions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi‐ nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. 392 Wheels and tires Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires & WARNING Risk of injury through incor‐ rect sizes of wheels and tires If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the wheel brakes or components in the brake system and in the wheel suspen‐ sion may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. For wheels, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Type For tires, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Manufacturer R Type & WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ ing the specified tire load-bearing capa‐ city or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. * NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through tire types and sizes that have not been approved For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tire only for certain wheels) MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer‐ tain AMG tires) Otherwise, certain properties, such as han‐ dling characteristics, vehicle noise emis‐ sions, consumption, etc. could be adversely affected. Furthermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehi‐ cle. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz. * NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea‐ ded tires Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom‐ mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. Wheels and tires 393 For this reason driving safety cannot be guar‐ anteed. # Do not use used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. * NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when driving over obstacles Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tires being damaged when driv‐ ing over obstacles increases. # Avoid obstacles or drive especially care‐ fully. # Reduce your speed when driving over curbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes. # Avoid particularly high curbs. * NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes Parking on curbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tires. # # If possible, park only on flat surfaces. Avoid curbs and potholes when parking. * NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tire-mounting tools Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used in the area of the valve. This could otherwise damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop only. * NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, caus‐ ing permanent damage to the tires. # At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use i M+S tires. Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations & WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly. 394 Wheels and tires # # Use i M+S tires at outside temper‐ atures of less than 50 °F (10 °C). Only use the tires for their intended pur‐ pose. Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. R Only use tires and wheels of the same type (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right). It is only permissible to install a different wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: All installed wheels must be equip‐ ped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R R R R R R At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use win‐ ter tires or all-season tires marked i M+S for all wheels. Winter tires provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. For M+S tires, only use tires with the same tread. Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tires installed. If the tire's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. When replacing with tires that do not fea‐ ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires. For more information on wheels and tires, con‐ tact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 375) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 380) R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (/ page 387) R Tire pressure table (/ page 376) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel (/ page 401) Notes on rotating wheels & WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐ ent wheel sizes Rotating the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. Wheels and tires 395 The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimen‐ sions. The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ: R Front wheels wear more on the tire shoulder R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the tire Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 396). Notes on storing wheels R R Chock Lug wrench The tire-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1 on the trunk floor. When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease or fuel. Overview of the tire-change tool kit Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐ cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Required tire-changing tools may include, for example: R Jack The tool bag contains: Jack R Gloves R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack R 396 Wheels and tires Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change Requirements: R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground. R The required tire-change tool kit is available. % If your vehicle is not equipped with the tirechange tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. # Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. # Shift the transmission to position j. # Vehicles with level control system: Set the normal vehicle level (/ page 257). # Switch off the engine. # Make sure that the engine cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diago‐ nally opposite the wheel you wish to change. # # Remove the hub cap if necessary (/ page 396). Raise the vehicle (/ page 396). Removing and installing the wheel trim/hub caps Requirements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (/ page 396). Aluminum hub cap # To remove: position socket 2 from the tirechange tool kit on hub cap 1. Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2. Using wheel wrench 3, turn hub cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. # To install: follow the instructions above in reverse order. % Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). # # Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (/ page 396). R The hub caps have been removed (/ page 396). Important notes on using the jack: R Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a Wheels and tires 397 R R wheel is being changed and not for mainte‐ nance work under the vehicle. The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. The foot of the jack must be positioned verti‐ cally under the jack support point. R Do not open or close any doors or the trunk lid. Position of jack support points # Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: Never place your hands and/or feet under the vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the engine and do not release the electric parking brake. R Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com‐ pletely. & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropri‐ ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle. 398 Wheels and tires # * NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi‐ cle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup‐ port points. # Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 398). Removing a wheel Requirements: R The vehicle is raised. When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking. Take the ratchet wrench out of the tirechange tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible. * NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts # # # # Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack sup‐ port point 1. Turn ratchet wrench 3 clockwise until jack support 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. Continue to turn ratchet wrench 3 until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. # Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com‐ pletely. Wheels and tires 399 bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ wheel nuts to come loose. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐ aged hub threads replaced. # Do not continue driving. # # # Screw alignment bolt 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com‐ pletely. Remove the wheel. Installing a new wheel & WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting # Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 392). For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc‐ tion of rotation when installing. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on. & WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. # # Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 392). For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by MercedesBenz and for the wheel in question. * NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing in the first wheel bolt If the wheel has too much play when screw‐ ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel firmly against the wheel hub when screwing in the first wheel bolt. 400 Wheels and tires # # # # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight. Unscrew and remove the alignment bolt. Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. Lower the vehicle (/ page 400). # To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the let‐ ters "AB" are visible and turn counter-clock‐ wise. Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change Requirements: R The new wheel has been installed (/ page 399). * NOTE Risk of trapping the jack If the AIRMATIC system has released air when raising the vehicle, the jack can become trapped when the vehicle is lowered. # Start the engine. This adapts the vehi‐ cle level. # Remove the jack from under the vehi‐ cle. # # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with an initial maximum force of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm). Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with the specified tightening torque of 111 lb-ft (150 Nm). & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect tightening torque The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque. # Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. # If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening tor‐ que checked immediately. # Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary. % The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel. # Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 379). Wheels and tires 401 Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel & WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions The wheel or tire size and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. # Never install more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size. # Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size briefly. # Do not switch off ESP®. # Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work‐ shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions. % The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the trunk. Observe the following notes on installing an emergency spare wheel: R Check the tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as necessary. R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). R Do not install the emergency spare wheel with snow chains. R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R Use the wheel bolts that are included with the emergency spare wheel. Specified tightening torque: 96 lb-ft (130 Nm) % Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed, the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 375) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 380) R Tire pressure table (/ page 376) R Notes on installing tires (/ page 392) 402 Technical data Notes on technical data The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicle electronics Two-way radios Notes on installing two-way radios & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofit‐ ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in partic‐ ular: R The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior antenna. R The exterior antenna is installed incor‐ rectly or is not a low-reflection antenna. This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior antenna installed at a qualified special‐ ist workshop. # When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior antenna. * NOTE Invalidation of the operating per‐ mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out‐ put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions. Technical data 403 retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing. Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table: Frequency band and maximum transmission output Frequency band Vehicles without panoramic sliding sunroof 1 Rear roof area On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an antenna is not permitted. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when Maximum transmis‐ sion output 2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz 10 W Frequency band Maximum transmis‐ sion output 70 cm frequency band 430 - 470 MHz 35 W Two-way radio 2G 2W Two-way radio 3G/4G/5G 0.5 W The following devices can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R Two-way radios with a maximum transmis‐ sion output of up to 100 mW R Two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 420 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA) R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G) 404 Technical data There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol‐ lowing frequency bands: R TETRA R 2G/3G/4G/5G Regulatory radio identification of small components Not all regulatory radio identification can be applied to small components due to their geo‐ metric dimensions. Therefore, the following tables list the manufacturers of these compo‐ nents and the countries/regions with the identi‐ fication required by radio regulations. Overview of manufacturers Manufac‐ turer's abbrevi‐ ated des‐ ignation Manufacturer information ADC ADC Automotive Distance Con‐ trol Systems GmbH, Peter-Dor‐ nier-Straße 10, 88131 Lindau, Germany Bosch Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimler‐ straße 6, 71229 Leonberg, Ger‐ many Continental Antenna Continental Advanced Antenna GmbH, Römerring 1, 31137 Hil‐ desheim, Germany Continental Automotive Continental Automotive GmbH, Siemensstraße 12, 93055 Regensburg, Germany Gentex Gentex Corporation, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA Manufac‐ turer's abbrevi‐ ated des‐ ignation Manufacturer information HELLA HELLA KGaA Hueck & Co., Rix‐ becker Straße 75, 59552 Lipp‐ stadt, Germany Hirsch‐ mann Hirschmann Car Communica‐ tion GmbH, Stuttgarter Straße 45-51, 72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany Huf Bao‐ long Huf Baolong Electronics Bretten GmbH, Gewerbestraße 40, 75015 Bretten, Germany HUF HUF Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Straße 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany KATHREIN KATHREIN Automotive GmbH & Co. KG, Römerring 1, 31137 Hil‐ desheim, Germany Technical data 405 Manufac‐ turer's abbrevi‐ ated des‐ ignation Manufacturer information Manufac‐ turer's abbrevi‐ ated des‐ ignation Manufacturer information LEOPOLD KOSTAL LEOPOLD KOSTAL GmbH & Co. KG, Hauert 11, 44227 Dort‐ mund, Germany Veoneer Veoneer Sweden AB, Wallentins‐ vägen 22, 44737 Vårgårda, Sweden MAR‐ QUARDT MARQUARDT GmbH, Schloßstraße 16, 78604 Rie‐ theim-Weilheim, Germany WITTE-Vel‐ bert WITTE-Velbert GmbH & Co. KG, Hoeferstr. 3-15, 42551 Velbert, Germany Meta Sys‐ tem Meta System S.P.A., Via T. Galimbreti 5, 42124 Reggio Emi‐ lia, Italy Panasonic Panasonic Automotive Systems Europe GmbH, Robert-BoschStraße 27, 63225 Langen, Ger‐ many Schrader Schrader Electronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ire‐ land, United Kingdom Argentina Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) C-18005 ADC ARS4-B (radar sen‐ C-17908 sor) ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) C-23776 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) C-21798 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) C-20030 406 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) H-23855 Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) Huf Baolong RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) H-15475 TSSRE4A (tire pressure monitor sensor) H-20027 Continental Antenna HUF RKE223E1 (antenna amplifier) H-24637 HUF14632 (lock‐ ing system) H-15541 Continental Antenna H-23974 DI-2019-9 794-APNDNAYRT# ENACOM Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) H-24376 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) H-17929 HELLA DM4 (locking sys‐ tem) H-17845 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) H-11545 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) H-15694 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking sys‐ tem) H-16874 Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) H-15695 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking system) H-17689 Technical data 407 Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking system) H-21034 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking sys‐ tem) H-17213 Schrader H-4788 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking system) H-21035 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking sys‐ tem) H-17212 AG5SP4 (tire pres‐ sure monitor sen‐ sor) Schrader H-20495 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking sys‐ tem) H-17598 MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) H-23166 GG4T (tire pres‐ sure monitor sen‐ sor) MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking sys‐ tem) H-23101 MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (locking sys‐ tem) H-23102 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sensor) H-20959 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking sys‐ tem) H-24933 MAR‐ QUARDT MU2 (locking sys‐ tem) H-24936 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) C-23670 408 Technical data Australia Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equipment approval number (if available) Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) C-23672 Huf Baolong — Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) EXPENA‐ COM 9967/201 7 TSSRE4A (tire pressure monitor sensor) Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6 (tire pressure monitor sensor) — SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) H-24664 Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tire pressure monitor sensor) — Schrader AG5SP4 (tire pressure monitor sensor) — WITTE-Vel‐ bert Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equipment approval number (if available) Schrader GG4T (tire pres‐ — sure monitor sen‐ sor) Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sensor) — Technical data 409 Bahamas Belarus Manu‐ facturer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) FCC ID: WU877V12BSM Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) FCC ID: WU877V12CRN Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (antenna ampli‐ fier) — Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) — Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) — HELLA DM4 (locking sys‐ tem) — Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking system) — MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking system) — MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking system) — MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking sys‐ tem) — MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking sys‐ tem) — 410 Technical data Botswana Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking sys‐ tem) — MAR‐ QUARDT MU2 (locking sys‐ tem) — MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking sys‐ tem) — WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) — MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking sys‐ tem) — MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (locking sys‐ tem) — Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/ 2018/2026 ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4582 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4975 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/ 2017/3788 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) BOCRA/TA/ 2017/4387 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GN S (antenna amplifier) BOCRA/TA/ 2017/5050 Technical data 411 Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Continental Automotive CMKG1 (lock‐ ing system) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/5075 HUF BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4664 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/ 2020/5473 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ tem) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4661 HUF4761 (locking sys‐ tem) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4593 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4359 HELLA DM4 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4662 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (lock‐ ing system) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4389 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4360 Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys‐ tem) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4724 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (lock‐ ing system) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4388 MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (lock‐ BOCRA/TA/ ing system) 2019/4687 920287B (locking sys‐ tem) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4723 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (lock‐ ing system) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4390 MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4759 BOCRA/TA/ 2019/5135 AG5SP4 (tire pressure mon‐ itor sensor) No. 1967 No. 20233 MS2 (locking system) Schrader TSSRE4A (tire pressure mon‐ itor sensor) MAR‐ QUARDT MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4758 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4975 Hirschmann Huf Baolong 412 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4980 WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ tem) BOCRA/TA/ 20205342 Brazil Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) ADC ARS4-C (radar sen‐ sor) 06783-19-0249 6 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen‐ sor) 06351-19-0374 5 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) 3691-15-5298 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking sys‐ tem) 00325-20-0214 9 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Continental Automotive MARS Key‐ less (locking system) 03189-17-0285 6 HELLA DM4 (locking 04689-17-0536 system) 4 Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys‐ tem) 1855-12-5762 Hirschmann 920287B (locking sys‐ tem) 1787-12-8058 Technical data 413 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) HUF HUF14632 (locking sys‐ tem) 03627-15-0664 3 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking system) 00616-17-0293 0 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking system) 03757-15-0293 0 HUF HUF4761 (locking sys‐ tem) 00053-13-0664 3 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking system) 06218-19-0293 0 Veoneer 06468-19-1238 6 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (lock‐ ing system) 01333-17-0293 0 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking system) 11149-20-0293 0 77V12BSM (radar sen‐ sor) Veoneer DC12B (lock‐ ing system) 01395-11-0293 0 3350.38 (locking sys‐ tem) 03149-19-0293 0 06352-19-1238 6 MAR‐ QUARDT MAR‐ QUARDT 77V12CRN (radar sen‐ sor) DC12K (lock‐ ing system) 01392-11-0293 0 MK1 (locking system) 03756-15-0293 0 SDHTAG3NF C (locking system) 03034-20-0701 8 MAR‐ QUARDT MAR‐ QUARDT WITTE-Vel‐ bert 414 Technical data Brunei Darussalam Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) ADC ARS4-C (radar sen‐ sor) DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-10 90000 DTA-004005 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen‐ sor) DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-004222 LRR3 (radar sensor) DRQ-DMAJU-02-2011-1 11083LPD-31820 Bosch Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen‐ sor) DRQDMAJU-02-201111108 3LPD-31504 Continental Antenna RKE223E1G NS (antenna amplifier) DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-004998 Bosch MRRe14FC R (radar sensor) DTA-000793 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-006665 DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-005043 Continental Automotive MARS Key‐ less (lock‐ ing system) DRQ-DMAJU-02-2011-1 11083LPD-39004 Technical data 415 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation HELLA DM4 (lock‐ ing system) DRQDJATI-07-2000-1 09000 DTA-000351 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tire pres‐ sure moni‐ tor sensor) DTA No. 000310 Huf Baolong Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) DRQDJATI-07-2000-1 09000 DTA-001661 Huf Baolong DTA No. 000311 HUF 920287B (locking system) DRQDMAJU-02-2011111083 DTA-000794 TSSSG4G6 (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sensor) TSSSG4G6b DTA No. 003757 (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sensor) HUF14632 (locking system) DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-006138 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-000615 Hirschmann Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) 416 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (lock‐ ing system) DTL-DMAJU-02-2011-1 11083 DTA-007245 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking system) DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-000066 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (lock‐ ing system) DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-005850 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking system) DRQDJATI-07-2000-8 916-LPD-38937 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (lock‐ ing system) DRQDJATI-07-2000-8 916- LPD-38890 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (lock‐ ing system) DRQDJATI-07-2000-8 916- LPD-33567 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking system) DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-000068 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (lock‐ ing system) DRQDJATI-07-2000-1 09000 DTA-003525 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (lock‐ ing system) DRQDJATI-07-2000-8 916- LPD-33568 MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) DRQDJATI-07-2000-1 09000 DTA-003662 Technical data 417 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (lock‐ ing system) DRQDJATI-07-2000-1 09000 DTA-003524 Schrader AG5SP4 (tire pres‐ sure moni‐ tor sensor) Schrader MU2 (lock‐ ing system) DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-005843 MFR (con‐ trol unit) (tire pres‐ sure moni‐ tor sensor) DTA No. 003893 MAR‐ QUARDT DRQ-D-QAF AUTO-05-2003-1 089 4LPD-29559 DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-89 16LPD-29665 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen‐ sor) DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-004000 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen‐ sor) DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-003999 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pres‐ sure moni‐ tor sensor) DTA-001514 418 Technical data Ghana Manufac‐ turer Manufac‐ turer Veoneer WITTE-Vel‐ bert Model des‐ ignation Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking sys‐ tem) ZROM8-7E3-277 Continental Automotive MARS Key‐ less (locking system) BR3-1MGE2-16A HELLA DM4 (lock‐ ing system) BR3-1MGE2-157 Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) ADC 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sen‐ sor) DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-89 16-LPD-30870 ARS4-B (radar sen‐ sor) 1R3-1M-7E1-16 0 ADC ZRO-1H-7E3-15 2 SDHTAG3N FC (locking system) DRQ-DJATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-005628 ARS4-C (radar sen‐ sor) Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen‐ sor) ZR0M8-7E3-230 Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys‐ tem) ZRO-M8-7E3X45 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) ZRO-M8-7E3X53 Hirschmann 920287B (locking sys‐ tem) ZRO-M8-7E3X47 Continental Antenna RKE223E1G NS (antenna amplifier) ZROM8-7E3-225 HUF EX6-6MGE2-16C NCA APPROVED HUF4761 (locking sys‐ tem) Technical data 419 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3X49 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking ZRO-M8-7E3system) X4A MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (lock‐ ZRO-M8-7E3ing system) X50 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking ZRO-M8-7E3system) X4C MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (lock‐ ing system) MAR‐ QUARDT ZRO-M8-7E3X3C MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (lock‐ ZRO-M8-7E3ing system) X52 3350.38 (locking sys‐ tem) MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking BR3-1M-GE-129 system) MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (lock‐ ing system) ZROM8-7E3-272 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Veoneer MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking ZRO-1H-7E3-26 system) E 77V12BSM (radar sen‐ sor) ZRO-1H-7E3-14 2 Radio equipment approval number (if available) ADC ARS4-A (radar sen‐ sor) 36010/SDPPI/ 2017 2130 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking SRO-1M-7E4-11 system) B ADC ARS4-B (radar sen‐ sor) 38132/SDPPI/ 2017 2130 ZRO-M8-7E3X51 Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen‐ sor) ZR0M8-7E3-230 WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3NF C (locking system) SRO-1M-7E4X59 Indonesia 420 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) ADC ARS4-C (radar sen‐ sor) 68676/SDPPI/ 2020 ADC ARS4-A (radar sen‐ sor) 70266/SDPPI/ 2020 7163 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen‐ sor) 67882/SDPPI/ 2020 Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) 40556/SDPPI/ 2018 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen‐ sor) 34538/SDPPI/ 2017 Bosch MRRe14FCR 53078/SDPPI/ (radar sen‐ 2017 sor) PLG3612 Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Technical data 421 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Continen‐ tal Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) 41771/SDPPI/ 2018 5205 Continen‐ tal Antenna RKE223E1G NS (antenna amplifier) 66185/SDPPI/ 2020 10325 Continen‐ tal Auto‐ motive DWMI2020A (control unit) 66678/SDPPI/ 2020 7163 Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya 422 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Continen‐ tal Auto‐ motive CMKG1 66911/ SDPPI/ (locking sys‐ 2020 7163 tem) Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Continen‐ tal Auto‐ motive MARS Key‐ 69379/SDPPI/ less (locking 2020 7163 system) Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) HELLA DM4 (lock‐ ing system) 69378/SDPPI/ 2020 7163 Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Technical data 423 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Hirsch‐ mann Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation 920287A 29510/SDPPI/ (locking sys‐ 2016 3159 tem) KATHREI N RKE213E1 41771/SDPPI/ (locking sys‐ 2018 5205 tem) Hirsch‐ mann 920287B 28238/SDPPI/ (locking sys‐ 2016 3159 tem) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (lock‐ ing system) Huf Bao‐ long TSSRE4A (tire pres‐ sure moni‐ tor sensor) HUF HUF14632 41618/SDPPI/ (locking sys‐ 2018 3533 tem) HUF HUF4761 26742/SDPPI/ (locking sys‐ 2015 3533 tem) 52166/SDPPI/ 2017 3533 Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A 67373/SDPPI/ (locking sys‐ 2020 7163 tem) 41121/SDPPI/ 2018 5125 Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya 424 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B 59840/SDPPI/ (locking sys‐ 2019 7163 tem) Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K 59838/SDPPI/ (locking sys‐ 2019 7163 tem) Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (lock‐ ing system) 67372/SDPPI/ 2020 7163 Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Technical data 425 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (lock‐ ing system) 64126/SDPPI/ 2019 7163 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (lock‐ ing system) 69077/SDPPI/ 2020 7163 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (lock‐ ing system) 40283/SDPPI/ 2018 2208 Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya 426 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (lock‐ ing system) 40282/SDPPI/ 2018 2208 MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 62233/SDPPI/ (locking sys‐ 2019 7163 tem) Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Radio equipment approval number (if available) Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Pana‐ sonic DAIRSE 63550/SDPPI/ 2019 Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Technical data 427 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Schrader GG4T (tire pressure monitor sensor) 54083/SDPPI/ 2017 PLG3612 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sen‐ sor) 40524/R/I/ SDPPI/2018 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen‐ sor) 66830/SDPPI/ 2020 7163 Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pres‐ sure moni‐ tor sensor) 38892/SDPPI/ 2018 3612 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pres‐ sure moni‐ tor sensor) 57058/SDPPI/ 2018 PLG3612 Schrader MC34MA4 (tire pres‐ sure moni‐ tor sensor) 25626/SDPPI/ 2015 PLG3612 Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya 428 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen‐ sor) 66792/SDPPI/ 2020 7163 WITTEVelbert SDHTAG3N FC (locking system) 67233/SDPPI/ 2020 10325 Jamaica Dilarang melaku‐ kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul‐ kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektro‐ magnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitar‐ nya Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking sys‐ tem) SMA – CMKG1 HELLA DM4 (locking NBGDM4 system) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (lock‐ ing system) SMA - DC12A MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (lock‐ ing system) SMA - DC12B Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (lock‐ ing system) SMA - DC12K MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking system) SMA - MS2 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking system) SMA - MS4 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking system) SMA - MS5 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking system) SMA - MK1 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking system) SMA - MK2 MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys‐ tem) SMA - 3350.38 Technical data 429 Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion MU1 (locking SMA - MU1 system) Radio equipment approval number (if available) Radio equipment approval number (if available) ADC SDHTAG3NF C (locking system) ARS4-C (radar sensor) T/ 4/11/11/6 676 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (antenna ampli‐ fier) T/ 4/11/11/9 682 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) T/ 4/11/11/6 645 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) T/ 4/11/11/1 799 Bosch LRR3 (radar sen‐ sor) TRC/LPD/ 2009/15 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) TRC/LPD/ 2017/183 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) TRC/LPD/ 2014/73 Gentex EUROII (conveni‐ ence system) TRC/LPD/ 2014/258 Gentex MUAHL 5 (conve‐ nience system) T/ 4/11/11/8 462 HELLA DM4 (locking sys‐ T/ tem) 4/11/11/5 472 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation MAR‐ QUARDT WITTE-Vel‐ bert Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) SMA – DAG SDH TAG3 NFC Jordan Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equipment approval number (if available) ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TRC/LPD/ 2014/126 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) TRC/LPD/ 2017/254 ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor) TRC/LPD/ 2014/248 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna ampli‐ fier) T/ 4/11/11/6 775 430 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Hirsch‐ mann Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equipment approval number (if available) 920287A (locking T/ system) 4/11/11/1 0883 HUF HUF14632 (lock‐ ing system) T/ 4/11/11/4 355 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking system) T/ 4/11/11/9 430 Hirsch‐ mann 920287B (locking TRC/LPD/ system) 2012/53 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TRC/LPD/ 2012/144 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking sys‐ tem) Huf Bao‐ long TSSRE4A (tire pressure monitor sensor) TRC/LPD/ 2017/421 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking sys‐ tem) T/ 4/11/11/8 705 T/ 4/11/11/6 493 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking sys‐ tem) Huf Bao‐ long TSSSG4G6 (con‐ trol unit) (tire pressure monitor sensor) TRC/LPD/ 2017/422 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking system) T/ 4/11/11/1 899 T/ 4/11/11/2 512 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking sys‐ tem) Huf Bao‐ long TSSSG4G6b (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sensor) TRC/LPD/ 2017/175 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking system) T/ 4/11/11/9 429 T/ 4/11/11/3 509 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking sys‐ tem) TRC/ 34/7629/2 020 Technical data 431 Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equipment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking sys‐ tem) TRC/ 34/7630/2 020 Schrader GG4T (tire pres‐ sure monitor sen‐ sor) TRC/LPD/ 2017/456 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TRC/LPD/ 2015/161 MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) T/ 4/11/11/7 431 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sensor) TRC/LPD/ 2018/139 WITTE-Vel‐ bert SGHTAG3NFC (locking system) T/ 4/11/11/2 635 MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (locking sys‐ T/ tem) 4/11/11/2 511 Schrader MC34MA4 (tire pressure monitor sensor) TRC/LPD/ 2011/158 Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sensor) TRC/LPD/ 2019/21 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar T/ sensor) 4/11/11/5 557 Schrader MFR (control unit) (tire pres‐ sure monitor sen‐ sor) TRC/LPD/ 2019/184 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) T/ 4/11/11/5 556 432 Technical data Canada Manu‐ facturer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) IC: 4135AARS4C Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen‐ sor) IC: 3887AFR5CPC CF Manu‐ facturer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen‐ sor) IC: 8436B-7 7V12BS M Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen‐ sor) IC: 8436B-7 7V12CR N Malaysia Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) ADC ARS4-C (radar sen‐ sor) SQASI/T A/ 19/2872 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) CIDF150 00490 Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) RALM/35 A/0716/ S(16-232 4) Technical data 433 Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) RALM/66 A/0618/ S(18-246 8) Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) RAUU/28 C/0915/ S(15-270 3) Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) RFCP/13 A/0220/ S(20-019 7) Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) RALM/45 A/0517/ S(17-157 6) Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (antenna amplifier) RDDK/34 B/1219/ S(19-531 9) Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) RAAU/51 C/0417/ S(17-103 4) CIDF150 00578 434 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (con‐ trol unit) RGEZ/12 A/1019/ S(19-412 8) Hirsch‐ mann 920287A (locking system) RAUU/63 A/0311/ S(11-043 2) Huf Bao‐ long TSSSG4G6 (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sensor) RAQP/57 A/0817/ S(17-242 4) HELLA DM4 (locking sys‐ tem) RDDK/41 A/0717/ S(17-226 9) CIDF150 00578 Hirsch‐ mann 920287B (locking system) RAUU/22 C/0615/ S(15-186 4) HUF HUF14632 (locking system) RAYN/25 A/0715/ S(15-238 5) Huf Bao‐ long TSSRE4A (tire pres‐ sure monitor sen‐ sor) CIDF170 00184 Technical data 435 Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designation HUF HUF4761 (locking system) RAAU/16 B/1112/ S(12-205 3) MAR‐ QUARDT LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking sys‐ tem) RAUU/27 C/0815/ S(15-295 3) MAR‐ QUARDT Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) DC12A (locking sys‐ RDDK/33 tem) A/0317/ S(17-066 9) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking sys‐ tem) RAUU/62 A/0311/ S(11-026 4) DC12B (locking sys‐ tem) MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking sys‐ tem) RDDK/31 A/0217/ S(17-040 5) RAUU/62 A/0311/ S(11-026 3) 436 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking sys‐ tem) RDDK/25 B/1019/ S(19-094 3) MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking sys‐ tem) RAAU/14 C/0615/ S(15-105 7) MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) RDDK/17 B/0819/ S(19-108 2) MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking sys‐ tem) RGLO/02 A/0720/ S(20-258 0) MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking sys‐ tem) RAAU/12 C/0515/ S(15-105 9) Meta Sys‐ tem ITS/TPS (interior protection) RAVG/18 Q/0212/ S(11-206 8) Technical data 437 Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Meta Sys‐ tem MUW II (interior protection) RAVG/17 Q/0212/ S(11-206 7) Schrader MFR (control unit) (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) RAQP/62 A/ 0419/S (19-1694) Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) SQASI/T A/ 19/2982 Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sensor) RCDD/0 3A/ 0615/ S(19-209 4) Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) RALM/31 A/0316/ S(16-072 7) WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) RDDK/43 B/0420/ S(20-174 9) Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) SQASI/T A/ 19/2980 438 Technical data Morocco Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) MR 9490 ANTR 2014-07-23 ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor) MR 9778 ANTR 2014-11-11 ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) MR 20231 ANTR 2019 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) MR 20575 ANTR 2019 Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) MR 5371 ANTR 2010-02-02 Continental CMKG1 (locking Automotive system) MR 21701 ANTR 2019-12-05 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) MR 9186 ANTR 2014-04-22 Continental MARS Keyless Automotive (locking system) MR 13681 ANTR 2017-04-04 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) MR 13900 ANTR 2017-05-04 HELLA DM4 (locking system) MR 14426 ANTR 2017-07-28 Continental RKE213E1 Antenna (antenna ampli‐ fier) MR 10631 ANTR 2015-07-16 Hirsch‐ mann 920287A (lock‐ ing system) MR 6700 ANTR 2011-11-16 Continental RKE223E1GNS Antenna (antenna ampli‐ fier) MR 21174 ANTR 2019-10-14 Hirsch‐ mann 920287B (lock‐ ing system) MR 7260 ANTR 2012-06-13 Technical data 439 Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Huf Bao‐ long TSSRE4A (tire pressure sen‐ sor) (tire pres‐ sure monitor sensor) MR 14320 ANTR 2017-07-07 HUF HUF4761 (lock‐ ing system) MR 7829 ANTR 2013-02-14 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking system) MR 13300 ANTR 2017-02-15 Huf Bao‐ long TSSSG4G6 (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sensor) MR 14319 ANTR 2017-07-07 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) MR 10697 ANTR 2015-08-05 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking system) MR 19199 ANTR 2019-03-25 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking system) MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking system) Huf Bao‐ long TSSSG4G6b (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sensor) MR 19561 ANTR 2019-04-26 MR 13429 ANTR 2017-03-03 MR 23805 ANRT 22/04/2020 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking system) MR 6698 ANTR 2011-11-16 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking system) MR 10645 ANTR 2015-07-21 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) MR 10506 ANTR 2015-06-22 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking system) MR 6699 ANTR 2011-11-16 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking system) MR 10987 ANTR 2015-10-22 440 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (lock‐ ing system) MR 18817 ANTR 2019-02-12 Schrader MR 19527 ANTR 2019-04-30 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) MR 20097 ANTR 2019 MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (locking system) MR 19200 ANTR 2019-03-25 MFR (control unit) (tire pres‐ sure monitor sensor) Veoneer Schrader MU2 (locking system) MR 23804 ANRT 22/04/2020 MR 14777 ANRT 2017-09-20 MR 20149 ANTR 2019 MAR‐ QUARDT GG4T (tire pres‐ sure monitor sensor) 77V12CRN (radar sensor) WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) Schrader Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure sen‐ sor) (tire pres‐ sure monitor sensor) MR 10216 ANTR 2015-03-18 DG6W2D4 (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) MR 16355 ANTR 2018-04-19 MR 23310 ANRT 10/03/2020 Schrader MC34MA4 (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) MR 6706 ANTR 2011-11-17 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) MR 10436 ANTR 2015 Technical data 441 Mexico Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) ADC ARS4-A (radar sen‐ sor) IFETEL: RCPCOAR14-11 91 ADC ARS4-B (radar sen‐ sor) IFETEL: RLVCOAR15-00 08 ADC ARS4-C (radar sen‐ sor) IFETEL: RLVCOR19-106 2 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen‐ sor) IFETEL: RCPBOFR19-13 56 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPBOLR09-08 28 Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (antenna amplifier) IFETEL: RLVCORK19-21 74 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen‐ sor) IFETEL: RCPBOMR14-0 922 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking sys‐ tem) IFETEL: RCPCOCM19-2 315 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sen‐ sor) IFETEL: RCPBOMR17-0 598 Continental Automotive MARS Key‐ less (locking system) IFETEL: RLVDAMA18-1 827 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) IFETEL: RLVKARK15-17 41 Gentex EURO II (conveni‐ ence sys‐ tem) IFETEL: RCPJOHO07-59 8-A9 442 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Gentex MUAHL 5 (conveni‐ ence sys‐ tem) IFETEL: RCPGEMU15-0 448 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tire pres‐ sure monitor sensor) IFETEL: RLVHUTS17-08 06 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking sys‐ tem) IFETEL: RLVMEDC17-0 348 HELLA DM4 (lock‐ ing system) IFETEL: RLVHEDM17-1 0 HUF HUF14632 (locking sys‐ tem) IFETEL: RLVHUHU15-1 204 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking sys‐ tem) IFETEL: RLVMADC11-0 446 Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys‐ tem) IFETEL: RLVHI9211-047 2 HUF HUF4761 (locking sys‐ tem) IFETEL: RLVHUHU12-1 587 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (inte‐ rior protec‐ tion) IFETEL: RLVMADC11-0 446 Hirschmann 920287B (locking sys‐ tem) IFETEL: RLVHI9212-060 8 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVKOKK15-08 91 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (lock‐ ing system) IFETEL: RLVMAMS17-0 222 Technical data 443 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (lock‐ ing system) IFETEL: RLVMAMS19-0 449 MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys‐ tem) IFETEL: RCPMA3319-0 530 Schrader IFETEL: RCPSCAG15-06 27 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (lock‐ ing system) IFETEL: RLVMEMS20-0 957 MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (lock‐ ing system) IFETEL: RCPMAMU19-1 342 AG5SP4-D (tire pres‐ sure monitor sensor) Schrader MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (lock‐ ing system) IFETEL: RLVMAMK15-1 042 Meta System ITS/TPS (interior pro‐ tection) IFETEL: RLVSCMF15-09 59 Schrader MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (lock‐ ing system) IFETEL: RLVMAMK15-1 043 IFETEL: IFT/223/UCS/ DG-AUSE/ 4871/2016 MFR (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) Meta System MUW II (interior pro‐ tection) IFETEL: IFT/223/UCS/ DG-AUSE/ 5064/2016 GG4T (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) IFETEL: RLVSCGG17-16 65 444 Technical data Moldova Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pres‐ sure monitor sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCDG18-04 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen‐ sor) IFETEL: RLVVE7719-10 63 Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) ADC MD OC TIP 024 A6632-19 Schrader MC34MA4 (tire pres‐ sure monitor sensor) IFETEL: RCPSCMR14-0 62 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen‐ sor) IFETEL: RCPVE7719-09 98 ARS4-C (radar sen‐ sor) Bosch MD OC TIP 024 A6560-19 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sen‐ sor) IFETEL: RLVAU7717-07 44 WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3NF C (locking system) IFETEL: RCPWISD20-09 43 FR5CPCCF (radar sen‐ sor) Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) MD OC TIP 024 A6227-18 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen‐ sor) MD OC TIP 024 A5957-17 Veoneer Technical data 445 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sen‐ sor) MD OC TIP 024 A6004-18 Continental Automotive MARS Key‐ less (locking system) MD OC TIP 024 A5876-17 HUF HUF4761 (locking sys‐ tem) MD OC TIP 024 A6449-19 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) MD OC TIP 024 A6500-19 HELLA DM4 (lock‐ ing system) MD 0C TIP 024 A6761-20 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) MD OC TIP 024 A6440-19 Continental Antenna RKE223E1G NS (antenna amplifier) MD OC TIP 024 A6648-19 Hirsch‐ mann 920287A (locking sys‐ tem) MD OC TIP 024 A6652-20 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking sys‐ tem) MD OC TIP 024 A6684-20 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking sys‐ tem) MD OC TIP 024 A6671-20 Hirsch‐ mann 920287B (locking sys‐ tem) MD OC TIP 024 A6514-19 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (lock‐ MD OC TIP 024 ing system) A6253-18 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking sys‐ tem) MD OC TIP 024 A6252-18 446 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (lock‐ ing system) MD OC TIP 024 A6444-19 MAR‐ QUARDT MD OC TIP 024 A6398-19 Veoneer MS4 (lock‐ ing system) MD OC TIP 024 A6569-19 77V12BSM (radar sen‐ sor) MD OC TIP 024 A6508-19 MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys‐ tem) MS5 (lock‐ ing system) MO OC TIP 024 A6774-20 MU1 (lock‐ ing system) MD OC TIP 024 A6570-19 Veoneer MAR‐ QUARDT MAR‐ QUARDT MD OC TIP 024 A6506-19 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (lock‐ ing system) MD OC TIP 024 A6551-19 MAR‐ QUARDT MU2 (lock‐ ing system) MD OC TIP 024 A6773-20 77V12CRN (radar sen‐ sor) Veoneer MD OC TIP 024 A6753-20 MK2 (lock‐ ing system) MD OC TIP 024 A6552-19 MD OC TIP 024 A5678-16 SDHTAG3NF C (locking system) MAR‐ QUARDT 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sen‐ sor) WITTE-Vel‐ bert Technical data 447 Mongolia Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (lock‐ ing system) A19000372 MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (locking system) A19000517 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking system) A19000289 MAR‐ QUARDT MU2 (locking system) A20000086 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking system) A19000516 WITTE-Vel‐ bert A20000067 A18000329 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking system) A20000085 SDHTAG3NF C (locking system) DC12A (lock‐ ing system) A19000400 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking system) A19000374 DC12B (lock‐ ing system) A19000371 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking system) A19000374 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking sys‐ tem) A19000633 Continental Automotive MARS Key‐ less (locking system) A18000328 HELLA DM4 (locking system) MAR‐ QUARDT MAR‐ QUARDT 448 Technical data Niger Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) 029/ ARCEP/DG/19 MARS Key‐ less (locking system) 083/ ARCEP/DG/19 DM4 (lock‐ ing system) 082/ ARCEP/DG/19 Hirsch‐ mann 920287A (locking sys‐ tem) 097/ ARCEP/DG/19 Hirsch‐ mann 920287B (locking sys‐ tem) 098/ ARCEP/DG/19 Continental Automotive HELLA Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) HUF HUF4761 (locking sys‐ tem) 053/ ARCEP/DG/19 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (lock‐ ing system) 014/ ARCEP/DG/19 KATHREIN RKE213E1 (locking sys‐ tem) 029/ ARCEP/DG/19 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (lock‐ ing system) HOMO-0096/ ARCEP/DG/ 2019 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (lock‐ ing system) 037/ ARCEP/DG/19 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (lock‐ ing system) 034/ ARCEP/DG/19 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking sys‐ tem) 010/ ARCEP/DG/19 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (lock‐ ing system) 035/ ARCEP/DG/19 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking sys‐ tem) 008/ ARCEP/DG/19 MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys‐ tem) 015/ ARCEP/DG/19 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking sys‐ tem) 009/ ARCEP/DG/19 MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (lock‐ ing system) HOMO-0095/ ARCEP/DG/ 2019 Technical data 449 Nigeria Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) ADC ARS4-A (radar sen‐ sor) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ AB00388/2015 ADC ARS4-B (radar sen‐ sor) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 2062/2018 ADC ARS4-C (radar sen‐ sor) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3078/2019 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen‐ sor) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3282/2019 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen‐ sor) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 2089/2018 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3440/2020 Bosch MRRe14FC R (radar sensor) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 2042/2018 Continental Automotive MARS Key‐ less (lock‐ ing system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 1670/2017 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 0865/2015 HELLA DM4 (lock‐ ing system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 1830/2017 Continental Antenna RKE223E1G NCC/ NS (antenna TSNI/WN/TA/ amplifier) CERT/ 3372/2020 Hirsch‐ mann 920287A (locking system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3100/2019 450 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) Hirsch‐ mann 920287B (locking system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3101/2019 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 1714/2017 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (lock‐ ing system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3212/2019 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 0829/2015 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 2627/2019 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (lock‐ ing system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3635/2020 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 2884/2019 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 2626/2019 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (lock‐ ing system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 0739/2015 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (lock‐ ing system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 0823/2015 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (lock‐ ing system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 1667/2017 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (lock‐ ing system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 0740/2015 Technical data 451 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 2882/2019 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen‐ sor) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3069/2019 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen‐ sor) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3068/2019 WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3N FC (locking system) NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3671/2020 Oman Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ tion ment approval number (if available) Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/ 1849/14 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/ 4353/17 TRA/TA-R/ 2210/14 D080134 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna ampli‐ fier) TRA/TA-R/ 2715/15 D090258 ARS4-C (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/ 7769/19 D172338 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (antenna ampli‐ fier) TRA/TA-R/ 8337/19 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/ 7983/19 D172338 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/ 8642/19 D172338 Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/ 1049/09 Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ tion ment approval number (if available) ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/ 2016/14 D080134 ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor) ADC 452 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ tion ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ tion ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ tion ment approval number (if available) Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) TRA/TA-R/ 4158/17 D080134 Huf Bao‐ long TSSSG4G6 (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) TRA R/ 4515/17 D100428 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking system) TRA/TA-R/ 0227/11 D080353 HELLA DM4 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/ 4548/17 D080134 Huf Bao‐ long TSSSG4G6b (tire pressure monitor sensor) TRA R/ 7506/19 D100428 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking system) Hirsch‐ mann 920287A (lock‐ ing system) TRA/TA-R/ 0210/11 D080353 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/ 2665/15 TRA/TA-R/ 0228/11 D080353 HUF TRA/TA-R/ 4136/17 D080134 920287B (lock‐ ing system) TRA/TA-R/ 0655/12 D080353 TRA/TA-R/ 0920/12 MS2 (locking system) Hirsch‐ mann HUF4761 (lock‐ ing system) MAR‐ QUARDT LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/ 3129/16 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking system) Huf Bao‐ long TSSRE4A (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) TRA R/ 4516/17 D100428 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking system) TRA/TA-RD/ 4056/17 D100428 TRA/TA-R/ 7316/19 D172249 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/ 9324/20 D100428 Technical data 453 Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ tion ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ tion ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ tion ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/ 2848/15 D080353 Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) TRA R/ 2380/15 D080134 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TRA R/ 7706/19 D172338 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/ 2900/15 D080353 Schrader MFR (tire pres‐ sure monitor sensor) TRA R/ 7464/19 D090258 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (lock‐ ing system) TRA/TA-R/ 7051/19 D172249 Schrader GG4T (tire pres‐ sure monitor sensor) TRA TA-R/ 4686/17 D080134 TRA R/ 7707/19 D172338 WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) TRA/TA-R/ 9150/20 MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/ 7353/19 D172249 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) TRA TA-R/ 5511/18 D172249 MAR‐ QUARDT MU2 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/ 9325/20 D100428 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/ 2706/15 454 Technical data Pakistan Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9014/2019 ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.1048/2018 ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9389/2019 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.198/2020 RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) TAC NO: 9.142/2016 Continental Antenna Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS TAC NO: (antenna 9.100169/20 amplifier) 19 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (lock‐ ing system) TAC NO: 9.100175/20 19 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ tem) TAC NO: 9.213/2017 Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) TAC NO: 9.9836/2019 Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) HELLA DM4 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.409/2017 Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys‐ tem) TAC NO: 9.845/2013 Hirschmann 920287B (locking sys‐ tem) TAC NO: 9.846/2013 HUF HUF14632 (locking sys‐ tem) TAC NO: 9.598/2015 Technical data 455 Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation HUF Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) HUF4761 (lock‐ TAC NO: ing system) 9.790/2013 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.133/2017 MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (locking system) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.118/2016 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking system) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (lock‐ ing system) TAC NO: 9.131/2017 TAC NO: 9.100171/20 19 TAC NO: 9.100170/20 19 MAR‐ QUARDT MU2 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.785/2020 DC12B (lock‐ ing system) TAC NO: 9.829/2013 MS5 (locking system) TAC.NO: 9.774/2020 Veoneer MAR‐ QUARDT MAR‐ QUARDT TAC NO: 9.9284/2019 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (lock‐ ing system) TAC NO: 9.830/2013 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.486/2015 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) Veoneer MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.497/2015 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9391/2019 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9391/2019 456 Technical data Paraguay Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Bosch MRRe14FC R (radar sensor) 2017-06I-0000162 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) 2020-02-I-0110 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen‐ sor) 2019-05I-000236 Continental Automotive MARS Key‐ less (lock‐ ing system) 2017-05I-0000136 2019-11-I-0602 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) 2016-02I-0000038 2019-09-I-0508 Continental Antenna RKE223E1G 2019-12-I-0656 NS (antenna amplifier) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) ADC ARS4-A (radar sen‐ sor) 2019-05-I-0271 ADC ARS4-B (radar sen‐ sor) 2019-07-I-0353 ADC ARS4-C (radar sen‐ sor) Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen‐ sor) Technical data 457 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Continental Automotive DWMI2020A (control unit) Este vehículo posee el siguiente compo‐ nente de radio‐ frecuencias, homologado por la CONATEL – Paraguay: Inter‐ faz inalámbrica para móvil, Marca Continen‐ tal, modelo DWMI2020A Fab‐ ricado por Conti‐ nental Automo‐ tive GmbH Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) 2019-11-I-0600 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) 2020-06-I-0284 y 2015-08I-0000226 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) 2017-12I-0000409 y 2012-10-I-0178 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (lock‐ ing system) 2015-06I-0000181 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking system) 2017-07I-0000199 HELLA DM4 (lock‐ ing system) 2017-08I_0000261 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 2016-5-I-000134 y 2011-06-I-0059 Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 2017-04I-0000119 y 2012-05-I-0096 TSSRE4A (tire pres‐ sure moni‐ tor sensor) 2017-09I-0000328 Huf Baolong 458 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking system) 2016-5-I-000144 y 2011-06-I-0067 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (lock‐ ing system) 2020-07-I-0390 y 2015-07I-0000200 Panasonic DAIRSE MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking system) 2016-5-I-000143 y 2011-06-I-0068 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (lock‐ ing system) 2020-07-I-0391 y 2015-07I-0000201 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (lock‐ ing system) 2017-04I-0000101 MAR‐ QUARDT 2019-04I-000216 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (lock‐ ing system) 2019-10-I-0581 3350.38 (locking system) Importer: Condor S.A.C.I Casa Central, J.B. Gorostiaga 315 y Guaraníes, Asunción, Para‐ guay, (595 21) 569 7000, sac@con‐ dor.com.py Schrader MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (lock‐ ing system) 2020-08-I-0604 AG5SP4-D (tire pres‐ sure moni‐ tor sensor) 2015-04I-0000150 Technical data 459 Philippines Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sen‐ sor) Veoneer Manufac‐ turer 2015-07I-000194 Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ nation ment approval number (if available) ADC ARS4-A (radar sen‐ sor) ESD-1409466C 77V12BSM (radar sen‐ sor) 2019-07-I-0399 ADC ARS4-B (radar sen‐ sor) ESD-1409834C Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen‐ sor) 2019-07-I-0398 ADC ARS4-C (radar sen‐ sor) ESD-1920226C WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3N FC (locking system) 2020-06-I-0326 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen‐ sor) ESD-1920531C Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ nation ment approval number (if available) Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen‐ sor) ESD-1408917C Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sen‐ sor) ESD-1716172C Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen‐ sor) ESD-1920160C Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen‐ sor) ESD-1920162C 460 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ nation ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ nation ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ nation ment approval number (if available) Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sen‐ sor) ESD-1510921C Continental Automotive CMKG1 (lock‐ ESD-2021556C ing system) Huf Bao‐ long ESD-1715393C ESD-1510376C MARS Key‐ less (locking system) ESD-1714865C AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) Continental Automotive TSSRE4A (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) HUF ESD-1511236C HELLA DM4 (locking system) ESD-1715539C HUF14632 (locking sys‐ tem) Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) ESD-1511856C Hirsch‐ mann 920287A (locking sys‐ tem) ESD-1105246C HUF HUF4761 (locking sys‐ tem) ESD-1206521C Continental Antenna RKE223E1GN ESD-1921015C S (antenna amplifier) Hirsch‐ mann 920287B (locking sys‐ tem) ESD-1206044C LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) ESD-1510698C Schrader Technical data 461 Zambia Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ nation ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ nation ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (lock‐ ing system) ESD-1714489C MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking system) ESD-1510644C MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (lock‐ ing system) ESD-1105216C MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking system) ESD-1510645C MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (lock‐ ing system) ESD-1105215C MAR‐ QUARDT ESD-1919198C MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking system) ESD-1715652C 3350.38 (locking sys‐ tem) MS4 (locking system) ESD-1919133C MU1 (locking system) ESD-1919146C MAR‐ QUARDT MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking system) ESD-2022426C SDHTAG3NF C (locking system) ESD-2022599C MAR‐ QUARDT WITTE-Vel‐ bert Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/3/11 Continental Automotive MARS Key‐ less (lock‐ ing system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/3/3 HELLA DM4 (lock‐ ing system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/3/4 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/7/12 462 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/7/11 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/5/17 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (lock‐ ing system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/3/21 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2018/12/18 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/5/18 MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/3/6 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (lock‐ ing system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/3/48 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (lock‐ ing system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2018/9/30 MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (lock‐ ing system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/7/124 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/5/16 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (lock‐ ing system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/7/123 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen‐ sor) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/6/59 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (lock‐ ing system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/3/20 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen‐ sor) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/6/60 Technical data 463 Serbia Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation ADC ARS4-A И011 14 (radar sensor) ADC ARS4-B И011 14 (radar sensor) ADC ARS4-C И011 14 (radar sensor) 34540-328/1 9-3 Bosch Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) FR5CPCCF И01119 (radar sensor) 34540-400/1 9-04 Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) 1-06-3454-19 0/09 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (lock‐ ing system) И005 20 P1620007300 Bosch MRR1Rear 34540-840/1 (radar sensor) 7-3 Continental Automotive Bosch MRRe14FCR P1617068100 (radar sensor) MARS Key‐ less (locking system) И005 17 P1617052600 Gentex Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) И005 18 P1618107600 EURO II (con‐ venience sys‐ tem) И005 14 P1614085200 HELLA RKE223E1GN S (antenna amplifier) И005 19 P1619151300 DM4 (locking system) И005 20 P1620100100 Continental Antenna 464 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys‐ tem) И005 18 P1618084500 Huf Baolong И005 17 HUF HUF4761 (locking sys‐ tem) И005 18 P1618156300 Hirschmann 920287B (locking sys‐ tem) И005 18 P1618084400 TSSSG4G6 (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) Huf Baolong И005 19 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) И005 18 P1618080200 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tire И005 17 pressure monitor sen‐ sor) TSSSG4G6b (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (lock‐ ing system) И005 20 P1620044700 HUF14632 (locking sys‐ tem) И005 18 P1618104600 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (lock‐ ing system) И005 20 P1620124700 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (lock‐ ing system) И005 20 P1620124800 HUF Technical data 465 Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking system) И011 17 34540-88/2010 MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys‐ tem) 34540-124/19 -5 Schrader И005 19 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking system) И005 19 P1619129100 MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (locking system) И005 19 P1619129200 MFR (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) Schrader И005 17 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking system) И005 20 P1620062300 Meta Sys‐ tem MUW II (inte‐ rior protec‐ tion) И011 19 P1619045500 GG4T (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking system) 34540-306/1 8-3 Schrader И005 15 Schrader MK2 (locking system) 34540-304/1 8-3 DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) И005 18 MAR‐ QUARDT AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) 466 Technical data Singapore Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Schrader MC34MA4 (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) И011 11 Veoneer 77V12CRN 34540-325/1 (radar sensor) 9-5 ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) DA103365 WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3NF C (locking system) ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor) DA103365 ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) DA103365 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) N3368-19 Bosch LRR3 (radar sen‐ sor) N0380-15 Veoneer 77GHz И011 18 MMRV1 34540-483/1 (radar sensor) 8-3 Veoneer 77V12BSM 34540-327/1 (radar sensor) 9-6 Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Radio equipment approval number (if available) И005 20 P1620047900 Complies with IMDA Standards Technical data 467 Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) N0871-19 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) Model designa‐ tion Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Continental D-WMI2020A Automotive (control unit) N4961-19 DA103365 HUF Bao‐ long N1699-17 HELLA DM4 (locking system) HUF Continental RKE213E1 Antenna (antenna ampli‐ fier) N2681-20 DA105282 N3010-17 DA103365 TSSSG4G6b (tire DA28467 pressure moni‐ tor sensor) Hirsch‐ mann 920287A (lock‐ ing system) N0812-11 DA103365 HUF14632 (lock‐ N1934-20 ing system) DA105282 HUF HUF4761 (lock‐ ing system) Continental RKE223E1GNS Antenna (antenna ampli‐ fier) N4939-19 DA107248 Hirsch‐ mann 920287B (lock‐ ing system) N1231-12 DA103365 N2797-12 DA103365 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) Continental CMKG1 (locking Automotive system) N4774-19 DA103365 HUF Bao‐ long TSSRE4A (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) DA103787 N2292-15 DA103365 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking system) N1138-17 DA103787 Continental MARS Keyless Automotive (locking system) N1298-17 DA103365 HUF Bao‐ long TSSSG4G6 (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) DA103787 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking system) N0793-16 DA103365 Radio equipment approval number (if available) 468 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equipment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking system) N0726-16 DA103365 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking system) N2523-15 DA103365 Schrader DA105282 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking system) N1067-17 DA103787 MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (lock‐ ing system) N0506-19 DA103787 AG5SP4-D (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking system) G2709-19 N2718-19 N2717-19 DA103787 MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (locking system) G2267-19 DA103787 N2779-15 DA103365 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) DA103365 MAR‐ QUARDT MU2 (locking system) G2148-20 DA103365 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) DA103365 Meta Sys‐ tem ITS/TPS (interior protection) N2215-11 WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) N1755-20 Meta Sys‐ tem MUW II (interior protection) N2216-11 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking system) G2147-20 N2151-20 DB107091 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking system) N2522-15 DA103365 Technical data 469 South Africa Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TA-2014/1637 ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor) TA-2014/1783 ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TA-2019/1595 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TA-2019/1200 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) TA-2014/212 Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) TA-2017/2013 Continental Automotive TA-2016/3500 Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) 1965/007009 /07 MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ tem) Gentex TA-2005/614 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) TA-2015/1438 EURO II (con‐ venience sys‐ tem) Gentex TA-2015/1386 Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (antenna amplifier) TA-2020/043 MUAHL 5 (convenience system) HELLA TA-2017/2518 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (lock‐ ing system) TA-2019/5405 DM4 (locking system) 470 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Hirsch‐ mann 920287A (locking sys‐ tem) TA-2011/374 Huf Bao‐ long TA-2017/1391 HUF HUF4761 (locking sys‐ tem) TA-2012/1543 Hirsch‐ mann 920287B (locking sys‐ tem) TA-2013/1262 TSSSG4G6 (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) TA-2019/1440 Huf Bao‐ long TSSRE4A (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) TA-2017/1393 TSSSG4G6b (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) KK1 (locking system) TA-2015/595 Huf Bao‐ long LEOPOLD KOSTAL Meta Sys‐ tem ITS Master (interior pro‐ tection) TA-2011/1636 HUF HUF14632 (locking sys‐ tem) TA-2015/1077 Meta Sys‐ tem ITS Sensor (interior pro‐ tection) TA-2011/1227 Technical data 471 Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Meta Sys‐ tem MUW II (inte‐ rior protec‐ tion) TA-2019/261 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking system) TA-2019/843 MAR‐ QUARDT TA-2018/3985 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (lock‐ ing system) TA-2017/312 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking system) TA-2020/5765 3350.38 (locking sys‐ tem) Schrader TA-2015/072 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (lock‐ ing system) TA-2011/370 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking system) TA-2015/179 AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (lock‐ ing system) TA-2012/1542 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking system) TA-2015/180 Schrader TA-2019/273 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking system) TA-2016/3314 MAR‐ QUARDT MU2 (locking system) TA-2020/5761 MFR (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) 472 Technical data South Korea Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Schrader GG4T (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) TA-2017/3884 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TA-2015/2087 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) TA-2017/2933 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TA-2019/1380 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TA-2019/1382 MC34MA4 (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) TA-2011/1370 WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ tem) TA-2020/055 Schrader Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) HUF HUF14632 (locking system) MSIP-CRMHHFHUF-14632 MARQUARDT MU1 (lock‐ ing sys‐ tem) R-R-MQU-MU1 Technical data 473 Thailand Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Bosch MRRe14FC R (radar sensor) A57003-17 Continental Automotive MARS Key‐ less (lock‐ ing system) SDoC A57008-19 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) SDoC HELLA DM4 (lock‐ ing system) SDoC 920287A (locking system) SDoC A57006-15 MRR1Rear (radar sen‐ sor) A57005-14 RKE223E1G SDoC NS (antenna amplifier) Hirschmann LRR3 (radar sensor) Continental Antenna Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) SDoC Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) ADC ARS4-C (radar sen‐ sor) A57013-19 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen‐ sor) Bosch Bosch Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) SDoC 474 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) HUF HUF14632 (locking system) SDoC MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) SDoC MARQUARDT MK1 (lock‐ ing system) SDoC HUF HUF4761 (locking system) SDoC MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) SDoC MARQUARDT MK2 (lock‐ ing system) SDoC MARQUARDT SDoC LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (lock‐ ing system) SDoC MARQUARDT MS2 (lock‐ ing system) SDoC 3350.38 (locking system) MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) SDoC MARQUARDT MS4 (lock‐ ing system) SDoC MARQUARDT MU1 (lock‐ ing system) A75002-20 MARQUARDT MS5 (lock‐ ing system) SDoC A75004-20 MARQUARDT MU2 (lock‐ ing system) A75005-20 Technical data 475 Togo Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Meta System MUW II (interior protection) RF test report: 149852-2R1TR FEMC EMC test report: 149852-1R1TR FEMC Safety report: 149852TRFSAF Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen‐ sor) A57004-19 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen‐ sor) A57004-19 WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3N FC (locking system) SDoC Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sen‐ sor) A57008-16 Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) No. 024/19 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ tem) No. 040/19 HELLA DM4 (locking system) No. 039/19 Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys‐ tem) No. 089/19 Hirschmann 920287B (locking sys‐ tem) No. 088/19 476 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equipment approval number (if available) HUF HUF4761 (locking sys‐ tem) No. 041/19 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) No. 008/19 KATHREIN RKE213E1 (locking sys‐ tem) No. 024/19 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) No. 101/19 MARQUARDT LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) No. 060/19 MK1 (locking system) MARQUARDT MARQUARDT DC12A (lock‐ ing system) No. 055/19 MK2 (locking system) MARQUARDT DC12B (lock‐ ing system) No. 057/19 MARQUARDT DC12K (lock‐ ing system) No. 056/19 Ukraine Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equipment approval number (if available) No. 021/19 ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) UA RF: 1CONT0004 No. 022/19 ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor) UA RF: 1CONT0001 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (lock‐ No. 016/20 ing system) ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) MARQUARDT MU1 (locking system) UA.TR. 109.R. 0017-19 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) UA RF: 1BOSC0009 No. 100/19 Technical data 477 Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) UA.TR. 109.R. 0031-19 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (antenna ampli‐ fier) UA.R.TR. 052.682-19 HELLA DM4 (locking system) UA.TR. 109.R. 0325-18 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) UA.TR. 109.R. 0598-18 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (lock‐ ing system) UA1.001.021 175-20-TE Hirschmann 920287A (lock‐ ing system) UKR. 355-7/20 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) UA.TR. 109.R. 0030-19 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ tem) RTS.UKR. 355-34/18 Hirschmann 920287B (lock‐ ing system) UKR. 355-8/20 Gentex EURO II (conve‐ nience system) UA1.001.00 8806-15 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) UA 1.001.01856 8-19-TE Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna ampli‐ fier) UKR. 355-123/19 478 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6 UA (control unit) 1.001.01858 (tire pressure 6-19-TE monitor sensor) Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b UA (control unit) 1.001.01928 (tire pressure 9-19-TE monitor sensor) HUF HUF14632 (locking sys‐ tem) UKR. 355-113/19 HUF4761 (lock‐ ing system) UA1.001.018 653-19-TE HUF Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equipment approval number (if available) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 1O094.0066 82-19 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking system) UA.R.TR. 052.528-19 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking system) UA.R.TR. 052.307-19 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking system) 632.16-CET MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking system) UA.R.TR. 052.308-19 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking system) UA1.001.019 233-19-TE MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking system) UA.R.TR. 052.309-19 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking system) UA1.001.019 234-19-TE MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking system) UA1.001.019 129-19-TE MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (lock‐ ing system) UA1.001.018 888-19-TE Technical data 479 Uzbekistan Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Schrader AG5SP4 (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) UA.TR. 028 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) UA RF: 1VEON2BS M Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) UA RF: 1VEON2CR N TEC/ DoC No VEON‐ EER.UKR. 355-3/19 NKRZi NoUA RF: 2VEONMRV 1 WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ tem) UA.R.TR. 052.120-20 Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) HELLA DM4 (locking system) MARQUARDT DC 12A (locking system) MARQUARDT DC 12B (locking system) Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) UZ.SMT. 01.319.2581135 480 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) MARQUARDT DC 12K (locking system) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) MARQUARDT MU2 (locking system) WITTE-Vel‐ bert MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) UZ.SMT. 01.319.2550607 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) UZ.SMT. 01.319.2581337 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) UZ.SMT. 01.319.2581337 MARQUARDT MU1 (locking system) Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if avail‐ able) UZ.SMT. 01.344.17623993 SDHTAG3 UZ.SMT. NFC (lock‐ 01.319.2581054 ing sys‐ tem) Technical data 481 United Arab Emirates Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TRA ER74533/19 , DA36758/14 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (lock‐ ing system) TRA ER61136/18, DA40068/1 5 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna ampli‐ fier) TRA ER64693/18 , DA36975/14 TRA ER77964/20 , DA0018994/ 09 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ tem) TRA ER77062/19 , DA40068 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (antenna ampli‐ fier) TRA E76442/19, DA65993/1 7 TRA ER56005/15 , DA44932/1 5 Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TRA ER58296/17 , DA40068 ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor) ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) 482 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Gentex MUAHL 5 (con‐ venience sys‐ tem) TRA ER41849/15 , DA35176/14 Hirschmann 920287B (lock‐ ing system) TRA ER42011/5, DA35219/14 Huf Baolong DM4 (locking system) TRA ER56616/17, DA44932/1 5 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) TRA ER57806/17, DA36976/14 TRA ER7307/19, DA0086237 /12 HELLA TSSSG4G6b (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) HUF TSSSG4G6 (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sen‐ sor) TRA ER57807/17, DA36976/14 HUF14632 (locking sys‐ tem) TRA ER63716/18, DA36976/14 HUF HUF4761 (lock‐ ing system) TRA ER55496/17 , DA36976/14 Hirschmann 920287A (lock‐ ing system) TRA ER52213/17, DA35219/14 Huf Baolong Technical data 483 Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TRA ER62622/18 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking system) MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (locking system) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking system) TRA ER53465/17 , DA0018994/ 09 TRA ER0067829/ 11, DA0018994/ 09 TRA ER71616/19, DA0018994/ 09 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (locking system) TRA ER52668/17 , DA0018994/ 09 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (locking system) TRA ER80720/20 , DA0018994/ 09 MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (locking system) TRA ER64145/18, DA0018994/ 09 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking system) TRA ER0067828/ 11, DA0018994/ 09 484 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (locking system) TRA ER64146/18, DA0018994/ 09 MAR‐ QUARDT MU2 (locking system) Schrader GG4T (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) TRA ER57985/17, DA0047074/ 10 MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (lock‐ ing system) TRA ER69280/19 , 0018994/09 TRA ER81329/20 , DA0018994/ 09 Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) MAR‐ QUARDT MU1 (locking system) TRA ER71833/19 , DA0018994/ 09 TRA ER37156/15 , DA0047074/ 10 TRA ER960528/1 8, DA0047074/ 10 Technical data 485 United States Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model desig‐ nation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Schrader MC34MA4 (tire pressure moni‐ tor sensor) TRA ER37066/15 , DA0047074/ 10 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TRA ER72323/19 WITTE-Vel‐ bert Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TRA ER39759/15 , DA0020858 SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ tem) TRA ER79695/20 , DA0018994/ 09 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TRA ER72324/19 Manu‐ facturer Model des‐ ignation Radio equipment approval number (if available) Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen‐ sor) FCC ID: NF3FR5CPCCF Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen‐ sor) FCC ID: WU877V12BSM 486 Technical data Vietnam Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen‐ sor) 234/CVT-TT3 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) Suntech Viet‐ Nam Technology Company Limi‐ ted C0274151118AF 04A2 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Continental Antenna RKE223E1G NS (antenna amplifier) Suntech Viet‐ Nam Technology Company Limi‐ ted C0007100120AF 04A2 Continental Automotive MARS Key‐ less (lock‐ ing system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐ pany Limited B0748240419AF 04A2 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) Suntech Viet‐ Nam Technology Company Limi‐ ted C0001070120AF 04A2 HELLA DM4 (lock‐ ing system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐ pany Limited B0625050419A F04A2 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tire pres‐ sure moni‐ tor sensor) C0112200717AF 04A2 Technical data 487 Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT DC12A (locking system) Suntech Viet‐ Nam Technology Company Limi‐ ted C0048080319A F04A2 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12K (locking system) Suntech Viet‐ Nam Technology Company Limi‐ ted C0049080319A F04A2 MAR‐ QUARDT MS4 (lock‐ ing system) Suntech Viet‐ Nam Technology Company Limi‐ ted C0231240919AF 04A2 MAR‐ QUARDT DC12B (locking system) Suntech Viet‐ Nam Technology Company Limi‐ ted C0050080319A F04A2 MAR‐ QUARDT MS2 (lock‐ ing system) Suntech Viet‐ Nam Technology Company Limi‐ ted C0035150219AF 04A2 MAR‐ QUARDT MS5 (lock‐ ing system) Suntech Viet‐ Nam Technology Company Limi‐ ted C0141140520AF 04A2 488 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) MAR‐ QUARDT MK1 (lock‐ ing system) Suntech Viet‐ Nam Technology Company Limi‐ ted C0021180119AF 04A2 MAR‐ QUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) Suntech Viet‐ Nam Technology Company Limi‐ ted C0076150319AF 04A2 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pres‐ sure moni‐ tor sensor) C0078070518AF 04A2 Veoneer A47/CVT-TT3 Suntech Viet‐ Nam Technology Company Limi‐ ted C0022180119AF 04A2 Schrader AG5SP4 (tire pres‐ sure moni‐ tor sensor) C0002050119AF 042A 77V12BSM (radar sen‐ sor) Schrader GG4T (tire pressure monitor sensor) C0170191017AF 04A2 MAR‐ QUARDT MK2 (lock‐ ing system) Technical data 489 Eurasian Economic Union Manufac‐ turer Model des‐ ignation Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if available) Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen‐ sor) A48/CVT-TT3 WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3N FC (locking system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐ pany Limited A0847130820A F04A3 Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) — ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor) — ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) — Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar — sensor) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Bosch LRR3 (radar sen‐ sor) — Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) — Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) — Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar — sensor) 490 Technical data Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (antenna ampli‐ fier) — Hirschmann 920287A (lock‐ ing system) — Huf Baolong — Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (antenna ampli‐ fier) — Hirschmann 920287B (lock‐ ing system) — TSSSG4G6b (tire pressure monitor sensor) HUF — Huf Baolong — Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) — TSSRE4A (tire pressure monitor sensor) HUF4761 (locking system) HUF HUF14632 (lock‐ ing system) — HELLA DM4 (locking system) — Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6 (tire pressure monitor sensor) — LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking sys‐ tem) — Technical data 491 Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) — MARQUARDT MS5 (locking sys‐ — tem) Schrader — MK1 (locking sys‐ — tem) AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sensor) MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) — MARQUARDT Veoneer — MARQUARDT MK2 (locking sys‐ — tem) 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) — Veoneer — MS2 (locking sys‐ — tem) MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) — 77V12BSM (radar sensor) MARQUARDT MARQUARDT MS4 (locking sys‐ — tem) MARQUARDT MU1 (locking system) — 492 Technical data Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview Vehicle identification plate Manufac‐ turer Model designa‐ tion Radio equip‐ ment approval number (if availa‐ ble) Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar — sensor) WITTE-Vel‐ bert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) — 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle identification plate (USA only) Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code VIN (vehicle identification number) Technical data 493 Never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. Additional plates VIN in the engine compartment 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle identification plate (Canada only) Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code VIN (vehicle identification number) The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle). 1 VIN (vehicle identification number) 1 Plate with information about emissions test‐ ing, including confirmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) 3 Engine number (stamped into the crankcase) 494 Technical data Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids & WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐ ful to your health. # Observe the text on the original con‐ tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids. # Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers. # Always keep children away from operat‐ ing fluids. + # ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre‐ sponsible disposal Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐ ronmentally responsible manner. Operating fluids include the following: R Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield washer fluid R Climate control system refrigerant Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container: You can identify operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Further information on approved operating flu‐ ids: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the designation At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop & WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable. Fire, open flames, smoking and creation of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available, the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle. # & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. Technical data 495 # # # # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapor. Keep children away from fuel. Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐ oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐ tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ ing. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. Fuel Notes on fuel grades for vehicles with a gas‐ oline engine Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 494). * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline. This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul‐ fur, this can produce unpleasant odors. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 208). If you want maximum engine output: only refuel with premium-grade unleaded gasoline with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane number of at least 87 AKI/91 RON. 496 Technical data * NOTE Premature wear through unleaded regular gasoline Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the engine to wear more quickly and impair lon‐ gevity and performance. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline with 87 AKI/ 91 RON: # Only fill the fuel tank to half full with unleaded regular gasoline and top up as soon as possible with unleaded pre‐ mium grade gasoline. # Do not drive at the maximum speed. # Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3000 rpm. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with a lower octane number. Further information on fuel is available at the fol‐ lowing locations: R At a gas station R R At a qualified specialist workshop On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) Notes on additives in gasoline (vehicles with gasoline engine) Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 494). * NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommen‐ ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Deposits could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by MercedesBenz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indi‐ cated on the tank. Information on fuel grades for vehicles with a diesel engine General notes Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 494). & WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. # Never refuel using gasoline in diesel engines. # Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. Vehicles with a diesel particulate filter Technical data 497 # Only refuel using sulfur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European standard EN 590, or an equivalent specification. In countries without sulfur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulfur diesel fuel with a sulfur content less than 50 ppm. Vehicle without diesel particulate filter: # Refuel using only diesel fuel with a sul‐ fur content less than 500 ppm. # Only refuel using sulfur-free diesel fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Gasoline R Marine diesel R Heating oil R Pure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable oil R Paraffin or kerosene If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # # Do not switch the ignition on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tank content and reserve fuel Model The recommended fuel grade for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 208). All models Information on low outside temperatures Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel fuel as possible at the beginning of winter. Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the fuel tank should be empty, if possible. Keep the fuel level low for the first refueling with winter diesel fuel, e.g. to reserve level. The fuel tank can be filled as usual when next refueling. Further information on fuel is available at the fol‐ lowing locations: R At a gas station R At a qualified specialist workshop R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) All models Total capacity 20.1 gal (76.0 liters) Of which reserve 2.1 gal (8.0 liters) Engine oil Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 494). 498 Technical data * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐ tives # # # # Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifica‐ tions necessary for the prescribed service intervals. Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed. Do not use additives. Have the engine oil changed after the prescribed intervals. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Quality and capacity of engine oil MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval Model S 580 4MATIC Engine oil specifica‐ tions 229.52 229.61* * Recommended for lowest possible fuel con‐ sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes). To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi‐ cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Model S580 4MATIC Capacity 9.0 US qt (8.5 liters) Notes on brake fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 494). & WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake sys‐ tem The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Technical data 499 Only use a brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. Coolant Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 494). & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart‐ ment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening. # Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐ ant Only use coolant that has been pre‐ mixed with the required antifreeze pro‐ tection. Information on coolant is available at the fol‐ lowing locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids 310.1 At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop # * NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐ peratures If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro‐ tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Always use coolant approved by Mercedes-Benz. # Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper‐ ating Fluids 310.1. Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to approximately -35°F (-37°C)) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49°F (-45°C)) Coolant capacity Model Capacity S 500 4MATIC 18.0 US qt (17.0 liters) S 580 4MATIC 16.1 US qt (15.2 liters) 500 Technical data Notes on windshield washer fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 494). & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. * NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam‐ age the plastic surface of the exterior light‐ ing. # Only use windshield washer fluid which is also suitable for use on plastic surfa‐ ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter‐ Fit. * NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids * NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger‐ ant Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐ terFit with other windshield washer flu‐ ids. If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli‐ mate control system may be damaged. # USA: use only R‑134a refrigerant. # Canada: use only R‑1234yf refrigerant. # Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other‐ wise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erro‐ neously. Recommended windshield washer fluid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa‐ tion on the antifreeze container. Mix washer fluid with windshield washer fluid all year round. Refrigerant Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 494). * NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant com‐ pressor oil # # Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a different refriger‐ ant compressor oil. Work on the climate control system may be car‐ ried out only by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand‐ ard J639, must be adhered to. The information label for the climate control sys‐ tem regarding the refrigerant type and the refrig‐ Technical data 501 Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil erant compressor oil (PAG oil) is located on the inside of the hood. Information label (example – USA/China) Hazard and service warning symbols Refrigerant filling capacity Applicable standards PAG oil part number GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig‐ erant used 6 Refrigerant type 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 Information label (example – Canada) Hazard and service warning symbols Refrigerant filling capacity Applicable standards PAG oil part number GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig‐ erant used Refrigerant type Symbols 1 indicate the following: Possible dangers R Having maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop R Model Refrigerant S 500 4MATIC 24.7 ± 0.4 oz (700 ± 10 g) Canada: S 580 4MATIC 23.6 ± 0.4 oz (670 ± 10 g) USA: S 580 4MATIC 24.7 ± 0.4 oz (700 ± 10 g) Model S 500 4MATIC S 580 4MATIC PAG oil 4.9 ± 0.4 oz (140 ± 10 g) Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors: R Tires R Load 502 Technical data R R Vehicle dimensions Condition of the suspension Optional equipment Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Vehicle length 208.2 in (5289 mm) Vehicle width including out‐ side mirrors 83.0 in (2109 mm) Vehicle height 59.2 in (1503 mm) Wheelbase 126.6 in (3216 mm) Turning radius Height when opened Model All models Model S 580 4MATIC 1 Height when opened 73.0 in (1855 mm) 42.0 ft (12.8 m) Weights and loads Please note the following for the specified vehi‐ cle data: R Items of optional equipment increase the curb weight and reduce the payload. All models Maximum roof load 221 lb (100 kg) Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 503 Display messages Introduction Notes about display messages Display messages appear on the driver display. Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Operator's Manual and may dif‐ fer from the symbols on the driver display. The driver display shows high-priority display mes‐ sages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display mes‐ sages and follow the additional notes in the Operator's Manual. For some display messages, a symbol will also be shown: R Õ Further information R ¨ Hide display message With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Press the Õ symbol to show further infor‐ mation on the central display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the G back button or the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid‐ den. The driver display shows these display mes‐ sages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified. Calling up saved display messages Driver display: 4 Service 5 Message Memory: XX If there are no display messages, No Messages will appear on the driver display. # Scroll through the display messages by swip‐ ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To exit the message memory: press the back button G. 504 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Occupant safety Display messages 6 Restraint System Malfunction Service Required Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 43). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. 6 * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 43). 6 * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 43). Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example) Left Window Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example) & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window curtain airbag The window curtain airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the window curtain airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 505 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Push rear-left seat belt extender back manually. See Operator's Manual (example) * The corresponding seat belt extender is malfunctioning. # Slide the seat belt extender back into its original position manually. # If the malfunction occurs again, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual * The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐ dent and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. # # # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 55). If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 506 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R Even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. # # # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 55). If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 507 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual * The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual * The PRE‑SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. SmartKey Display messages Á Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Have SmartKey replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Obtain a New Key Á Replace Key Battery * The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 78). 508 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Á Key Not Detected (white display message) Á Key Not Detected (red dis‐ play message) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey (/ page 190). * The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine: R You can no longer start the engine. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. # Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle. If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 190). # Á Don't Forget Your Key * A warning tone will also sound. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 509 Display messages Á Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new SmartKey. # Wait until processing is complete. Key Being Initialized Please Wait Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual * SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 190). Lights Display messages : Check Left Low Beam (example) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The corresponding light source is defective. # Drive on carefully. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the light are faulty. 510 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages : Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction See Operator’s Manual : * The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. : * The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. : * You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative Active Headlamps Inoperative Switch On Headlamps Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 511 Display messages : Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the à position. Switch Off Lights DIGITAL LIGHT Functions Limited * The DIGITAL LIGHT system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work even without the functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT system. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. MULTIBEAM LED Functions Limited * The MULTIBEAM LED system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work, but without the functions of the MULTIBEAM LED system. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 161). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on. 512 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions or # # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Until then, operate the high beam manually. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 163). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Available Again display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually. Hazard Warning Light Malfunction * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 513 Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The driver display is inoperative due to a failed software update. The display message is shown every time the engine is started. & WARNING Risk of accident due to a driver display malfunction If the driver display has failed or malfunctioned, the function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems are not visible. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. If the driver display fails, you may not recognize function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired (/ page 303). # Have the vehicle checked by a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 514 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting Head-up Display Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state. # When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the Smart‐ Key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12‑V battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start). * The Head-up Display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes: R Malfunctions in the power supply R Signal interference # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the ignition off and on again. If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Head-up Display Inoperative * The Head-up Display has an internal error. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Head-up Display Brightness Currently Reduced See Operator's Manual * The brightness of the Head-up Display is reduced. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Faulty exterior brightness signals # # Switch on the windshield wipers. Clean the windshield if necessary. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 515 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ù * A power steering malfunction has occurred. Steering characteristics may be impaired as a result. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ù * The power steering assistance is malfunctioning. Ù * The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired. Steering Malfunction Drive Carefully Service Required Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual & WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. 516 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Ù Rear Axle Steering Currently Malfunctioning Ù Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Service Required Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The rear axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning radius may increase. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # * The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. The rear axle has no steering capability. The steering wheel may be tilted when you drive in a straight line. # Adapt your speed and drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 517 Display messages Ù Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. The rear axle has no steering capability. The steering wheel may tilt considerably when you drive in a straight line. Depending on the steering wheel's tilting position, the steering wheel will also vibrate and a continuous warning tone will sound. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Snow Chain Mode Maximum Speed Exceeded C When stopping, bear the enlarged vehicle width in mind. * The maximum permissible speed for snow chain mode has been exceeded. # Drive more slowly. * At least one door is open. # Close all doors. 518 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages M Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The hood is open. & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. # # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Close the hood. N * The trunk lid is open. Ambient Lighting Warning Support Inoperative * The ambient lighting may not provide full visual warning support. # Lock the vehicle and unlock it again after a few minutes. & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open. # Close the trunk lid. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 519 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # If the display message appears regularly, contact a qualified specialist workshop. ¥ * The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer fluid (/ page 342). ¥ * Intensive cleaning of the windshield has been activated (/ page 168). Windshield Wiper Malfunction * The windshield wipers are malfunctioning. # Restart the engine. Check Washer Fluid Intensive Cleaning Activated for 30 Seconds If the display message still appears: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # 520 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To switch vehicle off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or press 3 times * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 190). Cannot Start Vehicle See Operator's Manual * The vehicle cannot be started. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. + Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual * The coolant level is too low. * NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant # # # Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant. Add coolant (/ page 342). Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 521 Display messages ÿ Coolant Stop Switch Off Vehicle Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The coolant is too hot. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot gases. R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping operating fluids. # # # # # ÿ Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down. In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. Wait until the engine has cooled down. Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. * There is a malfunction in the engine cooling system. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. 522 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 8 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. Fuel Level Low 8 Fuel Filler Cap Open * The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to P Only When Vehicle Is Stationary * It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shift the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary. Depress Brake to Shift from P * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h, k or neutral i. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 523 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To Deselect P or N Depress Brake and Start Vehicle * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the vehicle. # Change the transmission position. Depress Brake to Shift to D or R * You have attempted to select transmission position h or k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h or k. Depress Brake to Shift to R * You have attempted to select transmission position k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position k. Apply Brake To Park Service Required * A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position j. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Driver's Door Open Position P Not Selected * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. The vehicle may roll away. # Select park position j when switching off the vehicle. 524 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Apply Brake to Park * The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position j cannot be selected. # Park the vehicle safely. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. # On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving. Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activated Manually No Automatic Change to P * While the vehicle was at a standstill or driving at very low speed, neutral i was engaged with the engine running or the ignition switched on. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away When the ignition is being switched off or the driver's door opened, automatic engagement of park position j is deactivated. The vehicle may roll away. # Be ready to brake. # Do not leave the vehicle unattended. # # # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed. To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 525 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions N Automatically Activated Please Shift to Transmission Position Again * Neutral i was automatically engaged when the vehicle was rolling or being driven. % When you open the driver's door in neutral i, park position j will be engaged automatically. # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. # Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed. # To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k. Reversing Not Possible Service Required * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Malfunction Stop * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park position j. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Service Required Do Not Change Transmission Position * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position. # If transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmis‐ sion position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. 526 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Drive Malfunction Stop Restart Vehicle Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The transmission is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Restart the vehicle. If the display message still appears: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Drive Malfunction Stop Contact Dealer * The transmission is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location and do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Drive Overheated Drive Carefully * The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be temporarily impaired. # Drive at low engine speed. # Avoid sporty driving. # Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (white display mes‐ sage) * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 527 Display messages Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (red display message) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Brakes Display messages F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 215). If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The elec‐ tric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # 528 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 215). or Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 215). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # To apply: Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 215). # To release: Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually. # If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 529 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the state of charge is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery. To apply: Apply the electric parking brake manually. # If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. # To release: If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 215). # If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # 530 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 215). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 215). # # Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. Release the electric parking brake manually. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 531 Display messages F (USA only) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off. # Switch on the ignition. ! (Canada only) Switch on Vehicle to Release the Parking Brake $ (USA only) J (Canada only) Brake Immediately * A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated. A horn may also sound at regular intervals. You cannot start the engine. # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears. You can restart the engine. 532 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages $ (USA only) J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid. * The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving systems Display messages ë Off Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 223). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 533 Display messages é Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative é * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 224). # If necessary, take a break. P * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indicators of microsleep (/ page 224). A warning tone will also sound. # It is recommended that you take a break immediately. # Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message. ç * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 228). ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! ATTENTION ASSIST Nodding Off Take a Break! - - - mph 534 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ç Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 226). Suspended ç * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 228). Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 226). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Distance Assist Inoperative * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Drive on Off Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 535 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions or # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Distance Assist Now Available * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 228). Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 233). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on # Check the tire pressure if necessary. Active Steering Assist Inoperative * Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ø * Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 233). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions. 536 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops Ø Beginning Emergency Stop Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. Active Steering Assist is available once more. * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. The Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (/ page 233). # Put your hands on the steering wheel. Information on canceling an emergency stop (/ page 235). Active Emergency Stop Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 235). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Emergency Stop Assist Inoperative * Active Emergency Stop Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on. or Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 537 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Lane Change Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 237). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Lane Change Assist Inoperative * Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 226). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. 538 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning. Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative * Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 250). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 539 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 254). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. 540 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ¸ ð ç Ä Temporarily Unavailable Radar Dirty Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Front and corner radar sensors and/or lidar (hereafter "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes: R The sensors are dirty or damaged R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on. Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be avail‐ able again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean all sensor covers from the outside and check for damage (/ page 218). # Restart the vehicle. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 541 Display messages á ð Ä ¬ Ô Temporarily Unavailable Camera View Restricted Driver Camera View Currently Restricted See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the field of vision of the multifunction camera R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Condensation on the inside of the windshield: in certain weather conditions, condensation can form on the inside of the windshield during cold times of year in particular. % This condensation on the windshield will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary. Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on. Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be avail‐ able again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 218). # Restart the vehicle. * The view of the driver camera is reduced. Possible causes: R Objects or stickers are projecting into the driver camera’s field of vision. 542 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions R The driver camera is dirty. # Keep the driver camera's field of vision free. Clean the driver camera if necessary. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior relating to the display (/ page 348). # Change the steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen. * The driver camera cannot capture your line of sight. # Change the steering wheel and seat position until six dots are visible on the top edge of the screen. Driver Camera Inoperative See Operator's Manual * The driver camera is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph * AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. * NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements # # # # Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible. Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 543 Display messages E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Function Limited See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * At least one main function of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system is malfunctioning. The system is outside the operating temperature range or the on-board electrical system voltage is too low. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. * NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behavior is restricted. The vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering. # # # # # # ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph Drive on carefully. Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend. Avoid sudden steering movements. Drive on carefully. Reduce speed considerably before taking a curve. Avoid sudden steering movements. * At least one main function of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system is malfunctioning. The system is deactivated. * NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behavior has changed significantly, the vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering. # Reduce vehicle speed. Drive on carefully. 544 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # # # ä Malfunction Stop Reduce the vehicle speed considerably before taking a curve. Avoid sudden steering movements. Continue driving carefully and do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If possible, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the ignition off and on again. If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. * There is a serious malfunction affecting the hydraulics of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system. The system is deactivated. * NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics have changed significantly. # # # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐ cumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 545 Display messages ¢ Maximum Speed 12mph É STOP Vehicle Level Too Low Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # The current level is too high. Do not drive at speeds greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIRMATIC is malfunctioning: Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # * NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements # # # Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible. Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 257). Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised. 546 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages É Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Vehicle Rising Please Wait É Compressor Is Cooling * Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor first needs to cool down in order to set the selected vehicle level. When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle will continue rising to the selected vehicle level. # Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance. Active Parking Assist Limited Availability of Maneuvering Assistance See Operator's Manual * Active Parking Assist’s maneuvering assistant is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (/ page 346). # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual * Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 547 Display messages Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems Display messages ! ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐ tion. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐ tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. 548 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # ! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care‐ fully. * ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐ tion. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐ tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 549 Display messages ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning® If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care‐ fully. * ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐ tion. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. 550 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. T ! ÷ * EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual * For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS Inoperative See Operator's Manual & WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐ tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 239). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 551 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. or # Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. * For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS # Drive on or # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. 552 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Display messages G Inoperative Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system malfunctioning The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunction‐ ing. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Battery Display messages # Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 12 V On-board Electrical System Service Required # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual * The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low. * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 553 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # # # Switch on vehicle to charge the 12 V battery # Stop vehicle To charge the 12 V battery do not switch off vehicle Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐ cumstances. Switch off the engine. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The vehicle is off and the state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. To charge the 12 V battery: Leave the vehicle running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance. # * The 12 V battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # If the display message disappears: drive on. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. 554 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The 48 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Û * The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions. The availability of convenience functions may be restricted. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Ý * The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the ignition while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance. The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, the driver dis‐ play will show the Starting Possible Again display message. # Start the vehicle. # Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle. 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual Please Wait Charging 48 V Battery… If the Starting Possible Again display message does not appear after a few minutes: Try to start the vehicle. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 555 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # If the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Cannot Start Vehicle See Operator's Manual * The state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. # Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connec‐ tion point of the 12 V battery (/ page 361). The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle. Starting Possible Again * The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter. # Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery. Tire pressure monitor Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are being received. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tire pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. # Drive on. Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative * The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. 556 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing h Check Tires * The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. * There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affec‐ ted tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure R R R The tires can burst. The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 557 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the tire pressure (/ page 375) and the tires. h * The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 379). h * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed. Please Correct Tire Pressure Warning Tire Malfunction & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire R R The tires can overheat and be damaged. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Do not drive with a flat tire. # 558 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissi‐ ble speed with a flat MOExtended tire. Observe the notes on flat tires. Notes in the event of a flat tire (/ page 351). Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tires. # Tires Overheated * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down. Decrease Speed * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 559 Engine oil Display messages 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) 5 Engine Oil Level Reduce Oil Level 5 Engine Oil Level Stop Switch Off Vehicle Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 340). Notes on engine oil (/ page 497). * The engine oil level is too high. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil # # Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced. * The engine oil level is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. 560 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # # 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Vehicle Notes on engine oil (/ page 497). * The oil pressure is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure # # # # 5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Switch off the engine. Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 340). Check the engine oil level. Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Switch off the engine. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 561 Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps Driver display with driver camera Some systems will perform a self-test when the ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the engine has been star‐ ted or during a journey. ; # 8 F ! ! Driver display Indicator and warning lamps: Restraint system (/ page 562) 6 Seat belt (/ page 562) ü Ù Power steering (yellow) (/ page 564) Ù Power steering (red) (/ page 564) Ù Rear axle steering (yellow) (/ page 564) Ù Rear axle steering (red) (/ page 564) ÿ Coolant temperature (/ page 566) é J $ J L ä ! ÷ Engine diagnostics (/ page 566) Electrical malfunction (/ page 566) Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap loca‐ tion indicator (/ page 566) USA: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 570) Canada: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 570) Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 570) USA: Recuperative Brake System (/ page 570) Canada: brakes (yellow) (/ page 570) USA: brakes (red) (/ page 570) Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 570) Distance warning (/ page 573) AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CON‐ TROL (/ page 573) ABS (/ page 574) ESP®(/ page 574) 562 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps å H ESP® OFF (/ page 574) Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐ tem (/ page 577) Tire pressure monitoring system h (/ page 577) Parking lights (/ page 155) T Low beam (/ page 155) L High beam (/ page 156) K #! Turn signal light (/ page 156) Rear fog light (/ page 155) R Occupant safety Warning/indicator lamp 6 Restraint system warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 43). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # Drive on carefully. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 563 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # ü Seat belt warning lamp flashes ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up Comply with the messages on the driver display. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 48). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat. * The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds once the engine has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 48). If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit. 564 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Vehicle Warning/indicator lamp Ù Power steering warning lamp (yellow) Ù Power steering warning lamp (red) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit when the engine is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver display. * The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # # Note the messages on the driver display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 565 Warning/indicator lamp Ù Rear axle steering warning lamp (yellow) Ù Rear axle steering warning lamp (red) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver display. * The red rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # # Note the messages on the driver display. 566 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Engine Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Coolant warning lamp (red) * The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty R The engine coolant pump is faulty ÿ If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot gases. R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping operating fluids. # # Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down. In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 567 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Note the messages on the driver display. If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale: # Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red area. # ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yel‐ low) * The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty R The radiator shutters are blocked or defective # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. 568 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. # * The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault in the electrics. # Note the messages on the driver's display. 8 * The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak‐ ing. # Close the fuel filler cap. Electrical malfunction warn‐ ing lamp Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 569 Warning/indicator lamp 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. 570 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Brakes Warning/indicator lamp F Electric parking brake indi‐ cator lamp (red) (USA only) ! Electric parking brake indi‐ cator lamp (red) (Canada only) ! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the driver display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 571 Warning/indicator lamp é Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only) J Brakes warning lamp (yel‐ low) (Canada only) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The yellow é warning lamp (USA only) or the yellow J brakes warning lamp (Canada only) is lit while the engine is running. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The hill start assist may be malfunctioning. Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. # If the driver's display shows a display message, observe it. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # 572 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp $ Brake warning lamp (USA only) J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. # Note the messages on the driver's display. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 573 Driving systems Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Warning lamp for distance warning function * The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance. Ä * The Active Brake Assist yellow warning lamp is lit. The system is restricted or unavailable. # Note the messages on the driver display. ä * The yellow AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. A malfunction has occurred in AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL. # Note the messages on the driver display. L Active Brake Assist warning lamp Suspension warning lamp (yellow) Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 239). 574 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp ä Suspension warning lamp (red) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. A malfunction has occurred in AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL. * NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics will have changed significantly. # # # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Note the messages on the driver display. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver display. & WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 575 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐ tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. ÷ * The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 221). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. ÷ * The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver display. ESP® warning lamp flashes ESP® warning lamp lights up & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 576 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp å ESP® OFF warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP® is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative. & WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated ESP® does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires. If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. # Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 221). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 577 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Warning/indicator lamp H Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunction‐ ing. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz emergency call system warning lamp Tire pressure monitor Warning/indicator lamp h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 578 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure R R R The tires can burst. The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the tire pressure and the tires. Index 579 1, 2, 3 ... 3D driver display Function/notes..................................... 280 3D instrument cluster see 3D driver display 4MATIC Function................................................ 207 12 V battery see Battery (vehicle) 48 V on-board electrical system see EQ Boost technology 115 V socket see Socket (115 V) A A/C function Activating/deactivating (control panel).................................................... 178 Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul‐ timedia system)..................................... 179 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............... 220 Acceleration see Kickdown Accident and Breakdown Manage‐ ment Mercedes me connect........................... 320 Acoustic locking verification signal Activating/deactivating........................... 77 Activating a commuter route................... 310 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 254 Brake application.................................. 252 Function................................................ 250 System limitations................................. 250 Active Brake Assist Function/notes..................................... 239 Setting................................................... 244 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Emergency Stop Assist............... 235 Active Lane Change Assist.................... 237 Calling up a speed................................. 228 Function................................................ 226 Increasing/decreasing the speed.......... 228 Route-based speed adaptation.............. 231 Storing a speed..................................... 228 Switching off/deactivating.................... 228 Switching on/activating........................ 228 System limitations................................. Active Emergency Stop Assist................. Active headlamps...................................... Active Lane Change Assist Activating/deactivating......................... Function................................................ Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating......................... Activating/deactivating the warning..... Function................................................ Setting the sensitivity............................ System limits......................................... Active Parking Assist Automatic braking function................... Cross traffic warning............................. Drive Away Assist.................................. Exiting a parking space.......................... Function................................................ Maneuvering brake function.................. Parking.................................................. Pausing.................................................. System limitations................................. Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS 226 235 158 239 237 256 256 254 256 254 276 277 277 275 271 278 273 276 271 580 Index Active Speed Limit Assist Display.................................................. Function................................................ Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating......................... Active Emergency Stop Assist............... Active Lane Change Assist.................... Function................................................ System limits......................................... Active Traffic Jam Assist Function................................................ Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function................................................. Switching on/off................................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Activating/deactivating......................... Function................................................ Additives Engine oil............................................... Fuel....................................................... Additives (engine oil) see Additives 230 230 235 235 237 233 233 233 161 162 164 163 497 496 Additives (fuel) see Fuel ADS PLUS damping system see AIRMATIC After-sales service center see ASSYST PLUS Air bag Reduced protection................................. 52 Air conditioning menu Calling up............................................... 178 Air distribution Setting................................................... 176 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 179 Air freshener system see Perfume atomizer Air inlet see Air-water duct Air pressure see Tire pressure Air suspension see AIRMATIC Air vents Adjusting (front).................................... 186 Adjusting (rear)...................................... 187 Glove box.............................................. 188 Air vents see Air vents Air-conditioning system see Climate control Air-recirculation mode.............................. 181 Air-water duct Keeping free.......................................... 343 Airbag Activation................................................ 43 Belt airbag............................................... 47 Cushionbag............................................. 49 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)...... 49 Installation locations............................... 49 Knee airbag............................................. 49 Overview................................................. 49 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 55 Protection................................................ 51 Rear airbag.............................................. 49 REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps....... 59 Side airbag.............................................. 49 Window curtain airbag............................. 49 Index 581 Airflow Setting................................................... 176 AIRMATIC Setting................................................... 257 Suspension........................................... 256 Alarm see Panic alarm Alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) All-wheel drive see 4MATIC Alternative route see Route Ambient lighting Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 166 Android Auto see Smartphone integration Animals Pets in the vehicle................................... 75 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft protection Immobilizer............................................ Anti-theft protection see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) Apple CarPlay® see Smartphone integration Assistance systems see Driving safety system ASSYST PLUS Battery disconnection periods.............. Displaying the service due date............. Function/notes..................................... Regular maintenance work.................... Special service requirements................ ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor....................................... Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm..................................................... 103 338 337 337 337 337 105 104 Deactivating the alarm.......................... Function................................................ Function of the interior motion sensor.. The tow-away alarm function................. ATTENTION ASSIST System limits......................................... ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection Function................................................ Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro‐ sleep detection Augmented reality Function on the Head-up Display.......... Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff Function of co-driver airbag shutoff........ Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Automatic driving lights........................... 104 103 104 104 224 224 282 53 156 582 Index Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function)............................................ 198 Automatic engine stop (ECO start/ stop function)............................................ 198 Automatic front passenger front air‐ bag shutoff PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 55 Automatic lateral support adjustment Setting................................................... 123 Automatic measures after an accident..... 61 Automatic mirror folding function Activating/deactivating......................... 174 Automatic seat adjustment Setting................................................... 122 Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever............................ 203 Drive program display........................... 202 Drive programs...................................... 201 DYNAMIC SELECT button...................... 201 Engaging drive position......................... 205 Engaging reverse gear........................... 204 Kickdown............................................... 207 Manual gearshifting............................... 206 Selecting park position.......................... Steering wheel paddle shifters.............. Transmission position display................ Transmission positions.......................... 205 206 203 203 B Bad weather light...................................... 159 Bag hook..................................................... 141 BAS (Brake Assist System)....................... 220 Battery (SmartKey) Replacing................................................. 78 Battery (vehicle) Charging................................................ 361 Charging (Remote Online)...................... 191 Notes..................................................... 357 Notes (starting assistance and charging)............................................... 359 Replacing.............................................. 362 Starting assistance................................ 361 Belt see Seat belt Belt airbag Activation................................................ 43 Function/notes....................................... 47 Blind see Roller sunblind Blower see Climate control Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Notes.................................................... 498 Brake force distribution EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion)....................................................... 222 Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. 220 Active Brake Assist................................ 239 BAS (Brake Assist System).................... 220 Breaking-in notes................................... 192 Driving tips............................................ 194 EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion)....................................................... 222 HOLD function...................................... 223 Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads).................................................... 194 Index 583 New/replaced brake linings/brake discs...................................................... 192 Post-collision brake.................................. 61 Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System) Breakdown Assistance overview................................ 22 Changing a wheel.................................. 396 Roadside Assistance............................... 28 Tow-starting.......................................... 368 Towing away.......................................... 364 Transporting the vehicle........................ 365 Breakdown see Flat tire Breaking-in notes...................................... 192 C Calls Mercedes me......................................... 321 Camera Information............................................ 218 Camera see Dashcam see Driver camera see Rear view camera see Surround view camera Car key see SmartKey Car wash see Care Car wash (care)......................................... Car-to-X-Communication Displaying hazard warnings................... Care Air-water duct........................................ Automatic car wash............................... Carpet................................................... Decorative foil....................................... Display.................................................. EASY-PACK trunk box............................ Exterior lighting..................................... Head-up Display.................................... Headliner............................................... Paintwork.............................................. Plastic trim............................................ Power washer........................................ Real wood/trim elements..................... 343 313 343 343 348 345 348 348 346 348 348 345 348 344 348 Rear view camera.................................. 346 Seat belt................................................ 348 Seat cover............................................. 348 Sensors................................................. 346 Steering wheel...................................... 348 Surround view camera.......................... 346 Tailpipes................................................ 346 Washing by hand................................... 345 Wheels/rims......................................... 346 Windows................................................ 346 Wiper blades......................................... 346 Carpet (Care)............................................. 348 Change of address...................................... 28 Change of ownership.................................. 28 Changing a wheel Preparation........................................... 396 Raising the vehicle................................ 396 Changing a wheel see Emergency spare wheel Changing gears Manually................................................ 206 Changing hub caps................................... 396 584 Index Charging Battery (vehicle)..................................... 361 Mobile phone (wireless)......................... 151 USB port................................................ 148 Chauffeur mode Information............................................ 114 Moving the front passenger seat into the chauffeur position............................ 115 Moving the front passenger seat into the normal position................................ 117 Child safety lock Rear doors............................................... 73 Rear side windows................................... 75 Child seat Attaching (notes)..................................... 66 Basic instructions.................................... 62 Front-passenger seat (notes)................... 72 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing)............... 67 Notes on risks and dangers..................... 63 Rear airbag.............................................. 70 Securing on the front passenger seat...... 72 Securing on the rear seat........................ 71 Top Tether............................................... 69 Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle............... 63 Basic instructions.................................... 62 Special seat belt retractor....................... 66 Chock Storage location.................................... 395 Chock see Chock City lighting............................................... 159 Cleaning see Care Climate control Activating/deactivating......................... 178 Activating/deactivating (rear operat‐ ing unit)................................................. 178 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel)......................... 178 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system)..... 179 Activating/deactivating the synchro‐ nization function (MBUX multimedia system).................................................. 180 Air-recirculation mode........................... 181 Automatic control.................................. 179 Calling up the air conditioning menu..... Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control....................................... Defrost.................................................. Defrosting the windshield...................... Filling capacity for PAG oil..................... Front air vents....................................... Glove box air vent.................................. Immediate pre-entry climate control..... Information on the windshield heater.... Inserting/removing the flacon (fra‐ grance system)...................................... Ionization............................................... Note....................................................... Pre-entry climate control at depar‐ ture time................................................ Rear air vents........................................ Rear operating unit................................ Refrigerant............................................ Refrigerant filling capacity..................... Removing condensation from the windows................................................ Residual heat......................................... Residual heat (rear operating unit)......... Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... Setting the air distribution..................... 178 176 179 176 501 186 188 185 183 182 181 176 183 187 177 500 501 180 181 181 178 176 Index 585 Setting the airflow................................. 176 Setting the fragrance system................. 181 Setting the temperature......................... 176 Switching the rear window heater on/off.................................................... 176 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening).................................................. 94 Co-driver airbag shutoff see Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff Cockpit Overview................................................... 6 Coffee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro‐ sleep detection Collision detection (parked vehicle) Information............................................ 216 Combination switch.................................. 156 Content sharing menu Overview............................................... 288 Control elements Touch-sensitive........................................ 27 Convenience closing................................... 94 Convenience opening.................................. 94 Coolant (engine) Capacity................................................ 499 Level check........................................... 342 Notes.................................................... 499 Cooling see Climate control Copyrights License.................................................... 40 Trademarks............................................. 40 Cornering light........................................... 158 Crosswind Assist Function/notes..................................... 222 Cup holder Switching the cooling/heating func‐ tion on/off............................................ 145 Cushionbag.................................................. 49 Customer Assistance Center (CAC)........... 34 Customer Relations Department............... 34 D Dashboard see Cockpit Dashcam Notes..................................................... 315 Selecting a USB device.......................... 315 Starting/stopping video recording......... 315 Data acquisition Vehicle.................................................... 36 Data protection rights Data storage............................................ 39 Data storage Data protection rights............................. 39 Electronic control units........................... 36 Online services........................................ 38 Vehicle.................................................... 36 Daytime running lamp mode see Daytime running lamps Daytime running lamps Activating/deactivating......................... 164 Deactivating the alarm (ATA).................... 104 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declaration of conformity Wireless vehicle components.................. 30 Decorative foil (cleaning instructions).... 345 586 Index Definitions (tires and loading)................. 389 Defrost function........................................ 179 Destination entry Entering a POI or address...................... 309 Diagnostics connection.............................. 32 Diesel Low outside temperatures..................... 496 Notes.................................................... 496 DIGITAL LIGHT Active headlamps.................................. 158 Assistance functions............................. 160 Bad weather light.................................. 159 City lighting........................................... 159 Cornering light....................................... 158 Fog light (enhanced).............................. 159 Highway mode....................................... 159 Intelligent Light System......................... 158 Switching the Intelligent Light Sys‐ tem on/off............................................. 161 Topographical compensation................. 159 Digital Operator's Manual........................... 24 Dinghy towing see Tow-bar system DIRECT SELECT lever Engaging drive position......................... Engaging neutral................................... Engaging park position automatically.... Engaging reverse gear........................... Function................................................ Selecting park position.......................... Display (care)............................................. Display (driver display) Messages in the driver display.............. Display (MBUX multimedia system) Home screen......................................... Operating.............................................. Settings................................................. Display message Calling up (driver display)...................... Notes.................................................... Display messages ç - - - mph....................................... # 12 V On-board Electrical Sys‐ tem Service Required............................ Û 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. 205 204 205 204 203 205 348 286 288 289 285 503 503 533 552 554 : Active Headlamps Inoperative...... é ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative.... P ATTENTION ASSIST Nodding Off Take a Break!................................... é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!.................................................... : Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative............................................. Ø Beginning Emergency Stop........... $ Brake Immediately........................ $ Check Brake Fluid Level............... + Check Coolant Level See Oper‐ ator's Manual........................................ 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart).................................................... : Check Left Low Beam (exam‐ ple)........................................................ h Check Tires.................................. ¥ Check Washer Fluid...................... É Compressor Is Cooling................. 510 533 533 533 510 536 531 532 520 559 509 556 519 546 Index 587 ÿ Coolant Stop Switch Off Vehicle... ! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................. ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................ Á Don't Forget Your Key.................. 5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured.............................................. 5 Engine Oil Level Reduce Oil Level...................................................... 5 Engine Oil Level Stop Switch Off Vehicle............................................ 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Vehicle................................. 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)............................... 8 Fuel Filler Cap Open..................... 8 Fuel Level Low............................. ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 521 547 549 508 560 559 559 560 504 522 522 548 ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 549 T Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 550 G Inoperative................................... 552 ¥ Intensive Cleaning Activated for 30 Seconds...................................... 519 Á Key Being Initialized Please Wait.. 509 Á Key Not Detected (red display message)............................................... 508 Á Key Not Detected (white dis‐ play message)....................................... 508 6 Left Window Airbag Malfunc‐ tion Service Required (example)............ 504 ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph............................................... 542, 543 : Malfunction See Operator’s Manual................................................... 510 ä Malfunction Stop.......................... 544 ¢ Maximum Speed 12mph.............. 545 Á Obtain a New Key......................... ç Off................................................ ë Off................................................ F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual.................................................. h Please Correct Tire Pressure........ F Please Release Parking Brake...... Ý Please Wait Charging 48 V Bat‐ tery…..................................................... Ù Rear Axle Steering Currently Malfunctioning....................................... Ù Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Service Required.................................... Ù Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately................................... Á Replace Key Battery..................... 6 Restraint System Malfunction Service Required................................... Ù Steering Malfunction Drive Carefully Service Required..................... 507 534 532 527 557 530 554 516 516 517 507 504 515 588 Index Ù Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual... 515 Ù Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual...... 515 É STOP Vehicle Level Too Low......... 545 # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual.......................................... 552, 554 # Stop vehicle To charge the 12 V battery do not switch off vehicle........ 553 ç Suspended................................... 534 : Switch Off Lights.......................... 511 : Switch On Headlamps.................. 510 # Switch on vehicle to charge the 12 V battery.......................................... 553 F Switch on Vehicle to Release the Parking Brake.................................. 531 á Temporarily Unavailable Cam‐ era View Restricted................................ 541 ¸ Temporarily Unavailable Radar Dirty...................................................... 540 d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting................ É Vehicle Rising Please Wait............ h Warning Tire Malfunction............. h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing.............. Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative...... Active Brake Assist Functions Cur‐ rently Limited See Operator's Manual... Active Brake Assist Functions Limi‐ ted See Operator's Manual.................... Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... Active Distance Assist Inoperative........ Active Distance Assist Now Available.... Active Emergency Stop Assist Cur‐ rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.................................................. 514 546 557 556 538 539 550 551 534 534 535 536 Active Emergency Stop Assist Inop‐ erative................................................... Active Lane Change Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... Active Lane Change Assist Inopera‐ tive........................................................ Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera‐ tive........................................................ Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera‐ tor's Manual.......................................... Active Parking Assist Limited Availa‐ bility of Maneuvering Assistance See Operator's Manual................................ Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer‐ gency Stops........................................... 536 537 537 539 539 547 546 536 Index 589 Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... Active Steering Assist Inoperative......... Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Cur‐ rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inop‐ erative.................................................... Ambient Lighting Warning Support Inoperative............................................. Apply Brake To Park Service Required... Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (white display message)................................... 535 535 537 538 511 511 512 512 518 523 526 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (red display message)................................... 527 Cannot Start Vehicle See Operator's Manual.......................................... 520, 555 Change the steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen................ 542 Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual.................................................. 532 Decrease Speed.................................... 558 Depress Brake to Shift from P............... 522 Depress Brake to Shift to D or R........... 523 Depress Brake to Shift to R................... 523 DIGITAL LIGHT Functions Limited........... 511 Drive Malfunction Stop Contact Dealer................................................... 526 Drive Malfunction Stop Restart Vehi‐ cle......................................................... 526 Drive Overheated Drive Carefully.......... 526 Driver Camera Inoperative See Oper‐ ator's Manual........................................ Driver Camera View Currently Restricted See Operator's Manual......... Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual................................ Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual................................ Hazard Warning Light Malfunction......... Head-up Display Brightness Cur‐ rently Reduced See Operator's Man‐ ual.......................................................... Head-up Display Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual.................... Head-up Display Inoperative.................. MULTIBEAM LED Functions Limited....... N Automatically Activated Please Shift to Transmission Position Again..... PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera‐ tor's Manual.......................................... 542 541 505 506 512 514 514 514 511 525 546 590 Index Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual.......................... PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera‐ tor's Manual.......................................... Push rear-left seat belt extender back manually. See Operator's Man‐ ual (example)......................................... Reversing Not Possible Service Required................................................ Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Apply Brake to Park......................................... Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Driver's Door Open Position P Not Selected....... Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Acti‐ vated Manually No Automatic Change to P........................................... Service Required Do Not Change Transmission Position............................ 509 507 507 505 525 524 523 524 525 Shift to P Only When Vehicle Is Sta‐ tionary................................................... Snow Chain Mode Maximum Speed Exceeded............................................... Starting Possible Again......................... Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable............................................ Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative............. Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors...................................... Tires Overheated................................... To Deselect P or N Depress Brake and Start Vehicle................................... To switch vehicle off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec‐ onds or press 3 times........................... Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail‐ able See Operator's Manual.................. Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative............... Transmission Malfunction Stop............. 522 517 555 555 555 556 558 523 520 538 538 525 Windshield Wiper Malfunction............... 519 Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Door Child safety lock (rear doors)................... 73 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)....... 84 Opening (from inside).............................. 81 Power closing function............................ 83 Unlocking (from inside)............................ 81 Door control panel...................................... 18 Door control panel (rear passenger compartment).............................................. 20 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... 385 Drawbar see Tow-bar system Drinking and driving.................................. 194 Drive Away Assist...................................... 277 Drive position Inserting................................................ 205 Drive program display.............................. 202 Index 591 Drive programs see DYNAMIC SELECT Driver camera Activating/deactivating......................... 298 Overview............................................... 297 Driver display 48 V on-board electrical system............ 285 Displaying the service due date............. 337 EQ Boost technology............................. 285 Function/notes..................................... 280 Notes on menus.................................... 281 Operating.............................................. 280 Overview of displays.............................. 286 Warning/indicator lamps....................... 561 Driver display with driver camera.............. 12 Driver's display.............................................. 8 Driver's seat see Seat Driving safety system ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. 220 Active Brake Assist................................ 239 BAS (Brake Assist System).................... 220 Cameras................................................ 218 EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion)....................................................... ESP® Crosswind Assist.......................... Overview................................................ Radar and ultrasonic sensors................ Responsibility........................................ STEER CONTROL................................... Driving system see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Change Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see AIRMATIC see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro‐ sleep detection see Driving safety system see E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL see HOLD function see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera see Surround view camera 222 222 219 218 218 222 see Traffic Sign Assist Driving tips Breaking-in notes................................... Drinking and driving............................... General driving tips................................ Optimized acceleration.......................... Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro‐ sleep detection Dynamic handling control system see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) DYNAMIC SELECT Calling up the fuel consumption indi‐ cator...................................................... Configuring drive program I................... Displaying engine data.......................... Displaying vehicle data.......................... Drive program display........................... Drive programs...................................... Function................................................ Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch)... Selecting the drive program.................. 192 194 194 193 203 202 203 203 202 201 201 202 202 592 Index E E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Setting the level.................................... Suspension........................................... E10............................................................. Easy entry feature Function/notes..................................... Setting................................................... Easy exit feature Function/notes..................................... Setting................................................... EASY-PACK trunk box Adjusting the height to any position...... Care...................................................... Installing/removing............................... EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion) Function/notes..................................... ECO Assist Function/notes..................................... ECO display Function................................................ 260 258 495 128 129 128 129 142 348 143 222 199 199 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start.......................... 198 Automatic engine stop........................... 198 Switching off/on................................... 199 Electric parking brake Applying automatically........................... 214 Applying/releasing manually................. 215 Emergency braking................................ 215 Releasing automatically......................... 215 Electrohydraulic suspension see E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Assistance overview................................ 22 First-aid kit (soft sided).......................... 351 Reflective safety vest............................ 350 Removing the warning triangle.............. 351 Setting up the warning triangle.............. 351 Emergency braking.................................... 215 Emergency braking see BAS (Brake Assist System) Emergency call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Emergency engine start........................... 368 Emergency key Locking/unlocking the doors.................. 84 Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle............................... 190 Emergency release Trunk lid (from inside).............................. 91 Emergency spare wheel Notes..................................................... 401 Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation................................................ 43 Engine ECO start/stop function........................ 198 Engine number...................................... 492 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 190 Starting (Remote Online)....................... 191 Starting (start/stop button).................. 190 Starting assistance................................ 361 Switching off (start/stop button)........... 210 Engine data Displaying.............................................. 203 Index 593 Engine number.......................................... 492 Engine oil Additives............................................... 497 Capacity................................................ 498 Checking the oil level with the driver display................................................... 340 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval................. 498 Quality................................................... 498 Refilling................................................. 340 EQ boost Qualified specialist workshop.................. 33 EQ Boost technology Notes.................................................... 285 Operating safety...................................... 28 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ESP® Crosswind Assist................................... 222 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating......................... 222 Function/notes..................................... 221 Exterior lighting Care...................................................... 346 Exterior lighting see Lights Exterior mirrors Automatic mirror folding function.......... Automatic preselection (MBUX Inte‐ rior Assistant)........................................ Folding in/out........................................ Operating the memory function............. Parking position..................................... Setting................................................... F Fatigue detection see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro‐ sleep detection Favorites Adding................................................... First-aid kit (soft sided)............................ Flacon Inserting/removing............................... Flat tire Changing a wheel.................................. MOExtended tires.................................. Notes..................................................... 174 296 171 130 173 171 300 351 182 396 352 351 TIREFIT kit............................................. 353 Flat towing see Tow-bar system Floor mats.................................................. 154 Fog light (enhanced)................................. 159 Foil covering Radar and ultrasonic sensors................ 218 Folding table.............................................. 137 Footrest Rear passenger seat.............................. 116 Fragrance see Perfume atomizer Free software.............................................. 40 Frequencies Two-way radio....................................... 403 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)....... 49 Front passenger seat Adjusting from the driver's seat............ 109 Adjusting from the rear passenger compartment......................................... 110 Front passenger seat see Seat 594 Index Fuel Additives............................................... Diesel.................................................... E10........................................................ Fuel reserve........................................... Gasoline................................................ Low outside temperatures..................... Quality (diesel)...................................... Quality (gasoline).................................. Refueling............................................... Sulfur content....................................... Tank content.......................................... Fuel consumption indicator Calling up.............................................. Function seat see Door control panel Function seat (rear passenger com‐ partment) see Seat (rear passenger compartment) Fuses Before replacing a fuse.......................... Dashboard fuse box............................... Fuse assignment diagram..................... Fuse box in the engine compartment.... 496 496 495 497 495 496 496 495 208 495 497 203 369 371 369 369 Fuse box in the front-passenger foot‐ well........................................................ 372 Fuse box in the trunk............................. 372 Notes.................................................... 369 Fuses see Fuses G Garage door opener Clearing the memory............................. 214 Programming buttons............................ 211 Resolving problems................................ 213 Garage door openers Opening/closing the door...................... 213 Synchronizing the rolling code............... 213 Gasoline..................................................... 495 Gearshift recommendation...................... 206 Genuine parts.............................................. 25 Glide mode................................................. 207 Glove box Air vent.................................................. 188 H Handbrake see Electric parking brake Handling characteristics (unusual)......... 373 HANDS-FREE ACCESS................................. 89 Handset Stowage compartment (rear passenger compartment)...................... 138 Hazard warning lights............................... 157 Hazardous substances Information.............................................. 28 Head restraint Activating/deactivating neck heating.... 120 Attaching/removing the additional cushion (front)....................................... 119 Attaching/removing the additional cushion (rear passenger compart‐ ment)..................................................... 120 Front (luxury head restraint).................. 118 Rear (folding into position/folding back mechanically)................................ 121 Rear (lowering from the front)................ 119 Index 595 Rear passenger compartment (adjusting).............................................. 119 Rear passenger compartment (luxury head restraint)....................................... 120 Head-up Display Augmented reality................................. 282 Care...................................................... 348 Function................................................ 282 Operating.............................................. 284 Operating the memory function............. 130 Selecting (with augmented reality)........ 284 Switching on/off................................... 285 Headlamps see Automatic driving lights Headliner (care)......................................... 348 Heating see Climate control Help call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system High beam Activating/deactivating......................... 156 High beam see Adaptive Highbeam Assist High-beam flasher..................................... High-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. Highway mode........................................... Hill start assist.......................................... HOLD function Function/notes..................................... Switching on/off................................... Home screen (central display) Overview............................................... Hood Opening/closing................................... I Identification plate Engine................................................... Refrigerant............................................ Vehicle.................................................. Ignition Switching on (start/stop button)........... Ignition key see SmartKey 156 163 159 224 223 223 288 338 492 500 492 189 Immediate pre-entry climate control...... Immobilizer................................................ Indicator lamp see Warning/indicator lamp Individual drive program Configuring........................................... Selecting............................................... Inside rearview mirror Anti-glare mode (automatic).................. Inside rearview mirror see Outside mirrors Inspection see ASSYST PLUS Instrument cluster see Driver display Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating......................... Active headlamps.................................. Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. Assistance functions............................. Bad weather light.................................. City lighting........................................... 185 103 202 202 173 161 158 161 163 160 159 159 596 Index Cornering light....................................... Fog light (enhanced).............................. Highway mode....................................... Overview............................................... Topographical compensation................. Interior lighting Adjusting............................................... Ambient lighting.................................... Reading lamp......................................... Switch-off delay time............................. Interior motion sensor Activating/deactivating......................... Function................................................ Internet radio see TuneIn Ionization Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul‐ timedia system)..................................... iPhone® see Smartphone integration 158 159 159 158 159 165 166 165 167 105 104 181 J Jack Storage location.................................... 395 Jump-start connection General notes........................................ 359 K KEYLESS-GO Deactivating a function............................ 78 Locking/unlocking the vehicle................ 81 Problem................................................... 83 Unlocking setting.................................... 77 Kickdown Using..................................................... 207 Knee airbag.................................................. 49 L Labeling (tires) see Tire labeling Lamp see Interior lighting Lamp (driver display) see Warning/indicator lamp Lane detection (automatic) see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist Language Notes.................................................... 306 Setting................................................... 306 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor Installing.................................................. 67 Level control system see AIRMATIC see E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Light switch Overview............................................... 155 Lighting see Interior lighting see Lights Lights Active headlamps.................................. 158 Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 161 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 163 Automatic driving lights......................... 156 Bad weather light.................................. 159 City lighting........................................... 159 Combination switch............................... 156 Index 597 Cornering light....................................... Fog light (enhanced).............................. Hazard warning lights............................ High beam............................................. High-beam flasher................................. Highway mode....................................... Intelligent Light System......................... Light switch........................................... Low-beam headlamps........................... Parking lights......................................... Rear fog lamp........................................ Responsibility for lighting systems........ Setting the exterior lighting switchoff delay time........................................ Standing lights....................................... Switching the Intelligent Light Sys‐ tem on/off............................................. Switching the locator lighting on/off..... Turn signal light..................................... Limited Warranty Vehicle.................................................... Live Traffic Information Switching the traffic information dis‐ play on................................................... Load index (tires)...................................... 158 159 157 156 156 159 158 155 155 155 155 155 164 155 161 165 156 35 313 387 Load-bearing capacity (tires)................... 387 Loading Bag hook................................................ 141 Definitions............................................. 389 Notes..................................................... 134 Roof luggage rack.................................. 144 Loading guidelines.................................... 134 Loading information table........................ 380 Loads Securing................................................ 134 Locator lighting Activating/deactivating......................... 165 Locking/unlocking Emergency key........................................ 84 KEYLESS-GO............................................ 81 Switching the automatic locking fea‐ ture on/off.............................................. 83 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside................................................. 81 Low-beam headlamps Switching on/off................................... 155 Lubricant additives see Additives Luggage Net hooks.............................................. 139 Securing................................................ 134 M MAGIC VISION CONTROL Windshield wipers................................. Maintenance Vehicle.................................................... Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction Restraint system..................................... Malfunction message see Display message Maneuvering assistance Activating/deactivating......................... Cross traffic warning............................. Drive Away Assist.................................. Maneuvering brake function.................. Maneuvering brake function.................... Map Displaying online map contents............. 170 28 43 279 277 277 278 278 313 598 Index Displaying weather information............. Moving................................................... Selecting the map orientation................ Setting the map scale............................ Massage program Overview............................................... Massage programs Resetting the settings............................ Selecting the front seats........................ Maximum load rating................................ Maximum permissible load Calculation example.............................. Determining........................................... Maximum tire pressure............................ MBUX Interior Assistant Anticipatory exit warning....................... Automatic preselection of the out‐ side mirror............................................. Calling up favorites with the V pose...... Operating the function with the favorites pose........................................ Overview............................................... 313 312 312 312 123 124 124 386 382 381 386 294 296 297 297 292 Switching the reading light for the driver and front passenger on/off contact-free........................................... Switching the search light for the driver on/off......................................... MBUX multimedia system Activating/deactivating snow chain mode..................................................... Activating/deactivating standby mode.. Collision detection (parked vehicle)....... Configuring display settings.................. Configuring drive program I................... Coupling the steering wheel heater to the seat heating................................ Driver camera........................................ Home screen......................................... Notes..................................................... Operating the touchscreen.................... Overview............................................... Resetting (factory setting)..................... Setting route-based speed adaptation.. Setting the air distribution..................... Setting the footwell temperature........... Setting the fragrance system................. Setting the rear climate control............. 295 295 374 217 216 285 202 128 297 288 287 289 287 306 232 179 180 181 180 Switching ionization on/off................... 181 MBUX multimedia system see Display (MBUX multimedia system) see MBUX Interior Assistant MBUX Voice Assistant Function................................................ 290 Voice prompting.................................... 291 Mechanical key Inserting/removing................................. 78 Unlocking the trunk lid............................ 91 Media Overview of the functions and sym‐ bols....................................................... 329 Medical aids................................................. 34 Memory function Function................................................ 129 Head-up Display — Calling up stored settings................................................. 130 Head-up Display — Storing settings....... 130 Operating.............................................. 130 Outside mirrors — Calling up stored settings................................................. 130 Outside mirrors — Storing settings........ 130 Seat — Calling up stored settings........... 130 Index 599 Seat — Storing settings.......................... Steering wheel — Calling up saved settings................................................. Steering wheel — Saving settings........... Memory function in the rear passenger compartment Function................................................. Operating rear seats.............................. Operating the front passenger seat and rear seats....................................... Menus (driver display) Notes..................................................... Mercedes me app Information............................................ Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment.......... Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center................................................... Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection............................. Information............................................ Making a call via the overhead con‐ trol panel............................................... 130 130 130 131 132 133 281 324 323 322 322 321 321 Transferred data.................................... Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Manage‐ ment...................................................... Information............................................ Transferred data.................................... Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Automatic emergency call..................... Information............................................ Information on data processing............. Manual emergency call......................... Overview............................................... Message (driver display) see Display message Message memory...................................... Mirrors see Exterior mirrors Mobile phone Wireless charging (rear passenger compartment)....................................... Mobile phone see Smartphone integration see Telephone 323 320 319 321 327 326 328 328 327 503 153 Model series see Vehicle identification plate MOExtended tires..................................... 352 MULTIBEAM LED Intelligent Light System......................... 158 Multifunction camera ROAD SURFACE SCAN.......................... 260 Multimedia system Enabling/disabling the rear airbag.......... 60 Multimedia system see MBUX multimedia system N Navigation Notes..................................................... Overview............................................... Switching on.......................................... Navigation see Destination entry see Map see Route Neutral Engaging............................................... 307 308 307 204 600 Index Nodding off see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro‐ sleep detection O Occupant safety see Airbag see Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff see Automatic measures after an accident see Child seat see Pets in the vehicle see Post-collision brake see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection) see PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Rear airbag see Restraint system see Seat belt Oil see Engine oil On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection On-board electronics Notes.................................................... 402 Two-way radios...................................... 402 Online services Data storage............................................ 38 Open-source software................................ 40 Opening the trunk lid using your foot HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 89 Operating fluids Additives (fuel)...................................... 496 Brake fluid............................................. 498 Coolant (engine).................................... 499 Engine oil............................................... 497 Fuel (diesel)........................................... 496 Fuel (gasoline)....................................... 495 Notes..................................................... 494 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)..... 500 Windshield washer fluid........................ 500 Operating safety 48 V on-board electrical system.............. 28 Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components)............................... 30 EQ Boost technology............................... 28 Information.............................................. 28 Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment................................... 26 Operator's Manual (digital)......................... 24 Optimized acceleration Activating.............................................. 193 Outside mirrors Anti-glare mode (automatic).................. 173 Overhead control panel Overview.................................................. 16 P Paint code.................................................. 492 Paintwork (cleaning instructions)........... 345 Panel heating Setting................................................... 125 Panic alarm Activating/deactivating........................... 77 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel see Sliding sunroof Parcel net hooks........................................ 139 Index 601 Park position Engaging............................................... Selecting automatically......................... Parking see Electric parking brake Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Activating.............................................. Adjusting warning tones........................ Function................................................ Switching off......................................... System limitations................................. Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist Parking brake see Electric parking brake Parking for an extended period................ Parking lights............................................. Parking position Exterior mirrors..................................... 205 205 271 271 268 271 268 217 155 173 Storing the position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear........................................... 174 Particulate status display......................... 178 PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff Payload Calculation example.............................. 382 Determining the maximum.................... 381 Perfume see Perfume atomizer Perfume atomizer Inserting/removing the flacon............... 182 Setting................................................... 181 Perfume vial see Perfume atomizer Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 217 Standby mode function.......................... 217 Permitted towing methods...................... 363 Pets in the vehicle....................................... 75 Plastic trim (Care)..................................... 348 Post-collision brake..................................... 61 Power closing function Door........................................................ 83 Trunk lid.................................................. 86 Power supply Switching on (start/stop button)........... 189 Power washer (care)................................. 344 Pre-entry climate control (immediate).... 185 Pre-entry climate control at depar‐ ture time Function................................................ 183 Setting................................................... 184 Switching on/off................................... 185 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Function.................................................. 60 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 60 Reversing measures................................ 60 PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side Activation................................................ 43 Function................................................... 61 602 Index PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection plus) Function.................................................. 60 Reversing measures................................ 60 Preventative occupant protection sys‐ tem see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) Profile Notes.................................................... 298 Program see DYNAMIC SELECT Protecting the environment Notes....................................................... 25 Protection against collision see Drive Away Assist see Maneuvering brake function Pulling away see Driving tips Q QR code Rescue card............................................ 35 Qualified specialist workshop................... 33 R Radar and ultrasonic sensors Damage................................................. 218 Radio Overview of the functions and sym‐ bols....................................................... 331 Rain-closing feature Sliding sunroof........................................ 99 Reading lamp see Interior lighting Reading light Switching on/off with hand move‐ ments.................................................... 295 Real wood (Care)....................................... 348 Rear airbag Activating/deactivating........................... 60 Points to remember when the rear seat is occupied...................................... 57 REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps....... 59 Rear axle steering...................................... 197 Rear climate control Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 180 Rear doors (child safety lock).................... 73 Rear fog lamp Switching on/off................................... 156 Rear passenger compartment seat Seats...................................................... 111 REAR SEAT AIR BAG status display see Rear airbag Rear view camera Activating using GPS (surround view camera)................................................. 267 Care...................................................... 346 Function................................................. 261 Opening the camera cover (surround view camera)......................................... 268 Setting (surround view camera)............. 267 Rear window Roller sunblind....................................... 101 Index 603 Rear window heater.................................. 176 Reflective safety vest............................... 350 Refrigerant (air conditioning system) Notes.................................................... 500 Refrigerator box Removing/installing.............................. 150 Stowage compartment........................... 151 Using..................................................... 148 Refueling Refueling the vehicle............................. 208 Regulatory radio identification................ 404 Remote Online Charging the starter battery.................. 191 Cooling/heating the vehicle interior...... 191 Starting the vehicle................................ 191 Reporting safety defects............................ 34 Rescue card................................................. 35 Reserve Fuel....................................................... 497 Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)...................................................... 306 Reset function (MBUX multimedia system) see Reset function (MBUX multime‐ dia system) Resetting (factory setting) see Reset function (MBUX multime‐ dia system) Residual heat Rear operating unit................................ 181 Restraint system Basic instructions for children................. 62 Function in an accident........................... 43 Functionality............................................ 42 Malfunction............................................. 43 Protection................................................ 42 Reduced protection................................. 42 Self-test................................................... 42 Warning lamp.......................................... 42 Reverse gear Engaging............................................... 204 Rims (care)................................................. 346 ROAD SURFACE SCAN Multifunction camera............................ 260 ROAD SURFACE SCAN see Camera Roadside Assistance (breakdown)............ Roll away protection see HOLD function Roller sunblind Rear window.......................................... Side windows (electric).......................... Sliding sunroof........................................ Roof load.................................................... Roof luggage rack Loading................................................. Securing................................................ Route Activating a commuter route................. Calculating............................................. Selecting a type..................................... Selecting an alternative route................ Route guidance with augmented real‐ ity Activating............................................... Activating/deactivating the traffic light view............................................... 28 101 101 96 502 144 144 310 310 310 310 310 248 604 Index Displaying street names and house numbers................................................ Route-based speed adaptation Function................................................ Setting................................................... Run-flat characteristics MOExtended tires.................................. S Safety systems see Driving safety system Satellite radio Logging in.............................................. Setting music and sport alerts.............. Search light Switching on/off with hand move‐ ments.................................................... Seat Adjusting (electrically)........................... Adjusting a reclining rear seat............... Adjusting the front passenger seat from the rear passenger compartment.. Automatic seat adjustment................... Configuring the settings........................ 310 231 232 352 335 335 295 106 112 110 122 122 Correct driver's seat position................ 106 Massage program overview................... 123 Operating the memory function............. 130 Panel heating......................................... 125 Rear passenger compartment footrest.. 116 Resetting the settings............................ 124 Setting automatic lateral support adjustment............................................ 123 Setting options........................................ 18 Setting the fully reclined position........... 113 Workout program overview.................... 123 Seat see Chauffeur mode see Front passenger seat Seat (rear passenger compartment) Setting options........................................ 20 Seat belt Care...................................................... 348 Protection................................................ 44 Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating........................... 49 Function.................................................. 49 Seat belt extender....................................... 47 Seat belt warning see Seat belts Seat belts Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 49 Adjusting the height................................ 48 Belt airbag............................................... 47 Fastening................................................. 48 Reduced protection................................. 45 Releasing................................................. 49 Seat belt adjustment (function)............... 49 Seat belt extender................................... 47 Warning lamp.......................................... 49 Seat cover (Care)....................................... 348 Seat heating Activating/deactivating......................... 124 Seat ventilation Activating/deactivating......................... 126 Seats Rear passenger compartment (adjusting electrically)............................ 111 Selecting a gear see Changing gears Index 605 Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever Self-test Automatic front passenger front air‐ bag shutoff.............................................. 55 Sensors (care)........................................... 346 Service Center see Qualified specialist workshop Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS Setting the footwell temperature Setting................................................... 180 Setting the map scale see Map Shift paddles see Steering wheel paddle shifters Shifting gears Gearshift recommendation................... 206 Side airbag................................................... 49 Side windows Child safety lock in the rear passenger compartment......................... 75 Closing using the SmartKey..................... 94 Convenience closing................................ 94 Convenience opening.............................. 94 Opening with the SmartKey..................... 94 Opening/closing..................................... 92 Problem................................................... 95 Roller sunblind (electric)........................ 101 Size designation (tires)............................. 387 Sliding sunroof Automatic functions................................ 99 Closing.................................................... 96 Closing using the SmartKey..................... 94 Opening................................................... 96 Opening with the SmartKey..................... 94 Problem................................................... 99 Rain-closing feature................................. 99 SmartKey Acoustic locking verification signal......... 77 Battery.................................................... 78 Deactivating a function............................ 78 Energy consumption................................ 78 Function overview.................................... 76 Key ring attachment................................ 78 Mechanical key........................................ 78 Panic alarm............................................. 77 Problem................................................... 80 Unlocking setting.................................... 77 SmartKey see SmartKey Smartphone see Smartphone integration see Telephone Smartphone integration Overview............................................... 325 Snow chain mode Activating/deactivating......................... 374 Snow chains............................................... 374 Socket (12 V) Rear passenger compartment............... 146 Socket (115 V) Rear passenger compartment............... 147 Software update System updates..................................... 303 Sound PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 60 Wheels and tires.................................... 373 Sound menu Functions overview............................... 336 606 Index Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel Special seat belt retractor.......................... 66 Specialist workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Speed index (tires).................................... 387 Standby mode Activating/deactivating......................... 217 Function................................................. 217 Standing lights.......................................... 155 Start-off assist see Optimized acceleration Start/stop button Parking the vehicle................................ 210 Starting the vehicle............................... 190 Switching on the power supply/igni‐ tion........................................................ 189 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starter battery Charging (Remote Online)...................... 191 Starting see Vehicle Starting assistance see Jump-start connection Starting-off aid see Hill start assist STEER CONTROL Function/notes..................................... Steering Rear axle steering.................................. Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically)........................... Care...................................................... Operating the memory function............. Steering wheel heater............................ Steering wheel heater Activating/deactivating......................... Coupling to seat heating........................ Steering wheel paddle shifters................ Storage areas see Storage space Storage compartments see Storage space Storage space Armrest................................................. 222 197 126 348 130 127 127 128 206 137 Center console...................................... Door...................................................... Glove box............................................... Stowage compartment Handset (rear passenger compart‐ ment)..................................................... Parcel net hooks.................................... Street names and house numbers Displaying.............................................. Sulfur content........................................... Surround View see Surround view camera Surround view camera Activating using GPS (rear view cam‐ era)........................................................ Button................................................... Care...................................................... Function................................................ Opening the camera cover (rear view camera)................................................. Selecting a view.................................... Setting (rear view camera)..................... 137 137 137 138 139 310 495 267 267 346 263 268 267 267 Index 607 Suspension Setting the suspension level (AIR‐ MATIC)................................................... Setting the suspension level (EACTIVE BODY CONTROL)....................... Suspension see AIRMATIC see E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Suspension level (AIRMATIC) Setting................................................... Suspension level (E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL) Setting................................................... Switch-off delay time Exterior.................................................. Interior................................................... Synchronization function Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul‐ timedia system)..................................... System settings Overview of the system settings menu..................................................... Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)................................................. 257 260 257 260 164 167 180 302 306 System settings see Language T Tailpipes (care).......................................... Tank content Fuel....................................................... Reserve (fuel)........................................ Technical data Information............................................ Regulatory radio identification.............. Telephone Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey)... Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing)....................................... Function/notes...................................... Functions in the telephone menu........... Notes..................................................... Operating modes................................... Telephone menu overview..................... Wireless charging (mobile phone in the rear passenger compartment)......... Telephony operating modes Bluetooth® Telephony............................ 346 497 497 402 404 319 319 151 319 316 318 318 153 318 Temperature............................................... Temperature grade.................................... Through-loading feature Locking.................................................. Through-loading feature in the rear passenger compartment Opening................................................. TIN (Tire Identification Number).............. Tire and Loading Information placard..... Tire characteristics................................... Tire inflation compressor see TIREFIT kit Tire information table............................... Tire labeling Characteristics...................................... DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... Load index............................................. Load-bearing capacity........................... Maximum tire load................................ Maximum tire pressure......................... Overview............................................... Speed rating.......................................... Temperature grade................................ 176 384 141 139 385 380 387 380 387 385 387 387 386 386 384 387 384 608 Index Tire Quality Grading............................... Tire size designation.............................. Traction grade....................................... Tread wear grade................................... Tire load (maximum)................................. Tire pressure Checking (manually).............................. Checking (tire pressure monitoring system).................................................. Maximum.............................................. Notes..................................................... Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ ing system............................................. Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... Tire pressure table................................. TIREFIT kit............................................. Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure.................... Checking the tire temperature.............. Function................................................ Restarting.............................................. Tire pressure table.................................... Tire Quality Grading.................................. 384 387 384 384 386 377 379 386 375 379 378 376 353 379 379 378 379 376 384 Tire temperature Checking (tire pressure monitoring system).................................................. Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... Tire tread.................................................... Tire-change tool kit Overview............................................... TIREFIT kit Storage location.................................... Using..................................................... Tires Characteristics...................................... Checking............................................... Checking the tire pressure (manually)... Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐ sure monitoring system)........................ Definitions............................................. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... Flat tire.................................................. Installing................................................ Load index............................................. Load-bearing capacity........................... Maximum tire load................................ 379 378 373 395 353 353 387 373 377 379 389 385 351 399 387 387 386 Maximum tire pressure......................... 386 MOExtended tires.................................. 352 Noise..................................................... 373 Notes on installing................................ 392 Overview of tire labeling........................ 384 Removing.............................................. 398 Replacing...................................... 392, 396 Replacing the wheel trim....................... 396 Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ ing system............................................. 379 Rotating................................................. 394 Selection............................................... 392 Snow chains.......................................... 374 Speed rating.......................................... 387 Storing.................................................. 395 Temperature grade................................ 384 Tire and Loading Information placard.... 380 Tire pressure (notes).............................. 375 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 378 Tire pressure table................................. 376 Tire Quality Grading............................... 384 Tire size designation.............................. 387 TIREFIT kit............................................. 353 Traction grade....................................... 384 Tread wear grade................................... 384 Index 609 Unusual handling characteristics........... 373 Toll system Windshield............................................. 174 Tool see Vehicle tool kit Top Tether.................................................... 69 Touch Control Driver display........................................ 280 Operating.............................................. 289 Touch-sensitive controls............................. 27 Touchscreen Operating.............................................. 289 Tow-away alarm Activating/deactivating......................... 104 Function................................................ 104 Tow-bar system......................................... 279 Tow-starting............................................... 368 Towing away.............................................. 364 Towing eye Installing................................................ 368 Storage location.................................... 368 Towing methods........................................ 363 Traction grade........................................... Traffic information Switching on the display........................ Traffic Light Assistant Traffic light data service........................ Traffic light data service Messages on the driver's display........... Traffic light view Activating/deactivating......................... Information............................................ Traffic Sign Assist Function/notes..................................... Setting................................................... System limits......................................... Transmission Engaging neutral................................... Transmission position display................. Transporting Loading guidelines................................. Vehicle.................................................. Tread wear grade...................................... Trim element (Care).................................. 384 313 248 248 248 248 244 247 244 204 203 134 365 384 348 Trunk box see EASY-PACK trunk box Trunk lid Activating/deactivating the trunk lid opening height restriction....................... 92 Closing.................................................... 86 Emergency release (from inside).............. 91 HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 89 Locking separately................................... 91 Opening................................................... 85 Opening dimensions.............................. 501 Power closing function............................ 86 Unlocking (mechanical key)..................... 91 TuneIn Calling up.............................................. 334 Turn signal indicator................................. 156 Turn signal light Activating/deactivating......................... 156 Two-way radios Frequencies........................................... 403 Notes on installation............................. 402 Transmission output (maximum)........... 403 610 Index U Unlocking see Locking/unlocking Unlocking setting........................................ 77 Updates Important system updates.................... 303 USB port Front storage compartment................... 137 Rear passenger compartment............... 148 User profiles Adding a user........................................ 300 Selecting user options........................... 300 V Vehicle Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 217 Collision detection (parking).................. 216 Correct use............................................. 33 Data acquisition...................................... 36 Data storage............................................ 36 Diagnostics connection........................... 32 Equipment............................................... 26 Limited Warranty..................................... 35 Locking (automatically)........................... 83 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)....... 84 Locking/unlocking (from inside).............. 81 Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)........... 81 Lowering............................................... 400 Maintenance........................................... 28 Medical aids............................................ 34 Parking for an extended period.............. 217 Problem notification................................ 34 QR code rescue card............................... 35 Qualified specialist workshop.................. 33 Raising.................................................. 396 Standby mode function.......................... 217 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 190 Starting (Remote Online)....................... 191 Starting (start/stop button).................. 190 Switching off (start/stop button)........... 210 Towing................................................... 279 Ventilating (convenience opening)........... 94 Vehicle battery see Battery (vehicle) Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT).............. 203 Roof load............................................... 502 Turning circle......................................... 501 Vehicle height........................................ 501 Vehicle length........................................ 501 Vehicle width......................................... 501 Wheelbase............................................. 501 Vehicle data storage Event data recorders............................... 39 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect............................................. 39 Vehicle dimensions................................... 501 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate Paint code............................................. 492 VIN........................................................ 492 Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online)....... 191 Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle operation Outside the USA or Canada..................... 27 Vehicle sensors Information............................................ 218 Index 611 Vehicle tool kit TIREFIT kit............................................. 353 Towing eye............................................ 368 Ventilating Convenience opening.............................. 94 Ventilation see Climate control Vents see Air vents VIN Identification plate................................ 492 Seat....................................................... 492 Windshield............................................ 492 Vision Removing condensation from the windows................................................ 180 Windshield heater.................................. 183 W Warning lamp see Warning/indicator lamp Warning system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Warning triangle Removing............................................... Setting up.............................................. Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp........................ Ä Active Brake Assist warning lamp...................................................... J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)........................................ $ Brake warning lamp (USA only).... J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only)......................................... ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red).......... ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow)..... ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only)....................... F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only)............................ # Electrical malfunction warning lamp...................................................... ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp.... 351 351 574 573 572 572 571 566 567 570 570 568 568 å ESP® OFF warning lamp............... ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes.......... ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up........ 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes................................................... 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up................................................ H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system warning lamp............................. Ù Power steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... Ù Power steering warning lamp (yellow).................................................. Ù Rear axle steering warning lamp (red).............................................. Ù Rear axle steering warning lamp (yellow)......................................... é Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)........................ 6 Restraint system warning lamp.... 576 575 575 568 569 577 564 564 565 565 571 562 612 Index ü Seat belt warning lamp flashes.... ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up.......................................................... ä Suspension warning lamp (red).... ä Suspension warning lamp (yel‐ low)....................................................... ! The electric parking brake (yel‐ low) indicator lamp................................ h Tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem warning lamp flashes...................... h Tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem warning lamp lights up................... L Warning lamp for distance warning function.................................... Overview................................................ REAR SEAT AIR BAG................................ Warning/indicator lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG.............................. Warranty...................................................... 563 563 574 573 570 577 578 573 561 59 55 35 Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Washing by hand (care)............................ Water tank see Air-water duct Weather information................................. Web browsers Overview............................................... Wheel change Lowering the vehicle............................. Mounting a new wheel.......................... Removing a wheel................................. Removing/installing hub caps............... Wheel rotation........................................... Wheels Care...................................................... Checking............................................... Checking the tire pressure (manually)... Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐ sure monitoring system)........................ Definitions............................................. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... Flat tire.................................................. 345 313 325 400 399 398 396 394 346 373 377 379 389 385 351 Installing................................................ 399 Load index............................................. 387 Load-bearing capacity........................... 387 Maximum tire load................................ 386 Maximum tire pressure......................... 386 MOExtended tires.................................. 352 Noise..................................................... 373 Notes on installing................................ 392 Overview of tire labeling........................ 384 Removing.............................................. 398 Replacing...................................... 392, 396 Replacing the hub cap........................... 396 Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ ing system............................................. 379 Rotating................................................. 394 Selection............................................... 392 Snow chains.......................................... 374 Speed rating.......................................... 387 Storing.................................................. 395 Temperature grade................................ 384 Tire and Loading Information placard.... 380 Tire characteristics................................ 387 Tire pressure (notes).............................. 375 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 378 Tire pressure table................................. 376 Index 613 Tire Quality Grading............................... Tire size designation.............................. TIREFIT kit............................................. Traction grade....................................... Tread wear grade................................... Unusual handling characteristics........... Wi-Fi Configuring........................................... Window curtain airbag............................... Window lifter see Side windows Windows Care...................................................... Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting.............................................. Infrared reflective.................................. Radio waves........................................... Replacing the wiper blades.................... Replacing wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)................................. 384 387 353 384 384 373 304 49 346 176 175 174 168 170 Windshield see Windshield Windshield heater..................................... Windshield heater see Windshield heater Windshield washer fluid Notes.................................................... Windshield washer system Refilling................................................. Windshield wipers Activating/deactivating......................... Replacing the wiper blades.................... Replacing wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)................................. Winter operation Activating/deactivating snow chain mode..................................................... Snow chains.......................................... Wiper blades Care...................................................... Replacing............................................... Replacing (MAGIC VISION CONTROL).... 183 500 342 168 168 170 374 374 346 168 170 Wireless charging Function/notes...................................... 151 Mobile phone........................................ 152 Mobile phone (rear passenger com‐ partment).............................................. 153 Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity........................ 30 Workout program Overview............................................... 123 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop